TW462039B - Optical recording medium, reproduction apparatus of optical disk and method thereof, fabricating method of the original optic disk, and illegal program operation stop method - Google Patents

Optical recording medium, reproduction apparatus of optical disk and method thereof, fabricating method of the original optic disk, and illegal program operation stop method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW462039B
TW462039B TW086102384A TW86102384A TW462039B TW 462039 B TW462039 B TW 462039B TW 086102384 A TW086102384 A TW 086102384A TW 86102384 A TW86102384 A TW 86102384A TW 462039 B TW462039 B TW 462039B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
signal
disc
recording
recorded
offset
Prior art date
Application number
TW086102384A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Fumiaki Ueno
Mitsuaki Oshima
Original Assignee
Matsushita Electronics Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/JP1994/002304 external-priority patent/WO1995018443A1/en
Application filed by Matsushita Electronics Corp filed Critical Matsushita Electronics Corp
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW462039B publication Critical patent/TW462039B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Optical Recording Or Reproduction (AREA)
  • Signal Processing For Digital Recording And Reproducing (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides an optical disk 709 having the function of preventing copying, its reproducing apparatus 747 of optic disk and the method thereof, fabricating method of the original optic disk, and an illegal program operation stop method; an area in which a CP signal 724 having the center of an eye pattern deviated from the center of an amplitude is recorded is disposed at the back of a predetermined pattern signal in the optical disk. A reproduction apparatus additionally has the function of detecting an arrangement information 725 of the CP signal or a CP preceding signal 726, applying an offset voltage to a threshold value at the time of demodulation of an RF signal to a digital signal to change the threshold value, normally reproducing the signal having the center of the eye pattern deviated from the center of the amplitude, and stopping reproduction when a predetermined offset signal is not reproduced. Regarded as the other method, the first physical characteristic information of the original physical characteristic on the original disk 2 or optic disk 709 can be encrypted and its secret code can be recorded by the encryption means 742, the secret code is reproduced in the reproducing device, and the first physical characteristic information can be recovered by the secret code recovering means 734. At the same time, the physical characteristic of the optical disk 709 is measured by the measurement means to obtain the second physical characteristic information. Then the first physical characteristic information and the second physical characteristic information are collated, when they do not satisfy a given relation, it is given the function of stop reproducing or action.

Description

9 3 ο 2 6 49 3 ο 2 6 4

AA

7 B 明説明發 f五 ’ 方 置作 装製 及之 法碟 方光 之等 體該 媒 、 錄碟 記光 製 之 複能 止機 > 防製 喃種複 > .範 一 止 明 用 關防 說利有有 细之 係具 詳 上明種 之 業發一 明 產本關 發 < 有 < 尤 法 方 造 製 之 盤 原 碟 光 及 置 装 。 生 者 再法 、 方 法止 方中 > 生作術 苒動.技 碟式知 光程習 及法 < 法不 ’ 聲 0 錄 原 此 從用 係 使 般 ’ 一 作 , 製 碟序 光順 等 模 盤 主 由 經 模 造 製 片 造量 製大 片型 聲成 錄出 、 射 模由 母藉 情光光 之布射 模 塗 雪 造上之 製板度 片基強 聲璃製 錄玻調 作之所 製磨號 接研信 直羥訊 盤面資 原表之 從於錄 有侥記 亦般應 但 I 由 。 , 藉 者盤並 造原 , 製碟劑 而光蝕 製。抗 複形致 其製 應 而 對 ’ 成溝 肜及 而號 , 信 像狀 顯凸 之凹 使 是 , 者 後或 之 ’ ’ 溝 光或 感號 劑信 蝕狀 抗凸 致凹 光之 該度 對光 ’ 感 及 號 信 狀 凸 凹 者 或 溝 或 號 信 狀 凸 。 凹槽 該 號 將信 ’ 為 下呼 Μ 稱 。 部 者全 出 ’ 作 溝 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央棹a局員工消贤合作社印製 。擴係 圖束體 塊光全 方之之 之系置 置學装 裝光錄 錄射記 記 雷 之 盤錄盤 原記原 之或 , 知 糸 中 習 學 圖 為光六 者射第 示 雷 。 所之略 圖用省 四制 Μ 十控加 七點係 第 隹一等 as 有大 以 面 6 4 鏡 ’ 為板 3 璃 , 玻 器 之 製劑 調 蝕 光抗 為致 2 光 - 有 射 布 I田 塗 用為 錄 5 Bet 為器 1i πν 33 ’ 驅 示 頭 表鏡 Α 為 C e Γ 器 化 等 錄 記 為 8 源 號 倌 為 7 機 動 電 軸 主 為 6 a u Q e d Γ 〇7 B Explains that the F5 'side is set as the installation system and the optical disc is the same as the optical disc, the disc is recorded, the disc is recorded, and the system is reactivated.> Fan Yizhi is used for the purpose. The customs guard said that there is a detailed system that can be used to explain the details of the industry. The production of the production of this product is "with" the original disc made and installed by Youfafang. The rebirth of the surviving method, the method of stopping the method > The live action technique. The skill of the disc knowing the light and the practice of the method < the method of the sound is not sound. The master of the mold plate is recorded by large-scale sounds produced by mold making, volume production, and the shooting mode is made by the mother. The original table of the production information of the manufacturing mill No. received the direct letter of the letter from the record should be recorded in the record, but it should be the same. , Borrow and make original, dish-making agent and photo-etching system. Anti-rehabilitation causes its system to respond to the formation of the groove and the letter, the convexity of the letter-like convexity is, the latter or the '' the degree of groove-like light or the sensitivity of the signal-etching anti-convexity of the concave light To the light 'sense, the signal letter is convex or concave, or the groove or signal letter is convex. This number is called "M" under the letter. The Ministry of Economic Affairs and the People's Republic of China's Ministry of Economic Affairs (Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs) printed this document. Expansion of the system of the bundle of light, the system of the whole light, the installation of equipment, the installation of optical recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, recording, and recording. The sketch is based on the provincial four systems, mega control and seven points, the first class as there is a large surface of 6 4 mirrors for the plate 3 glass, the glassware preparations have a modified photoresistance to cause 2 light-there is a cloth I field The application is to record 5 Bet for the device 1i πν 33 'drive head mirror A for Ce e Γ instrumentation and other records for 8 source number 倌 7 for motorized axis 6 au Q ed Γ 〇

Γ e Z 號 信 之 生 發 7 源 號 信 在 本紙張尺度通用中國S家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2I0X297公釐) 經濟部中央標嚷·局負工消贫合作枉印龙 462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() ,藉由記錄等化器8 ,使其脈衝波幅作一定量雯化,接著 輸入光調製器2 >以調製從記錄用雷射1射出之雷射光之 強度=該強度被調製之雷射光通過鏡面3 >並通過K鏡頭 111動器4控制其焦點之鏡頭,使玻璃板5上之光致抗蝕材 料曝光。 光碟之再生装置,係將半導體雷射光集光於光碟之信 號面上|並將來自信號面之反射光之強度,以光拾波器之 光電二極體等•調'製成電子信號,(此信號稱為R F信號 ),並整形其波形,復還元為數位信號1並實行數位倌號 處理,而再生原信號者。 ; 第t十五圖所示者為習知之光碟再生装置4 7A之方 塊圖。第t十五圖中> 9為光碟,10為光拾波器* I 1 為主軸發動槠,1 2A為類比波形整形部,1 3為數位復 元部| 1 4為數位信號處理部,1 5為控制部,i 6為聚 焦伺服部> 18為回轉何服部。19A為將RF信號復元 為數位信號之數位信號復元部> 2〇 A為控制全體再生動 作 > 並控钊送出顯示信號给顯示部4 1之控制部。 復元為數位信號前之.信號,亦即.β F信._號•像具有眼 孔圖樣(e y e pat tern)。眼孔圖樣之一例如 第t十圖所示。眼孔圖樣之中心與振幅之中心多少有所偏 移,(稱為:不對稱),即使僅有某程度之偏移*於復元 為數位信號時,則須藉由自_補IE限幅回路3 1補正限制 位準(si ice level) Vs ,如第t十一圖之 本纸乐尺度迺用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4現格(2I0 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背ναο之Vi意事項再填寫本頁)Γ e Letter 7 was born and issued. The source letter is based on the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (2I0X297 mm) in this paper. Explanation (), by recording the equalizer 8 to make a certain amount of pulse amplitude, and then input the light modulator 2 > to modulate the intensity of the laser light emitted from the recording laser 1 = the intensity is modulated The laser light passes through the lens 3 > and the lens whose focus is controlled by the K lens 111 actuator 4 to expose the photoresist material on the glass plate 5. The optical disc reproduction device collects the semiconductor laser light on the signal surface of the optical disc | and uses the intensity of the reflected light from the signal surface to make an electronic signal with the photodiode's photodiode etc. ( This signal is called an RF signal), and its waveform is shaped, and the restoration is converted to digital signal 1 and digital sign processing is performed to reproduce the original signal. Figure t15 shows a block diagram of a conventional disc reproduction device 47A. Figure 15:> 9 is the optical disc, 10 is the optical pickup * I 1 is the main axis starter, 1 2A is the analog waveform shaping unit, 1 3 is the digital restoration unit | 1 4 is the digital signal processing unit, 1 5 is a control section, i 6 is a focus servo section > 18 is a rotary servo section. 19A is a digital signal restoration unit which restores the RF signal to a digital signal > 20A is a control unit which controls the entire reproduction operation > and sends a display signal to the display unit 41. The complex is the signal before the digital signal, that is, the β F letter. The _ number • The image has an eye pattern (e y e pat tern). One example of the eye pattern is shown in figure t10. The center of the eye pattern and the center of the amplitude are somewhat offset (called: asymmetry), even if there is only a certain degree of offset * when the restoration is a digital signal, the IE limiter loop must be compensated by self-_ 3 1 Correction limit level (si ice level) Vs, as shown in the twelfth figure of the paper music scale, using the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2I0 X 297 mm) (Please fill in this page if you have any questions)

462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 波形(9)所示,將自動檢知眼孔圖樣之中心電壓Vs , 而使其可被限幅(s丨i c e )。有關眼孔圖樣之中心者 ,請容後述。 通常,為減少再生時之不對稱,於製作原^時,常會 對原盤施加記錄信號之能率比之補正。此舉即稱' =化/而記錄等化量,則因記錄之動力和信號槽轉寫.時之顯 像條f、吾生條件等,其最佳值將有所不同。 - * · 經濟部中央標毕局員工消资合作社印製 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 又,習知之光碟中*係具有記錄有作為遴輯性之禁止 複製信號之J方止複製標誌之物品者。因此,記錄有防止複 製標誌信號之光碟,於其記錄再生信號時*若此防止複製 標誌信號被檢知 > 則可防止記錄装置寅行再生信號之記錄 。但是,CD等之ROM碟之再生装置*從來就不具有可 防止或禁止從不法複製媒體中再生之機能。從K注,就一 直發售有僅作一次寫人,而Μ平常之再生装置即可再生之 光碟媒體。但是•購入該種光碟媒體《而於該媒體上實行 市售之正規光碟之複製(copy)時>因其價位將比直 接購人正規光碟為高,或因複製用之寫人裝置價格昂貴而 未普及*故幾乎不須要採取對應不法複製之對策。 担是,近年來,光碟變成記錄遊戲等軟體之物品,此 種記錄有遊戲軟體之市販光碟,因其軟體之附加價值,其 變成比一般市販之音樂用CD ,販賣價格更高。一方面1 僅寫入一次•而以普通之再生装置即可再生之先碟媒體之 價格1年年降低。又·原盤製作裝置亦漸漸要得容易獲得 -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 經濟部中央椋局貝工消費合作杜印裂 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 。在此種狀況下|本來販賣價格甚高之光碟片,則會出琨 複製反而比較便宜之情形。又,不法複製原盤,而販賣海 盜版光碟之機會亦增多。在此狀況下|防止複製之技術被 迫切地須要著。 <發明欲解抉之課題> 本發明之目的在於提供一種具有防止複製機能之光記 肄媒體、光碟再生裝置、光碟再生方法、光碟原盤之製作 一广, 方法及不法程式動作中止方法者。 <解決課題之手段> 本發明係K K下之各樣態達成上述目的。亦即,作為 第一種樣態,係於光碟上之.既定...型式之、信_號之後,設置可 記錄將眼孔圈樣自艰.孔彼_胺之_.遍___幢_._中_—血.錯旦.之號域 ,並附加當苒生裝置中檢知一定之圖樣信號後,即令將R F信號復元為數位信號時之基直產生崖_化.之__機._能1 K及若 不再生將眼孔圖樣自振幅中心錯開之佶號,即停止再生之 機能,而達成其目的者。有關眼孔圖樣之中心及振幅之中 心,請容後述。 作為第2種樣態,在上述目的之光碟原盤作成時•或 者光反射膜作成時,藉由在光碟上設置暗號H部,以該 暗號記錄部記錄由抽出原盤或光碟上所胗成之光碟之物理 性特散所得之第1物理特徵資訊被暗號化後所得之第1暗 號*同時藉由在再生装置中附加:Μ暗號解碼器將自光碟 記錄部所再生出之暗號加以普通文字化而獲得第1物理特 -7 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -n - 'I—J^ J · --a 0--------- 462039 Λ7 B7 ^濟部中央標免局員工消费合作社印焚 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 1 徵 資 訊 之 邏 輯 實 料 之 機 能 T 藉 由 測 定 手 段 莨 際 測 定 光 碟 之 1 1 1 物 理 性 特 徴 Μ 獲 得 第 2 物 理 特 徴 資 訊 之 機 能 對 照 黃 際 1 I 請 1 ] 測 得 之 第 2 物 理 特 澂 資 訊 與 作 為 正 規 光 碟 對 照 用 資 料 之 第 先 Μ 1 | 讀 1 1 物 理 持 遨 資 訊 之 機 能 * 對 照 不 — 致 時 停 止 再 生 之 楗 能 y 背 1 £ | m 該 機 能 達 到 前 述 之 S 的 〇 | 1 作 為 第 3 種 樣 態 r 其 係 在 第 2 種 樣 m 中 附 加 使 用 設 Μ- ! t 再 於 高 反 射 寒 之 反 射 膜 上 之 低 反 射 率 部 之 位 置 資 訊 作 為 上 逑 1 寫 本 裝 第 1 物 理 特 徵 實 IR 之 機 能 而 達 成 者 0 頁 ! 1 作 為 第 4 種 樣 態 其 係 在 第 2 種 樣 態 中 附 加 將 第 1 I 1 暗 記 錄 記 於 設 於 碟 上 之 磁 性 記 錄 層 之 楗 能 而 達 成 者 0 1 1 < 作 用 > ί 1 丁 依 上 述 本 發 明 之 第 — 種 樣 態 從 記 錄 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 1 1 心 自 振 幅 中 心 錯 開 之 信 □kb 之 領 域 Μ 再 生 装 置 再 生 並 復 1 1 元 為 數 位 信 號 之 信 號 傜 為 正 規 之 信 號 若 將 復 元 之 信 5Κ 1 1 記 錄 於 可 記 錄 之 光 碟 媒 fi 而 再 生 時 眼孔圖樣之中心保 1 级 被 記 錄 成 略 接 近 振 幅 之 中 心 〇 為 此 若 便 再 生 装 置 1 i 將 R F 信 號 復 元 為 數 位 信 號 時 之 基 值 而 再 生 時 因 將 1 ί 不 當 作 正 規 信 5jE 而 再 生 故 再 生 將 中 止 而 使 被 複 製 之 光 1 1 碟 無 法 再 生 而 可 防 止 不 法 之 複 製 〇 1 I 依 本 發 明 之 第 2 種 樣 m j 田 正 規 工 廠 和 盗 版 X 廠 具 有 1 1 完 全 相 同 之 市 售 之 製 造 裝 置 時 在 正 規 之 碟 片 工 廠 中 t 可 1 1 用 — 般 之 製 造 裝 置 以 標 準 之 製 造 精 度 作 成 原 盤 或 碟 片 1 1 , 並 以 較 製 造 精 度 高 之 測 定 精 度 測 定 物 理 性 特 徵 t kk 獲 得 1 ! - 8- 1 I 1 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(21 OX 297公釐) 4 6 20 3 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央標牟局員H消費合作衽印^ 五、發明説明( ) ί 1 1 代 表 碟 片 之 物 理 性 特 徵 之 第 1 物 理 特 徵 資 訊 > 並 以 密 磚 將 1 1 1 第 1 物 理 特 徵 資 訊 暗 號 化 而 預 先 記 錄 於 碟 片 之 暗 號 記 錄 1 1 讀 1 [ 部 0 在 盗 版 碟 片 之 製 造 工 廠 即 使 其 具 有 相 同 之 製 造 装 置 Μ 1 I 讀 1 但 測 定 精 度 常 較 製 造 精 度 為 问 0 因 此 >1 相 同 裝 置 欲 背 1 — & I 以 測 定 精 度 複 製 第 1 物 理 特 徵 係 不 可 能 0 又 t 因 具 有 密 碼、 疋 注 j 意 I > 故 Μ ί\'.Χ 法 不 法 變 更 第 1 暗 號 即 對 昭 用 資 訊 之 第 1 物 理 特 徵 事 項 [ I 再 資 訊 0 如 此 並 法 複 製 出 相 同 之 碟 片 0 —— 方 面 再 生 裝 置 填 1 *~r 寫 本 裝 Η 從 此 暗 □占 Wb 記 錄 部 中 再 生 暗 號 並 使 用 公 開 碼 將 第 1 物 理 頁 1 i 特 徵 資 訊 普 通 文 字 化 〇 同 時 使 用 測 手 段 測 定 對 應 碟 1 1 片 之 物 理 特 徴 即 第 2 物 理 特 徵 資 訊 〇 對 照 手 段 對 照 用 1 1 之 第 1 物 理 特 徵 資 訊 及 測 得 之 第 2 物 理 特 徵 資 訊 而 僅 在 1 訂 滿 足 特 定 關 係 時 視 為 正 規 碟 片 而 再 生 不 — 致 時 則 判 定 非 [ 1 正 規 碟 片 而 以 再 生 停 止 手 段 停 止 再 生 、 輸 出 等 輸 作 >λ 1 1 防 止 盜 版 碟 片 之 不 法 使 用 0 1 1 本 發 明 之 第 3 種 樣 m 之 作 用 基 本 上 與 第 2 種 樣 態 相 ] 線 同 在 正 規 之 碟 片 工 廠 以 設 於 碟 片 上 之 低 反 射 部 之 位 置 1 I 資 訊 作 為 第 1 物 理 特 徴 貝 訊 在 再 生 裝 置 Μ 主 信 號 再 生 1 1 用 之 光 m 頭 檢 知 低 反 射 部 之 位 置 Κ 判 別 其 為 盜 版 碟 片 或 1 1 正 規 碟 片 〇 第 4 種 樣 態 之 作 用 基 本 上 與 第 2 種 及 第 3 種 樣 i 1 能 /Lit'. 相 同 其 僅 在 光 碟 上 設 置 磁 性 記 錄 部 作 為 暗 號 記 錄 部 之 1 i I U 不 同 0 1 1 < 圖 面 之 簡 na 单 說 明 > 1 1 第 一 圖 為 本 發 明 第 一 實 施 例 中 之 主 m 記 錄 機 裝 置 之 方 塊 圖 i l - 9- f 1 本紙張尺度適用中圉國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 倾濟部中央標準局員工消贽合作.社印复 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 〇 .第二圖(a)為同第一貫疵例中之記錄時之線速度之時間 變化圖;(b)為同一實施例中光碟上之1·2m/s時 之位址位置圖;(c)為同一實施例中光碟之1 · 2m/ s — l ·4γπ / s時之位址位置之示意圖。 第三圖(a)為同第一簧施例中之正規之CD之位址之物 理配置圖;(b)為同一簧施例中之不法複製之CD之位 • 、 址之物理配置圖。 第四圖(a)為同第一實胞例中之光碟之回轉脈衝及時間 之關係圖;(b)為同第一茛施例中之物理位置信號及時 間之關侥圖;(c )為同第一質施例中之位址寅訊及時間 之關保圖。 第五圖為同第一實施例中之CD之防止複製原理之說明圖462039 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () As shown in waveform (9), the center voltage Vs of the eye pattern will be automatically detected so that it can be clipped (s 丨 i c e). The center of the eye pattern will be described later. Generally, in order to reduce the asymmetry during reproduction, when the original is produced, a correction of the energy ratio of the recording signal is often applied to the original disc. This action is called '= // and the equalization amount of the record. Due to the power of the record and the signal slot transcribing. At the time of the picture bar f, my life conditions, etc., the optimal value will be different. -* · Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Also, the conventional CD-ROM * is the party J with the recording of a copy-prohibiting signal for selection. Only those who copy the logo items. Therefore, when an optical disc is recorded with a copy prevention signal, when the reproduction signal is recorded * If the copy prevention signal is detected >, the recording device can prevent the reproduction signal from being recorded. However, the reproduction device of a ROM disc such as a CD * has never had a function of preventing or prohibiting reproduction from an illegal copy medium. From the K note, there has always been a disc medium that can be reproduced only once, and can be reproduced by M's usual reproduction device. However, when buying this kind of optical disc media, "when copying a commercially available regular optical disc on this media", because the price will be higher than the direct purchase of regular discs, or because the writing device used for copying is expensive And it is not popular * so it is almost unnecessary to take countermeasures against illegal reproduction. The problem is that in recent years, optical discs have become an item for recording software such as games. Such commercially available optical discs with recorded game software have become more expensive than ordinary commercial CDs for music because of the added value of the software. On the one hand, the price of the first-disc media that can be reproduced by ordinary reproduction devices only once is reduced every year. Also, the original production equipment is gradually becoming easier to obtain. -6-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm). The Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperation, Du Yinye 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 5 Description of the invention (). In this situation, the original discs, which are very expensive to sell, will be cheaper to copy. In addition, illegal copying of the original disc is possible, and opportunities for selling pirated optical discs are increasing. In this situation | technology to prevent copying is urgently needed. < Problems to be Solved by the Invention > An object of the present invention is to provide a light recording medium having a copy prevention function, a disc reproduction device, a disc reproduction method, a method for producing a disc original disc, a method, and a method for stopping an illegal program operation. . < Means for solving the problem > The present invention achieves the above-mentioned objects in various aspects under KK. That is, as the first aspect, it is attached to the optical disc. After the established ... type and the letter _ number, it can be set to record the eye circle circle from the difficult. 孔 彼 _ 胺 之 _. 次 ___ Building _._ 中 _—blood. Wurdan. No. field, and when a certain pattern signal is detected in the hygienic device, the base when the RF signal is restored to a digital signal is generated. _ 机 ._ Those who can 1K and stray the eye pattern from the center of the amplitude without regenerating, will stop the function of regeneration and achieve its purpose. The center of the eye pattern and the center of the amplitude are described later. As the second aspect, when the original disc of the above-mentioned purpose is created or when the light reflection film is created, a code H is provided on the disc, and the code recorded on the disc is used to record the extracted disc or the disc formed on the optical disc. The first secret feature information obtained after the first physical characteristic information obtained by the special physical dispersion is secretized * At the same time, by adding to the reproduction device: the secret decoder, the plaintext reproduced from the disc recording portion is written Obtained the 1st physical feature -7-This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -n-'I—J ^ J ·- -a 0 --------- 462039 Λ7 B7 ^ Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Free Trade of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China 5. Description of the invention () 1 1 1 The function of collecting the logical and physical information of information T By means of measurement 莨The 1st 1 physical characteristics of the international measurement disc are compared to the function of obtaining the 2nd physical characteristics information compared to Huang Ji 1 I Please 1] The measured 2nd physical characteristics information and The first M1 for reading data for regular CD comparison | Reading 1 1 The function of holding physical information * Contrast not-the ability to stop regeneration when it is y back 1 £ | m The machine can reach the above-mentioned S of 0 | 1 as the first The 3 types of r are used in the second type of m in addition to the position information of the low-reflectance part on the high-reflective cold reflective film. 0 page! 1 As the fourth mode, it is achieved by adding the ability to record the first I 1 dark record in the magnetic recording layer on the disc in the second mode. 0 1 1 < Action > ί 1 Ding Yi According to the above-mentioned first aspect of the present invention-the eyes will be opened from the record Among the samples, the 1 1 heart is staggered from the center of the amplitude. The field of kb is reproduced and reproduced by 1 1 yuan. It is a digital signal. It is a normal signal. If the letter 5 K 1 1 is recorded on a recordable optical disc medium, fi, the center of the eye pattern is recorded at level 1 during reproduction, so it is slightly close to the center of the amplitude. Therefore, if the reproduction device 1 i restores the RF signal to the base value when it is a digital signal, it will not be regarded as 1 when it is reproduced. Letter 5jE and the reproduction will be suspended so that the copied light 1 1 disc cannot be reproduced and illegal copying can be prevented. 0 1 I According to the second sample of the present invention, the Mj Tian factory and the pirated X factory have 1 1 exactly the same Commercially available manufacturing equipment can be used in a regular disc factory. 1-General manufacturing equipment can be used to produce original discs or discs with standard manufacturing accuracy. 1 1 And measure the physical characteristics with higher accuracy than the manufacturing precision. T kk obtained 1!-8- 1 I 1 This paper size uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 OX 297 mm) 4 6 20 3 9 A7 B7 Member of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumption Co-operation Seal ^ V. Description of the Invention () ί 1 1 Represents the 1st physical characteristic information of the physical characteristics of the disc > Coded and recorded in advance on the disc 1 1 read 1 [part 0 in the manufacturing factory of pirated discs even if they have the same manufacturing device M 1 I read 1 but the measurement accuracy is often 0 compared to the manufacturing accuracy. Therefore > 1 The same device is intended to carry 1 — & I is impossible to reproduce the 1st physical characteristic with measurement accuracy 0 and t because it has a password, note j meaning I > therefore Μ \ ' .X cannot illegally change the 1st secret sign, which is the 1st physical characteristic of Zhaoyong Information [I re-information 0 This way, the same disc 0 is reproduced in the same way —— Fill in the reproduction device 1 * ~ r Occupy the reproduction code in the Wb recording section and use the public code to normalize the first physical page 1 i feature information. At the same time, use the measurement method to measure the physical characteristics of the corresponding disc 1 1 piece, that is, the second physical feature information. The 1st physical characteristic information and the measured 2nd physical characteristic information are regarded as regular discs and will not be reproduced only when the 1 order satisfies a specific relationship-when it is judged, the non- [1 regular discs are stopped and regeneration is stopped by means of regeneration stop , Output, etc. > λ 1 1 Prevents the illegal use of pirated discs 0 1 1 The third kind of function of the present invention Originally and the second kind of phase] The line is in a regular disc factory. The position of the low-reflection part on the disc is 1 I. Information is used as the first physical feature. The head of the light m detects the position of the low-reflection section κ and judges it to be a pirated disc or 1 1 regular disc. The effect of the fourth mode is basically the same as that of the second and third modes i 1 can / Lit '. The same, only the magnetic recording part is provided on the optical disc as the secret recording part. The 1 i IU is different. 0 1 1 < Brief description of the drawing > 1 1 The first picture is the main m record in the first embodiment of the present invention. Block diagram of the machine device il-9- f 1 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). The staff of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs has eliminated cooperation. Press 4 4 203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () 〇. Second Figure (a) shows the time variation of the linear velocity at the time of recording in the first consecutive defect example; (b) shows the location of the address at 1.2 m / s on the optical disc in the same embodiment; (c) is Schematic diagram of the address position of the optical disc at 1 · 2m / s-1 · 4γπ / s in the same embodiment. The third picture (a) is the physical configuration diagram of the regular CD address in the first spring embodiment; (b) is the physical arrangement diagram of the illegally copied CD address in the same spring embodiment. The fourth figure (a) is the relationship diagram with the rotation pulse and time of the optical disc in the first real cell example; (b) is the relationship diagram with the physical position signal and time in the first buttercup example; (c) It is the same as the address map in the first embodiment. The fifth figure is an explanatory diagram of the copy prevention principle of the CD in the first embodiment

Q 第六圖為同第一實施例中之記錄再生裝置之方塊圖。 第t圖為同第一茛施例中之不法複製光碟之檢查之流程圖 。第八圖(a )為同第一簧施例中之記錄i D號碼之C D 之工程圖;(b)為習知之CD之工程圖。 第九圖(a)為同第一昔施例中之著磁機之上視圖; (b )為同第一簧施例中之著磁健之側視圖; (c )為同第一宵疵例中之著磁楗之側視擴大圖; (d )為同第一筈胞例中之著磁機之方塊圖。 第十圖為同第一茛施洌中之I D號碼輸入之原理圖。 -1 0 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2!ΟΧ 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) —^1 —I I - KH ...... ―^― m. In - I -- In - - I - I - 1 I - - In - - I ---- r I n] 1^1 U3.-· 經濟部中央椋隼局員工消賢合作杜印繁 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 第十一圖(a)為同第一茛施例中之定線速度時之線速度 _時間圖; (b )為同第一簧施例中之婊速度變更時之線速 度一時間圖; (c)為同第一茛施例中之一.定線速度時之位址 之物理配置圖; (d )為同第一實施例中之線速度變化時之位址 • --广, 之物理配置圖。 第十二圖(a)為同第一寅施例中之正規原盤之斷面圖; (b )為同第一實施例中之正規成形碟片之斷面圖; (c) 為同第一貿施例中之不法複製之原盤之斷面圖; (d) 為同第一實施例中之不法複製之成形碟片之斷面圖 〇 第十三圖為同第一實施例中之C D作成楗和記錄再生裝置 之方塊圖。 第十四圖為同第一寅施例中之流程圖。 第十五圖為同第一實施例中之光碟原盤之位址之配置圖。 第十六圖為同第一寅施例中之記錄再生装置之方塊圖。 第十t圖(a)為同第一賁施例中之不法碟片之斷面圖; (b)為同第一實施例中之正規碟Η之斷面圖; (c )為同第一實施例中之光再生信號之波形圖; (d )為同第一實施例中之數位信號之波形圖; (e )為同第一寊施例中之包絡線之波形圖; -1 1 - 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) 格(210X 297公釐) '^------訂------咸 {請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 6 20 3 9 A7 _B7_;_ 五、發明說明() (f)為同第一實陁例中之數位信號之波彤圖; (S)為同第一實施例中之檢知信號之波形圖。 第十八圖所示者為同第一實施例中之碟片物理配置表。 第十九圖(a)為同第一賁施例中之無偏心光碟之位址配 «函 , 圖* (b)為同第一實施例中之具偏心之光碟之位址配置圖。 第二十圖(a)為同第一實施例中之正規碟片之循跡變位 畺之示意圈; (b)為同第一實拖洌中之不法複製之碟片之循跡變化 量之示意圖。 第二十一圖(a)為同第一實施例中之位址An之示意圖 ;(b)為同第一實施例中之角度Zn之示意圖; (c )為同第一實施例中之循跡量Τη之示意圈; (d)為同第一簧施例中之信號槽深度Dn之示意圖。 第二十二圖為同第一實施例中之雷射输出及信號槽深度及 再生信號之示意圖。 第二十三圖為同第一實施例中之針對各原盤作成裝置 之防止複製效果之示意圖。 第二十四圈為同第一實施例中之原盤作成裝置之方塊圖。 第二十五圖為同第一霣施例中之原盤作成裝置之方塊圖。 第二十六圈為同第一實施洌中之原盤作成裝置之方塊圖。 第二十七'圖為同第一實施例中之原盤作成裝置之方塊圖。 第二十八圖為同第一實施例中之原盤作成装置之方塊圖。 -12- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公t ) ------------ --------訂 ----------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) A7 B7 4£濟"中央^準局員工消资合""中纪 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 4 1 ( f ) 為 同 第 — 實 施 例 中 之 檢 知 信 號 之 波 圖 0 1 1 1 第 十 八 圖 所 示 者 為 同 第 一 實 施 例 中 之 碟 片 物 理 m 置 表 0 1 I 請 1 1 第 十 九 圖 ( a ) 為 同 第 實 施 例 中 之 無 偏 心 光 碟 之 位 址 配 先 1 1 讀 I 置 圖 背 1 — 面 | ( b ) 為 同 第 一 茸 施 洌 中 之 具 偏 心 之 光 碟 之 位 址 配 置、 之 注 | 意 1 圖 0 事 項 ! [ 再 第 — 十 圈 ( a ) 為 同 第 一 施 例 中 之 正 規 碟 片 之 循 跡 變 位 填 έ 寫 本 量 之 示 意 圖 % 1 I ( b ) 為 同 第 — 實 施 例 中 之 不 法 複 製 之 碟 片 之 循 跡 荽 化 1 1 量 之 示 意 圖 0 、· 1 ! 第 二 十 一 圖 ( a ) 為 同 第 一 施 例 中 之 位 址 A η 之 示 意 圖 1 訂 1 j ( b ) 為 同 第 — 踅 胞 例 中 之 角 度 Z η 之 示 思 圖 ( C ) 為 同 第 — 茛 疵 例 中 之 循 跡 量 Τ η 之 示 意 圖 1 ! ( d ) 為 同 第 一 寅 施 例 中 之 信 號 槽 深 度 D η 之 示 意 圖 0 I 1 第 二 十 - 圈 為 同 第 __* 菩 施 例 中 之 雷 射 輸 出 及 信 號 槽 深 度 及 1 線 再 生 信 號 之 示 意 圖 0 1 I 第 二 十 三 圖 為 同 第 一 實 施 例 中 之 針 對 各 原 盤 作 成 装 置 I 1 之 防 止 複 製 效 果 之 示 意 圖 0 1 1 第 二 十 四 圖 為 同 第 — 實 疵 例 中 之 原 盤 作 成 装 置 之 方 塊 圖 〇 1 | 第 二 十 五 圖 為 同 第 — 簧 施 例 中 之 原 盤 作 成 装 置 之 方 塊 圖 1 1 第 二 十 ..1.- 圖 為 同 第 — 實 疵 例 中 之 原 盤 作 成 装 置 之 方 瑰 圖 〇 1 1 第 二 十 t 圓 為 同 第 — 莨 施 例 中 之 原 盤 作 成 装 置 之 方 塊 圖 〇 1 I 第 二 十 八 圖 為 同 第 一 實 施 例 中 之 原 盤 作 成 装 置 之 方 塊 圖 0 ! I - 12 - 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2]0X 297公釐) 4 6 203 9 A7 A / B7五、發明説明() 蛵濟部中央標李局員工消f合作.社印製 塊形 號 圖圖 圖圖造 塊 方波 信 視面 視面製 。方 體之; 。生 。上斷 。上 斷體 圖 之 。; 全出圖 圖再 圖之横 圖之 横媒 程。部 圖圖 之輸形.,;面及 程盤之 程 盤之錄 流圖知 塊視 統 射波圖 圖斷出 Η 原具 工 原具記 之塊檢 方上 系 雷之面 面之輸 之成模 之成檳 及 式方置 之之 成之 出斷斷 片錄 成作壓 成 作壓成 方之位 置片 作中輸之之碟記 作之冲 作 之沖作 查成部 装碟 盤 例射板 板形射 盤中及 盤 中和盤 檢作射 生之 原施萏基基成雷 原例盤。原 例盤原 片片反 再中 之實 之之 之之之 之施 原例之 施原之 碟碟低 錄例 中 一中中 中中中 中 In:之施 中茛 之中 之之之 記施 洌 第例例 例例例 例一 中寅例一中例 中中中 之莨 施同施施胞陁 疵 施第例之施第例施 例例例 中 | 貿為實實莨實寊.. 實同 施造實 同施霣 施施施 例第 1 } I 一 I 1 一 D 一為賁構一為賁 I 實貫實 施為 第 &第第第第第> 第 } 一縮第 _ | 第。 | 一一 實} 同 ί 同同 同同同_ 同 a 第伸同 a 第為圖 第第第 j a 為圖 為為為.為為 為 'ί 同部為 ί 同圖 程為為 為 第 f 圖 + }}}、1:圖。圖圖為 腰圖圖 為六流 圖圖圖 為圖 九 三 b c d e 一 圖二 三 } 之四五 .j 十之ir八九 圖 | 十第 丨<~丨丨十係 十十 bM十十 b 三程 十十十 + 十 二 = ; 三 關三三 ί 有三三 ί 第工 三三三 。四四 第圖圖 第 之第第., 。 第第; 。 之 第 第第 圖第第 ---------裝------訂------線 (請先W讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 4 6203 9 a? B7 鐘濟部中央椋準局員工消費合作杜印氣 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 4 I ( b ) 為 第 — fJtr 施 例 中 之 碟 片 之 上 視 圈 > 1 ί 1 { C ) 為 第 — 實 施 例 中 之 碟 片 之 上 視 圖 * 1 1 請 1 I ( d ) 為 第 —- 實 施 例 中 之 碟 Η 之 横 斷 m 圖 1 先 1 I ( e ) 為 第 — 1 It 1丨· 施 洌 中 之 再 生 信 號 之 波 形 圖 〇 讀 背 1 1 ! 第 四 十 - 圖 為 第 — 實 施 例 中 之 低 反 射 部 之 位 址 時 鐘 位 置 之 注 1 意 I 檢 知 之 原 理 圖 第 四 十 二 圖 為 第 — 實 施 例 中 之 正 規 碟 片 和 事 項 1 1 再 複 製 碟 Η 之 低 反 射 部 位 址 表 之 比 較 Μ 0 第 四 十 四 圖 為 第 導 έ Ο 寫 本 簧 施 例 中 之 藉 由 單 方 向 函 數 簧 行 碟 片 之 對 照 之 流 程 圖 0 頁 N_^ I ί 第 四 十 五 圖 為 第 一 實 施 例 中 之 各 原 m 之 位 址 之 座 標 位 置 比 ί 1 較 圖 0 I ί 第 四 十 圖 為 第 — 簧 施 例 中 之 低 反 射 位 置 檢 知 程 式 之 流 程 1 1 丁 圖 0 1 I 第 四 十 七 圖 為 第 —. 實 施 例 中 之 低 反 射 部 之 製 造 法 之 工 程 圖 1 1 0 第 四 十 八 圈 為 第 — 實 施 例 中 之 低 反 射 部 之 製 造 法 之 工 程 1 1 圖 〇 第 四 十 九 圖 為 第 _. 實 施 例 中 之 低 反 射 部 之 製 造 法 之 X 1 線 程 圖 0 第 五 十 圖 為 第 — 茛 施 例 中 之 低 反 射 部 之 製 造 法 之 工 1 1 程 圖 0 第 五 十 — 圖 為 第 — 寅 施 例 中 之 碟 片 之 上 視 圖 〇 第 五 1 i 十 二 圖 為 第 一 貢 施 例 中 之 原 版 暗 號 之 資 料 構 造 圖 0 第 五 十 1 1 三 為 第 — 實 腌 例 中 之 物 理 生 成 圖 0 第 五 十 四 圖 為 第 一 實 ! I 施 例 中 之 II 由 錯 誤 C P 符 號 t 檢 知 複 製 之 原 理 圖 0 1 1 I 苐 五 十 五 圖 為 第 — 施 例 中 之 藉 由 E F Μ 專 利 *^J<r 付 號 撿 知 1 ! 複 製 之 原 理 圖 0 ! 1 第 五 十 圖 為 第 一 實 疵 例 中 防 止 複 製 用 Ε F Μ 調 製 表 之 示 1 j — 14 - 1 ί 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 4 6203 9 A7 B.7五、發明説明() 钽濟部中夹椋準局員工消費合作.社印製 擇 方圖第 再循態 磁配 意顯 選 。製 程及 錄 之 狀 離 物 示之 之 圖複 Η 部 記 態 道 偏 異 態息 器 程止 造射 之 狀 磁 和 之 狀訊 。 碼 流防 製反 式 道 離 式 面 示誤 圖 51 之之 之低 道 磁 偏 方。籤 顯錯 程 號 式號 部一 磁 離 之 知圖標 D 之 流 暗 方記 射第 離 偏 式 檢理之 C 部 之 次 装學 反之 偏 之 道 置原 D 之示 示 個 安光 低碟 之 式 磁 .配之 C 中顯 指 數 可用 之光 中 道 離 度式中 部之 掃 複 許使 碟之 例 磁 偏 角方例 示中 清 之 之之 光中 施 離 之 之製施 顯例 之 中 中中 之例 。質 偏 中 中複實 之施 中 例 例例 中施圖 一 之 例 例止一 中踅 例 施 疵施 例_茛程第 中 施 施防第 例一 施 踅 霣茛。施"_工為 例 實 簧 之為 施第 實 I I 1 圖 實i第 造丨;施 I i 合 } 簧為 一 第=第第理 一為製 a 圖賁 第 第姐 a | 圖 第 為圖 為為原 第圖之 ί 塊一 為 為之 ,第五 為 圖程 圖圖之.為 一 部 圖方第 j 。圖 式圖 圖為十 。圖 七流 八九片 圖十射 二之為 C 圖三方 四視丨 六圖六 。 十之十,十碟 十六 反十置 } 。 ί 跡十 號十上 b 第態十 圖五式五五 之六第低六装 b 圖 循六 信六之 ί. „ 狀六 意第 方第苐 式第。 二第生 ί 跡 之第 道第置 圖示第 (請先5?讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中ϋ國家標準(CNS ) Αί規格(210Χ297公釐) 經濟部中央禕準局員工消资合作社印製 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 第六十七圖為第一實施例中之以刻槽製造條形碼之製造工 程圖。第六十八圖'為第一莨旅例中之第一反射膜及第二反 射膜之製造工程圃b第六十九圖為本發明之光碟再生装置 之第二窖施例之構成之方塊圖。 第t +圖為光碟之通常無偏移之眼孔圖漾之一例之示意圖 。第t十一圖為第二實施例中之賦與光碟偏移之場合之眼 孔圖樣之一例之示意圖。 第t十二圖為第二實施例中之記錄動力及記錄等化量所 產生之不對稱之變化圖。 第七十三画為第二實施例中之光碟原盤之記錄装置之一 例之溝成之方塊圖。第t十四圖為習知之光碟原盤之記錄 装置之構成方塊圖。第t十五圖為習知之光碟再生裝置之 構成方瑰圖。 第七十六圖為本發明之光記錄媒體之第二實施例之光碟上 之記錄信號之說明圖。 第七十tA圖及第t十tB圖分別為第二宮施例中之防止 複製動作之程式之流程圖之前半部及後半部。 第七十八圖為第二實施例中之C P信號配置資訊之四個記 錄方法之說明圖。 第t十九圖為第二寊施例中之使用暗號以實行碟片對照 之流程圖。第八十圖為第二實施例中之爰化脈衝幅度及雷 射動力之場合之偏移電壓之波肜圖。第八十一 A圖及第八 十一B圖為第二實腌例中之原盤製作裝置(主盤記錄楗) -1 6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家椋準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) I- - - -- 1 = - ! - -- ..... I I - 1 I I...... -- 1 - - TJ - ; - ί nn J (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明( 經濟部中央標準局負工消f合作杜印製 盤 應防 原之中 圖再由 d 置二及 成 製 ◦貝 原 之之 之盤例 形之藉 丨 配第部 構 複 Rif 片 式中 製原施 波號之‘,度為半 之 止 D, 1 程例 複0實 之 信中圖 再圖前 例 防 C 腦 。 之 貝施止 C 二法移例形之B之 施 之 、電 部中。拷 實防之 第方偏 施波號 t 圖 實 中 D 人 一例部止二 之定為知之實 之 信十程 三 例。 C 個 之施半防第中測} 撿割 二法移八流 第 施部 之之 圖實後有 為例經 a 置分第方偏第之 之 實半 製上 塊 二及裝 1 施 之丨配 間為訊 之及號 置 三後 複以 方 第部之 a 實 中圖 度時} 資割 圈信 裝 第及 法目 之 為半中 ίι 例 六再由 C 置分AP 生 為部 不數 } 圖前例 圖第施 十之藉 ί 配間七 C 再 圖半 從規 置 Β 之施 四為實八號之 ·,度 時十移 碟 Β 前 為正 装 Π 圖簧 十} 二第信 中圖再 由八侷 光 九之 者對 生十程二八 b 第...。移例 形之藉第錄 之 十圖 示-再八 工第第 {為~圖偏施波號之。記 明 八程 所中 錄第 之為。 ;圖..·置之實 之信 中圖盤 發 第流 > 中 Μ 記 及式圖 圖圖五 '配.割 二法移 例形原 本 及 之例例 ο fil方 三程理 十標分 第方偏施波對 為 圖式施施 R 置A錄十流 原.八座間 為訊之 實之之 圖。 A 程踅實 I 装 二記八 之之第 時 }資割 二法中。八 圖九作 liD 生 十割第體製。之由 b 置分第 方例部 十塊十 動第第 C 再八分 軟複圖址 藉丨配間為訊施半 八方八 碟< 或 及第二 用止理 位之;度時 }資 實後第 之第光 Μ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本纸張尺度過用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4規格(2!OX 297公釐) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央栝準局員工消費合作杜印策 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 4 1 程 式 時 之 防 止 方 法 〇 苜 先 t 茲 先 詳 述 有 關 設 有 密 磚 鐽 等 之 1 i 1 記 錄 多 數 程 式 之 C D R 0 Μ 等 之 光 碟 之 持 定 程 式 鐽 之 解 除 1 1 請 1 I 方 法 0 如 第 五 十 九 圖 所 示 j 該 C D 因 採 用 本 發 明 之 光 碟 拷 先 閱 1 I 貝 防 止 方 式 » 故 Μ 法 複 製 c D C 又 t C D 之 光 學 記 號 部 3 讀 背 1 面 I 8. 7 針 對 不 同 之 C D t 記 錄 有 不 同 之 I D Ν 0 , 〇 ^ 之 1 | * 1 藉 由 發 光 部 3 8 6 a 和 受 光 部 3 8 6 b 所 組 成 之 光 感 應 事 項 1 I 再 1 器 3 8 6 謓 取 例 如 2 0 4 3 1 2 0 〇 1 ” 等 之 資 料 t 導 % 本 裝 並 將 之 輸 入 C P U 之 記 憶 體 中 之 m f 理 表 4 〇 4 之 D S 頁 1 i k I d η 0 ( 0 P T ) 〇 通 常 此 方 法 雖 行 得 通 惟 光 1 1 學 記 號 係 為 不 法 複 製 ^tU. 者 藉 虫 印 刷 機 即 可 複 製 者 〇 為 提 高 1 1 其 防 止 複 製 之 功 能 如 前 述 設 置 由 m 鋇 氧 體 所 製 成 之 4 ί 訂 〇 〇 〇 0 e 等 之 非 常 高 Η C 之 局 Η C 部 4 0 1 而 在 工 場 1 1 作 磁 性 用 之 I D N 0 ( Μ a ) 資 料 ft 2 〇 5 1 6 2 ! 1 t* 之 磁 性 記 錄 〇 此 貝 料 之 再 生 因 可 藉 由 通 常 之 磁 頭 苒 生 1 1 故 故 輸 入 键 管 理 表 4 〇 4 之 D S k I D Ν 〇 ( 1 Μ a g ) 之 項 § 中 〇 1 I 如 第 八 圖 ( a ) 之 I D N 0 之 工 程 圖 所 示 藉 由 1 i 使 用 第 九 圖 所 示 之 著 磁 楗 5 4 〇 對 媒 體 2 記 錄 I D Ν [ 1 〇 之 工 程 僅 在 一 秒 鐘 以 下 0 此 著 磁 機 5 4 〇 如 第 九 圖 1 j { \ a ) ( b ) 所 示 係 為 環 狀 J 復 如 第 九 圖 之 ( C ) 1 i ( d ) 所 示 具 有 複 數 個 著 磁 極 5 4 2 a —S-- f 其 分 別 捲 1 1 設 有 線 圏 5 4 5 a f 0 來 g 著 磁 電 流 發 生 a a 5 4 3 之 電 1 ! 流 - 藉 由 電 流 方 向 切 換 器 5 4 4 i 任 意 之 電 流 將 流 入 線 圈 1 1 - 18 - \ 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CN_S ) A4規格(2! OX 297公釐) '4 6203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 5 4 5 a〜f ,故可獲得任意之磁化方向。Q The sixth diagram is a block diagram of the recording and reproducing apparatus in the first embodiment. FIG. T is a flowchart of the inspection of the illegal copying disc in the first buttercup embodiment. The eighth figure (a) is the engineering drawing of the CD recording the i D number in the first spring embodiment; (b) is the engineering drawing of the conventional CD. The ninth figure (a) is a top view of the magnetic machine in the first embodiment; (b) a side view of the magnetic machine in the first spring embodiment; (c) is the same as the first night defect An enlarged side view of the magnetic disk in the example; (d) is a block diagram of the magnetic disk in the first cell example. The tenth figure is the principle diagram of the ID number input in the first buttercup. -1 0-This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2! 〇Χ 297mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) — ^ 1 —II-KH ...... ― ^ ― M. In-I-In--I-I-1 I--In--I ---- r I n] 1 ^ 1 U3.- · Staff cooperation of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du Yinfan 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Figure 11 (a) is the linear velocity_time diagram when the linear velocity is fixed in the first buttercup example; (b) is the same as the first spring The linear velocity-time diagram when the 婊 speed is changed in the embodiment; (c) is one of the same as in the first buttercup embodiment. The physical configuration diagram of the address when the linear velocity is fixed; (d) is the same as the first embodiment The address when the linear velocity of the medium is changed. Twelfth figure (a) is a cross-sectional view of a regular original disc in the first embodiment; (b) is a cross-sectional view of a regular shaped disc in the first embodiment; (c) is the same as the first Cross-sectional view of an illegally copied original disk in the trade example; (d) A cross-sectional view of an illegally copied shaped disc in the first embodiment. The thirteenth image is the same as the CD in the first embodiment. Block diagram of the recording and reproducing device. The fourteenth figure is a flowchart in the same embodiment as the first one. The fifteenth figure is a layout diagram of the address of the original disc of the optical disc in the first embodiment. The sixteenth figure is a block diagram of the recording and reproducing apparatus in the same embodiment. The tenth figure (a) is a sectional view of the illegal disc in the first embodiment; (b) is a sectional view of the regular disk in the first embodiment; (c) is the same as the first The waveform diagram of the optical reproduction signal in the embodiment; (d) is the waveform diagram of the digital signal in the first embodiment; (e) is the waveform diagram of the envelope curve in the first embodiment; -1 1- The size of this paper is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) grid (210X 297 mm) '^ ------ Order ------ Sam {Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 4 6 20 3 9 A7 _B7_; _ V. Description of the invention () (f) is the wave chart of the digital signal in the first example; (S) is the wave chart of the detection signal in the first example. The eighteenth figure is the same as the physical configuration table of the disc in the first embodiment. The nineteenth figure (a) is the same as the address assignment of the non-eccentric optical disc in the first embodiment, and the figure * (b) is the address allocation diagram of the eccentric optical disc in the first embodiment. Figure 20 (a) is a schematic circle of the track displacement position of the regular disc in the first embodiment; (b) is the track change amount of the illegally copied disc in the first embodiment The schematic. Figure 21 (a) is a schematic diagram of the address An in the first embodiment; (b) is a schematic diagram of the angle Zn in the first embodiment; (c) is the same as in the first embodiment. The schematic circle of the trace amount τn; (d) is a schematic diagram of the signal slot depth Dn in the first spring embodiment. The twenty-second figure is a schematic diagram of the laser output and the depth of the signal slot and the reproduced signal in the first embodiment. The twenty-third figure is a schematic view of the copy-prevention effect of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. The twenty-fourth circle is a block diagram of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. The twenty-fifth figure is a block diagram of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. The twenty-sixth circle is a block diagram of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. The twenty-seventh 'figure is a block diagram of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. The twenty-eighth figure is a block diagram of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. -12- The size of this paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297mm t) ------------ -------- Order --------- --- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) A7 B7 4 £ " Employees of the Central ^ quasi-government elimination of capital " " Zhongji V. Invention Description () 1 1 4 1 (f ) Is the wave chart of the detection signal in the first embodiment. 0 1 1 1 The eighteenth figure is the same as the physical disk of the first embodiment. Set the table 0 1 I Please 1 1 19th figure (a) Match the address of the non-eccentric optical disc in the first embodiment 1 1 Read I Layout 1 — Side | (b) It is the same as the address configuration of the eccentric optical disc in the first example, Note | Note 1 Figure 0 Matters! [Zi-tenth circle (a) is the same as the regular disc in the first example The schematic diagram of the written volume% 1 I (b) is the same as the track of the illegally copied disc in the first embodiment. 1 The schematic diagram of the quantity 0 1 · 1! The twenty-first figure (a) is Schematic diagram of address A η in the first embodiment 1 Let 1 j (b) be the same as the diagram of the angle Z η in the case of the first cell (C) is the same as the track in the example of the buttercup defect Schematic diagram of the amount τ η 1! (D) is the schematic diagram of the signal slot depth D η in the same example as in the first example 0 I 1 Twenty-circle is the same as the laser output and signal in the __ * example Schematic diagram of slot depth and 1-line reproduction signal 0 1 I The twenty-third diagram is the same as that in the first embodiment for the anti-copy effect of the original disc creation device I 1 0 1 1 The twenty-fourth diagram is the same as the first— Examples Block diagram of the original plate making device 〇1 | The twenty-fifth figure is the block diagram of the original plate making device in the first-spring example 1 The twentieth .. 1 ..- The picture is the same as the original plate in the actual defect example The square diagram of the device is created. 0 1 The twenty-th circle is the same as the block diagram of the original disk making device in the first-莨 embodiment 〇1 I The twenty-eighth figure is the block of the original disk making device in the first embodiment. Figure 0! I-12-1 1 1 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (2) 0X 297 mm 4 6 203 9 A7 A / B7 V. Description of the invention () The staff of the bureau will cooperate with each other. The society prints block diagrams and diagrams to make square wave letter views. Body of;. Health. On the break. Figure on the broken body. ; Full output, figure and figure. The shape of the map. The recording map of the plane and the dial of the dial is known. The radiograph of the block is broken. The original block of the original tool is recorded by the surface of the mine. The broken pieces of the moulded betel and the square-shaped pieces are recorded as the pressed pieces of the position of the pressed pieces. The discs of the losers are recorded as the punches of the punches. The original plate of the plate-shaped shot and the original examination of the plate and the examination of the plate as the original Shi Yanjiji into a thunder. The original example of the original original film of the anti-recovery of the actual application of the original example of the original application of the original disc of the lower case example of the middle one in the middle of the middle of the Middle洌 Example Example Example Example Example 1 Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example Example | Example Same construction and same implementation of the same implementation Example 1} I 1 I 1 1 D 1 is a structure and a structure I is implemented as the & the first and the first > the first and the first _ | the first .一一 实} Same ί 同 同 同 同 同 _ a a 伸 同 a 第 图 图 图 ja ja 为 为 为 为 为 为 为 为 为 为 为 为 同 部 部 部 ί 图 图 图 为 f f f +}}}, 1: Figure. The picture is the waist picture The picture is the six-flow diagram The picture is the picture nine three bcde one picture two three} four five five. J ten ir eight or nine | tenth 丨 < ~ 丨 ten series ten ten bM ten ten b Three trips ten ten ten + twelve =; three off three three ί three three ί first three three three three. Forty-fourth, the figure, the first,. Article;. The first figure, the second figure, the first ---------- install ------ order ------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 4 6203 9 a? B7 Zhonghua Department of the Central Bureau of Standards and Consumers ’cooperation in consumption Du Yinqi V. Description of the invention () 1 1 4 I (b) View circle above the disc in the example> 1 ί 1 {C) is the top view of the disc in the first embodiment * 1 1 Please 1 I (d) is the cross of the disc in the embodiment- Break m Figure 1 First 1 I (e) is the waveform of the reproduced signal in the first — 1 It 1 丨 · read back 1 1! Forty-Figure is the position of the low reflection part in the first-embodiment Note 1 of the address clock position I Principle diagram of detection 42nd figure is the first-regular discs and matters in the embodiment 1 1 Copy the disc again Comparison of the address table of the low-reflection parts M 0 The 44th figure is the guide 〇 The flow chart of the comparison of the unidirectional function spring disc in the writing spring example 0 page N_ ^ I ί 45th The figure shows the coordinate position ratio of the address of each original m in the first embodiment ί 1 is more than that in FIG. 0 I ί The fortieth figure is the flow of the low reflection position detection program in the first embodiment-1 ding diagram 0 1 I The forty-seventh figure is the engineering diagram of the manufacturing method of the low reflection part in the embodiment 1 1 0 The forty-eighth circle is the engineering process of the manufacturing method of the low reflection part in the first embodiment 1 1 figure 〇 The forty-ninth figure is the _. X 1 thread diagram of the manufacturing method of the low-reflection section in the embodiment. The fifty-fifth figure is the process of the manufacturing method of the low-reflection section in the buttercup example. 0th Fifty — The picture is the top view of the disc in the Yin Example. Fifty 1 i The twelfth picture is the data structure diagram of the original secret code in the first Gong example. The physically generated diagram in the pickled example 0 The fifty-fourth diagram is the first reality! The II diagram in the embodiment is the schematic diagram of the duplicated detection by the incorrect CP symbol t 0 1 1 I The fifty-fifth diagram is the first—in the embodiment By EF Μ patent * ^ J &r; No. 1 1 Schematic diagram of copying 0! 1 The fiftieth figure shows the EF Μ modulation table for copying prevention in the first real example 1 j — 14- 1 ί 1 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 4 6203 9 A7 B.7 V. Description of the invention Figure 2 shows the recurrent magnetic matching intention selection. The process and recorded state of the object are shown in the figure. The complex records the state of the road, the deviation of the state of the device, and the state of the magnetic field. The code stream prevents the reverse track from leaving the surface. Figure 51 shows the low track magnetic deviation. Sign the wrong course number, the number of the part, a magnetic knowledge icon, D, the dark side, and the second part of the off-type inspection. Magnetic. Matching C. The index of the visible light. The degree of light in the middle. The sweep of the middle allows the example of the disk. The magnetic declination illustrates the light in the light of the Qing Dynasty. example. The example of applying the compound in the middle quality and the example of applying the figure in the example, the example of the first example, the example of applying the defect, the example of applying the defect _ in the middle of the process, the first example of applying the buttercup. Shi " _work as an example of the real spring is Shi Di Shi II 1 Figures i i 丨; Shi I i}} Spring is the first = the first one is the system a Figure 贲 the first sister a | The picture shows the first block of the original picture, and the fifth picture is the map chart. It is the picture j. Schematic diagram The picture is ten. The picture is seven streams, eight or nine pictures, the picture is ten shots, the second is C, the three sides are four views, and the six pictures are six. Ten out of ten, ten discs, sixteen inverse ten}. ί Trace number ten, ten on b, tenth state, figure five, five, five, six, low, six, b, figure six, six letters, six, and six. Set the chart number (please read the notes on the back before you fill out this page) This paper size is applicable to the China National Standard (CNS) Αί specifications (210 × 297 mm) Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Procurement Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (67) Figure 67 shows the manufacturing engineering drawing of the bar code in the first embodiment. Figure 68 is the first reflection in the first example. Film and second reflective film manufacturing engineering gardenb Figure 69 is a block diagram showing the structure of the second cellar embodiment of the optical disc reproduction device of the present invention. Figure t + is an eye diagram of the optical disc, usually without offset. Schematic diagram of an example of an example. Figure t11 is an example of an eye pattern in the case where a disc is shifted in the second embodiment. Figure t12 is a recording power and recording in the second embodiment. Figure of asymmetry change caused by equalization amount. The 73rd drawing is the optical disc in the second embodiment. A block diagram of an example of a disc recording device. Figure t14 is a block diagram showing the structure of a conventional recording device for a disc master. Figure t15 is a block diagram showing the structure of a conventional disc reproduction device. The sixteenth figure is an explanatory diagram of a recording signal on the optical disc of the second embodiment of the optical recording medium of the present invention. The seventieth tA chart and the t tenth tB chart are the procedures for preventing the copying action in the second embodiment. The first half and the second half of the flowchart. Figure 78 is an explanatory diagram of the four recording methods of the CP signal configuration information in the second embodiment. Figure t19 is the use of a secret sign in the second embodiment. The flowchart of disc comparison is implemented. Figure 80 is the wave chart of the offset voltage in the case of the chirped pulse amplitude and laser power in the second embodiment. Figure 81 and Figure 81 Picture B shows the original disk making device (master disk record) in the second example. -1 6-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) I----1 = -!--..... II-1 I I ......-1--TJ-;-ί nn J (Please read the back first Note: Please fill in this page again) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention The example of the shape of the plate is equipped with the first part of the complex Rif film, which is made in the original Shibo No. ', the degree is half D, 1 The example of the complex example is 0, the figure in the figure, and the previous example prevents the C brain. Only the second method and the second method are applied to the implementation of the B, and the Ministry of Electricity. The first party to apply the tamper-resistant wave number t in the illustration of the figure, the second example of the D person, the second, and the third example of the ten truths of the truth. The middle test of the semi-defense of the C players} Picking and cutting two methods to move the flow of the eighth part of the part is shown as an example. After a placement of the second part, the real part of the semi-manufacturing system is made on the second block and installed 1 After the match is assigned, the number and the number are set to three, and then the real figure of the first part of the formula is used.} The number and law of the letter cut circle are half. } The first example of the figure is borrowed from Shi Shi ί VII 7C, and then the figure is half from the arrangement of Shi B to Shi No. 8; Then by the eight innings of the light nine to fight ten Cheng 28 b .... The tenth illustration of Xingzhi Borrowing Records-Ziba Gonggong No. {is ~ the figure of the partial wave number. Make note of the record in Bacheng. ; .. ·· The letter of Zhishi's letter is issued in the top of the chart > in the record of M and the formula is shown in Figure 5 '. The second method is used to cut the original form and the example. The second partial Shi Bo pair applies the pattern R and sets A to record the ten streams. The eight seats are the real picture of the information. A Cheng Yishi I pretends to be the second of eight. Eight Figures and Nine Crops of Lid. It is divided into ten pieces by the b rule, the tenth action, the tenth, the eighth, and the eighth soft copy map address. 丨 The distribution room is for the application of the half-eight and eight-disc < or and the second stop; The first light M (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper has been used in China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2! OX 297 mm) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Government Procurement Bureau employee consumption cooperation Du Yince V. Description of the invention () 1 1 4 1 Preventive measures during the program ○ First t I will first detail the CDRs that record the majority of programs with dense bricks, etc. 0 The holding program of the disc such as Μ is canceled 1 1 Please 1 I Method 0 As shown in Figure 59. j This CD is read in advance because of the use of the optical disc copy of the present invention. I I prevent the method »Therefore DC copying c DC The optical marking part 3 of the CD 3 reads back 1 and I 8. 7 has different IDs Ν 0, 〇 ^ of 1 for different CD t records | * 1 The light-sensing matters composed of the light-emitting part 3 8 6 a and the light-receiving part 3 8 6 b 1 I re 1 device 3 8 6 to obtain data such as 2 0 4 3 1 2 0 〇1 ” This device is installed and entered into the memory of the CPU. MF Table 4 〇4 DS Page 1 ik I d η 0 (0 PT) 〇Usually this method works, but the light 1 1 The school sign is an illegal copy ^ tU . It can be reproduced by using a worm printing machine. In order to improve 1 1 its function of preventing copying is as described above. It is made of 4 barium oxide. Ί 〇〇〇0 e and other very high Η C Η Η C The magnetic records of IDN 0 (Μ a) data ft 2 〇 5 1 6 2! 1 t * used for magnetic field 1 1 in the workshop 1 1 can be reproduced by the normal magnetic head 1 1 Therefore, enter DS k ID 〇 (1 Μ ag) in the item § 〇1 I, as shown in the engineering drawing of IDN 0 of the eighth figure (a), using 1 i using the work shown in the ninth figure 5 4 〇 Record the ID 2 of the media 2 Ν [1 〇 The project is only less than one second. 0 This magnetism machine 5 4 〇 As shown in the ninth figure 1 j {\ a) (b) is a ring J. As shown in the ninth figure (C) 1 i (d ) Shown with a plurality of magnetizing poles 5 4 2 a —S-- f which are each rolled 1 1 with a wire 圏 5 4 5 af 0 to g magnetizing current to generate aa 5 4 3 electricity 1! Current-by the direction of the current Switch 5 4 4 i Arbitrary current will flow into the coil 1 1-18-\ 1 1 This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CN_S) A4 specification (2! OX 297 mm) '4 6203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () 5 4 5 a ~ f, so you can get any magnetization direction.

第九圖(d)所示者為設定自左方起S、N、S、 S 、N、S極之著磁方向之場合。此場合中,磁性記錄層 3在一瞬間記錄下箭頭51a 、51b 、51c 、51d 之方向之磁性記錄信號。其亦可藉40 Ο Ο 0 e之高H c 之磁性材料記錄之。因此,如第八圖(a )所示*比起習 知之工程圖第八圖(b),其可藉相同時間生產記錄有IThe ninth figure (d) shows the case where the magnetic directions of the S, N, S, S, N, and S poles are set from the left. In this case, the magnetic recording layer 3 records the magnetic recording signals in the directions of the arrows 51a, 51b, 51c, and 51d in an instant. It can also be recorded by magnetic materials with high H c of 40 〇 0 0 e. Therefore, as shown in the eighth figure (a) *, compared with the eighth figure (b) of the conventional engineering drawing, it can produce I with the same time.

• . . A D 之 C D。 若為使用磁頭,一邊回轉媒體2 ,一邊作I D N 〇·之磁性記錄之方法,_體回轉之開始及數回轉之回 轉,及包括停止回轉等將花費數秒。因此,於只容許一秒 左右之處理時間之CD之大虽生產工程中,其具有若不要 化工程之流程則難以導入之課題。 如第八圖(a)之ID No ·之工程圖所示, 使用第九圖所示之著磁機54 ◦,將ID No 記錄於 媒體2中之工程可為1秒鐘K下,其尤其適用於高產量之 --------i------IT------# (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標局員工消費合作杜印製 a d 捲電 入 圖 N ί ί 別之流九 、 圖 、分 3 , 第 S 九 } 上 4 流在 、 第 C 其 5 電。 S 如 ί , 器 之向、 , 圖 f 生意方Ν 作九 ~ 發 任化、 動第 a 流 以 磁 S 錄如 2 電將 之為 記且 4 磁 ’意起 之 , 5 著 4 任方 ο 狀極自4得左 4 環磁來 5 獲自 5 為著。器°ί定 楗係個 f 換故設 磁 其 數 ~ 切,有 著-複 a 向 f 示 此示有 5 方 一 揭 明所具4流 a 保 說 其 5 電 5 , 。 Xi ,圈由4中 中 ί 示線藉 5 } 程、所有,圈 d Η } } 設流線 t 本紙汝尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公嫠) A7 462039 B7 五、發明説明() 、S極之著磁方向之場合。在此場合,箭頭5 1 a 、5 1 b 、5 1 c 、5 1 d之方向之磁性記錄信號,將一瞬間, 例如數m s ,被記錄於特定之軌跡上。而著磁機,因可導 入大電流,故40000 e之高He之磁性材料亦可記錄 _ =因此,如第八圖(a )所示,K第八圖(b )之習知工 程圖之其他工程相同程度之作業時間,即可記錄I D ,故 在不 要更工程流程之情形下即可生產CD。且使用著磁 機之場合,因不須回轉媒體2即可實行I D No ,之磁 性記錄|故不僅可縮短工程量*因不回轉媒體,其亦具有 如第八圖(a )所示之I D '' N 〇 記錄後,復以印刷工 程印刷時 > 亦可正確地印刷於既定位置之效果。 現在,市售有可記錄於He為27 0 00e之 磁性記錄層之磁頭。因此,若He較低,則ID N 〇 · 可能被改雯。對應此課題,本發明之著磁機54 0因可發 生強力磁場,故在H c為40000 e之高He之磁性記 錄層中亦可記錄ID No ·。在將高He之磁性記錄層 3作為特定軌跡Μ記錄1 D No ·時,此媒體之ID N 〇·因無法被通常所可買到之磁頭8改寫,亦即改篡, 故可提高與媒體之1 D N 〇相關之密碼之保密性。 又,本發明如第十圖所示,光-碟_-之物理置表 532之資料與唯一ID No ·發生器546之.Jf號, 藉由温合器5 4 7 >温合成若沒有分離鐽則難以分離之狀 態,並 將琨合信號與分離鐽5 4 8送至暗號化器5 3 7 -20- 本紙張尺度適用中國囯家標準(CN'S ) A4规格(210X297公釐) ^^^1 BB « 1 I ^ —4 ^im I I U3 Ί .给 (請先閔讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 鲤濟部中央標準局員工消贤合作枉印製 •4 6203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中失標孪忌員工消费合泎"^^ 五、發明说明( ) I 1 1 I * 作 成 暗 號 5 3 8 而 於 成 形 工 程 後 r 記 錄 於 磁 性 記 錄 軌 1 1 1 跡 6 7 或 在 原 盤 製 作 工 程 中 記 錄 於 光 記 錄 軌 跡 6 5 C 在 1 j 請 1 t 記 錄 再 生 裝 置 1 側 t 藉 由 暗 解 碼 器 5 4 3 解 讀 暗 D占 5K t 並 Μ 1 I 離 讀 1 .藉 由 分 在 分 離 器 5 4 9 中 分 離 I D N 〇 5 5 背 1 I - 物 之 1 0 和 光 碟 之 理 配 置 表 5 3 2 > 而 可 藉 由 第 五 圖 及 第 七 圖、 1 意 [ 所 示 之 不 法 光 碟 檢 查 方 法 檢 查 不 法 光 碟 並 中 止 不 法 光 事 項 1 1 再 1 碟 之 動 作 〇 若 為 第 十 圖 之 方 式 之 埸 合 被 記 錄 於 磁 性 填 裝 1^* 寫 本 記 錄 軌 跡 6 7 乏 暗 號 5 3 8 藉 由 可 產 生 唯 — I D N 頁 s—X ! I 〇 之 發 生 器 5 4 6 I D N 〇 和 光 碟 物 理 配 置 表 之 1 1 混 合 信 D^b 被 喑 號 化 故 每 — 片 之 光 碟 均 不 相 同 〇 雖 為 必 然 i ! 之 结 果 此 光 碟 因 係 使 用 本 發 明 之 不 法 複 製 防 止 方 式 故 1 訂 不 法 複 製 業 者 法 複 製 C D 之 光 記 錄 部 〇 因 此 不 法 使 用 1 I 者 除 篡 改 I D N 〇 外 沒 有 其 他 不 法 使 用 之 途 逕 0 若 找 1 1 來 與 知 曉 其 密 碼 之 光 碟 全 相 同 之 原 盤 光 碟 藉 由 記 錄 同 1 1 樣 之 暗 5虎 於 磁 性 記 錄 部 則 可 藉 由 使 用 該 密 碼 而 進 行 不 法 1 使 用 0 若 分 離 光 碟 物 理 配 置 表 之 暗 Wu 和 I D N 0 之 暗 1 1 號 而 記 錄 時 在 同 — 原 盤 之 全 部 之 碟 片 之 磁 器 記 錄 層 將 1 1 記 錄 相 同 之 物 理 配 置 表 之 暗 號 而 藉 由 謓 取 此 暗 號 即 可 1 i 容 易 識 別 其 是 否 為 同 一 原 盤 光 碟 故 可 藉 由 將 I D N 〇 1 I 之 暗 號 改 寫 為 知 道 其 密 碼 之 I D N 〇 之 暗 號 1 而 進 1 I 行 不 法 使 用 0 但 是 第 十 圖 之 方 式 t 係 對 一 片 光 碟 可 能 1 1 存 在 有 複 數 片 不 同 之 原 盤 1 且 每 一 Η 光 碟 之 暗 號 均 各 不 相 1 1 同 故 要 確 認 兩 片 光 碟 是 否 為 相 同 原 盤 者 只 有 觀 察 其 暗 1 i - 2 1 - 1 1 本紙乐尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 經濟部中央.標隼局員工消費合作.社印製 4 6203 9 A 7 B7 五、發明説明() 號而更無他法。除讓取一片碟片之全部領域之碟片物理配 置表5 3 2之資訊外,係無法檢查出其是否為同一原盤。 欲檢查位址、角度、循跡、信號槽深度、錯誤健率之全部 資料係須要大規模之装置,且其確認亦極花時間。因此, 不法複製業者欲找出與知悉密碼之C D之等之光碟為相同 原盤之光碟者係十分困難,故其具有使不法複製業者難Μ 改篡ID No·之效果。 ..-八 在此·藉由第148圖之流程圖說明其具體之程序。 在步驟405 ,程式No . N之起動命令傳來時,在步驟 4 0 5 a ,係難以讀出程式έ键資訊是否被記錄於磁軌中 。此時,在磁頭上將有記錄電流流通,而實行此資料之消 去。若為正規之光碟,He較高,故键資訊不會消去。而 若為不法光碟,因He較低,鍵資訊將消去。接著,在步 驟405b ,將檢查是否有鐽資料,即密碼,若為NO , 在步驟40 5 c ,將如第17Q圖之盡靣圖所示,對使用者 傳達键之輸入命令,在步驟4 0 5 d ,使用者輸入例如〃 1 23456 ”時,在步驟405 e即核對其是否正確, 若為N 0 ,則在步驟4 0 5 f停止,盡面上並顯示〃鍵不 正確或為複製之碟片〃,若為YE S則進入步驟405 g >將打開程式N 〇· N之鍵資料記錄於記錄媒體2之磁軌 ,並跳至步驟405 i 。 回到步驟4 ◦ 5 b ,若為Y E S ,則在步驟4 0 5 h謓取程式No . N之鐽資料,並在步驟405丨讀人光 -11- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) (請先閱讀.背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂 462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 記錄層之碟片ID (OPT),在步驟405j謓入記錄 於磁性記錄層之碟片ID (Mag),並在步驟405k 檢查是否正確。若為NO ,在步驟405m顯示"複製碟 片〃並停止。若為Y E S則在步驟4 0 5 η實行鐽資料、 碟片ID (OPT)、碟片ID (Mag)之暗號解除演 算,檢査是否為正確資料。在步驟405p檢查,若為N Ο ,則在步驟4 0 5 q顯示錯誤,若為Y E S則在步驟4 〇5s開始程式No ,N之使用。 在使用本發明之方 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印繁 (請先Η讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 式時,若為CD可收容音轚被壓縮為1/5之歌曲1 2〇 首,若為软體則可收容數百德名稱,若最初即記錄1 2首 或一涸遊戲,則可以符合1 2首或一個遊戲份之著作權價 格販賣之。然後,由使用者支付費用,而軟體業者告知對 應碟片ID No ·之鐽,如第147圖所示,即可使用追 加之歌曲或追加之遊戲等軟體。此時*藉由採甩音轚伸長 區塊407 ,若為CD可收容5倍之370分鐘,而可在 一片CD中收容最多1 20首音樂軟體,而從此中,藉由 鐽之解除,即可聽取喜歡之歌曲。因解除一次鐽,鐽資料 即披記錄,故具有不必每次都須輸入鍵之效果。除音樂C D及遊戲CD之外,使用在電子字典或影像CD等一般程 弍上亦具有同樣之效果。又,為降低成本,亦可省路高Η c部401之ID No·。 其次,說明有關防 止CD本身複製之方法。CD目前係被以各種方式所不法 複製,故急須一防止複製之方法。僅Μ暗號化之軟體,係 -2 3 - 本紙張尺度適用中圉國家標车(CNS ) Α4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部中央样準局負工消贽合作杜印‘^ 4 6203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 無法防止不法複製。在本發明中,將敘述利用C D之信號 槽排列和暗號方式防止複製之方法。 如第一圖之主盤 記錄機装置之方塊圖所示,製作CD等之CLV型光碟原 盤之主磐記錄機裝置5 2 9 ,係具有線速度控制部2 6 a ,若為CD ,可一邊將線速度保持於1 · 2in/s至1 · 4m/s之範圍内,一邊藉由光讀取頭6對碟片2上之感 光體以光束使信號槽之潛像曝光,而記錄之。若為CD < 藉由循跡回路2 4 ,對一回轉,以约1 · 6 ^ m之間距>•.. A D to C D. In the case of using a magnetic head, while rotating the medium 2 while making magnetic recording of I D N 0 ·, the start of the body rotation and the rotation of several rotations, including stopping the rotation, will take several seconds. Therefore, in the large-scale production process of a CD that only allows a processing time of about one second, it has a problem that it is difficult to introduce the process if the engineering process is not required. As shown in the engineering drawing of ID No. in the eighth figure (a), using the magnetic machine 54 shown in the ninth figure, the process of recording the ID No in the medium 2 can be 1 second K, which is especially Applicable to high output -------- i ------ IT ------ # (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Print the ad roll electricity into the picture N ί other flow nine, picture, points 3, the first nine, the 4th current, the fifth one of the 5th. S such as, the direction of the device, the graph f, the business party N makes nine ~ sends the appointment, moves the first stream to the magnetic S records such as 2 the electric power to record it and the 4 magnetic 'from the intention, 5 with 4 parties The poles are obtained from 4 and the left 4 ring magnetics are obtained from 5. The device is determined by changing the number of magnetic fluxes from f to the number of fluxes. There are-complex a shows to f. This display has 5 sides. One reveals the 4 streams a. Xi, the circle is borrowed from the 4 middle schools, 5 lines, and all, circle d}}} Set the streamline t The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 meters) A7 462039 B7 V. Description of the invention (), the case of the magnetic direction of the S pole. In this case, the magnetic recording signals in the directions of the arrows 5 1 a, 5 1 b, 5 1 c, and 5 1 d will be recorded on a specific track for a moment, for example, several ms. The magnetic machine can record large currents, so magnetic materials with a high He of 40,000 e can also be recorded. _ = Therefore, as shown in the eighth figure (a), the K eighth figure (b) of the conventional engineering drawing IDs can be recorded for the same degree of operation time in other projects, so CDs can be produced without changing the engineering process. In the case of using a magnetic machine, the magnetic record of ID No can be implemented without rotating the medium 2. Therefore, not only can the engineering amount be shortened * Because the medium is not rotated, it also has the ID shown in Figure 8 (a) '' N 〇 After printing, when printing with a printing process > The effect of correct printing at a predetermined position. Currently, a magnetic head capable of recording in a magnetic recording layer having He of 2700e is commercially available. Therefore, if He is low, ID N 0 · may be changed. In response to this problem, since the magnetic machine 5400 of the present invention can generate a strong magnetic field, ID No. can also be recorded in a magnetic recording layer with a high He of H c of 40,000 e. When the high He magnetic recording layer 3 is recorded as a specific trajectory M, 1 D No ·, the ID N 〇 · of this medium cannot be rewritten by the magnetic head 8 which is generally available, that is, tampering, so it can be improved with the medium 1 DN 〇 Confidentiality of related passwords. In addition, as shown in the tenth figure of the present invention, the data of the physical setting table 532 of the optical-disc_- and the unique ID No. generator 546 of the .Jf number are obtained by using the thermostat 5 4 7 > Separation 鐽 is difficult to separate, and sends the combined signal and separation 鐽 5 4 8 to the signal generator 5 3 7 -20- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CN'S) A4 (210X297 mm) ^^ ^ 1 BB «1 I ^ —4 ^ im II U3 给. To (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the staff of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Carriage • 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Economy Missing the standard in the ministry and avoiding the consumption of employees " ^^ V. Description of the invention () I 1 1 I * Created as a code 5 3 8 and recorded on the magnetic recording track 1 1 1 track 6 7 after the forming process or on the original disk Recorded in the optical recording track 6 5 C during the production process. 1 j Please 1 t recording and playback device 1 side t. Dark decoder 5 4 3 is interpreted by dark decoder 5 K t and M 1 I is read off. 5 4 9 From IDN 〇5 5 Back 1 I-Object 1 0 and the disc configuration table 5 3 2 > The illegal disc inspection method shown in Figures 5 and 7 and 1 ( Abort the illegal light matter 1 1 and 1 disc action. 0 If the combination of the tenth method is recorded in the magnetic filling 1 ^ * Write the record track 6 7 Lack of a secret sign 5 3 8 Only can be generated by IDN pages s —X! I 〇Generator 5 4 6 IDN 〇 and 1 of the physical configuration table of the disc 1 The mixed letter D ^ b is changed so that each of the discs is different. ○ Although it is inevitable, the result of this disc is It is the method of preventing illegal copying of the present invention. Therefore, the optical recording section of the CD is copied by the illegal copying business law. Therefore, the illegal use of 1 I is except for tampering with the IDN. There are no other ways to use it illegally. If you find 1 1 that is the same as the original disc that knows its password, you can use the password to record the same dark 5 tiger in the magnetic recording section. 0 If the dark Wu of the physical configuration table of the disc is separated from the dark 1 of the IDN 0 and the recording is the same—the magnetic recording layer of all the discs of the original disk will record the secret number of the same physical configuration table 1 by capturing This password can be 1 i. It is easy to identify whether it is the same original disc. Therefore, you can change the password of IDN 〇1 I to the password of IDN 〇 which knows its password. 1 I cannot use 0. t is possible for one disc 1 1 there are multiple different original discs 1 and the secret numbers of each disc are different 1 1 the same reason to confirm whether the two discs are the same original disc The person can only observe the dark 1 i-2 1-1 1 This paper music scale applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) Central Ministry of Economic Affairs. Standards Bureau staff consumer cooperation. Printed by the society 4 6203 9 A 7 B7 V. Invention Description () No more. Except for the information on the physical configuration of the disc in all areas of a disc, the information on Table 5 3 2 cannot be used to check whether it is the same original disc. All the data needed to check the address, angle, trace, signal slot depth, and error robustness requires a large-scale device, and its confirmation takes time. Therefore, it is very difficult for an illegal copying company to find a disc that is the same as the CD of the CD that knows the password. Therefore, it has the effect of making it difficult for the illegal copying company to tamper with the ID No. ..- Eight Here, the specific procedure will be explained by the flowchart of Fig. 148. In step 405, when the start command of program No. N is transmitted, in step 405a, it is difficult to read whether the program key information is recorded in the magnetic track. At this time, a recording current will flow through the magnetic head, and erasing of this data will be performed. If it is a regular disc, He is high, so the key information will not be erased. If it is an illegal disc, the key information will be erased because He is low. Next, in step 405b, it will be checked whether there is any data, that is, the password. If it is NO, in step 40 5c, the user will enter the key input command as shown in FIG. 17Q, and in step 4 0 5 d, when the user inputs, for example, 1 23456 ”, check whether it is correct at step 405 e. If it is N 0, stop at step 4 0 5 f, and display the 〃 key incorrectly or copy as far as possible. For disc YE, if it is YE S, go to step 405 g > Record the key data of the open program N 〇 · N on the track of recording medium 2 and skip to step 405 i. Return to step 4 ◦ 5 b, If it is YES, then retrieve the data of program No. N in step 4 5 h, and read Renguang-11- in step 405 丨 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back before filling this page) Binding 462039 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The disc ID (OPT) of the recording layer, enter the disc ID (Mag) recorded on the magnetic recording layer in step 405j ), And check if it is correct in step 405k. If NO, " Copy disc 显示 is displayed in step 405m Stop. If it is YES, perform the calculation of unregistering the data, disc ID (OPT), and disc ID (Mag) in step 4 5 η to check whether it is the correct data. Check in step 405p, if it is N 0, Then an error is displayed in step 4 0 5 q. If it is YES, the use of the program No, N is started in step 4 05s. When using the present invention, the employee ’s consumer cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the present invention (please read the first Note: Please fill in this page again). If the CD can accommodate 1-20 songs that are compressed to 1/5, hundreds of German names can be stored if it is software. If 12 or 1 songs are recorded in the first place,涸 Games can be sold in accordance with the copyright price of 12 or one game. Then, the user pays the fee, and the software industry informs the corresponding disc ID No. 鐽, as shown in Figure 147, you can use Software such as additional songs or additional games. At this time * by using the sound to extend the block 407, if the CD can hold 5 times 370 minutes, and can store up to 1 20 pieces of music software in a CD, and From here, you can listen to your favorite songs by releasing them. Cancel once, the data is recorded, so it has the effect of not having to enter the key every time. In addition to music CDs and game CDs, it is also effective to use on general programs such as electronic dictionary or video CD. In order to reduce the cost, you can also save the ID No. of Section C 401 of the high-speed road. Secondly, explain the method to prevent the CD itself from being copied. The CD is currently copied in various ways, so it is urgent to prevent a copy method. Software for MY code only, -2 3-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard Vehicle (CNS) Α4 size (210 X 297 mm). Central Government Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs. 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention () Cannot prevent illegal copying. In the present invention, a method for preventing copying by using the signal slot arrangement and the secret signal method of CD will be described. As shown in the block diagram of the master recorder device in the first figure, the master recorder device 5 2 9 for making a CLV type optical disc original disk such as a CD has a linear speed control section 2 6 a. If it is a CD, one side can be used. While keeping the linear velocity in the range of 1 · 2 in / s to 1 · 4 m / s, the optical pickup head 6 was used to expose the latent image of the signal slot to the photoreceptor on the disc 2 with a light beam, and recorded it. In the case of CD < by tracking loop 2 4, one turn, with a distance of about 1 · 6 ^ m >

增加半徑r ,故信號增被記錄成螺旋狀。如此,如第三圖 (a)所示,資料在原盤上被記錄成螺旋狀。若為Vi d e o d i sk之CAV之光碟,即可再生原版碟片,並 將此回轉與回轉控制完全連動·而可作成原盤。因此1當 第三者獲得原版資料5 2 8時,即可藉由主盤記錄機装置 5 2 9容易地作成與正規製造之CAV光碟完全相同之具 有相同信號槽圖樣光碟原盤。若為CAV ,正規製造之原 盤與不法複製之原盤之信號槽圖樣之差將在數um之内。 因此,以習知之方法,係無法從信號槽圖樣之物理性配置 區別正規作成及不法作成之光碟。 一方面,若為C D -ROM之CLV光碟,係Ml ‘2〜1 ,4m/s之範 圍内之最初設定之一定線速度於原盤上記錄於螺旋部上。 若為CAV,一周所記錄之資料數經常為一定,若為CL V *藉由改荽線速度,一周之資料數將菱化。若線速度較 慢時,刖會荽成第三圖(a )之資料配置5 3 0 a ,若線 -24" 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2]0X 297公釐) 111 - - i _- - -I 1 I- - I I: - -I - —^ϋ. .1-’--- ϋ I— τ 口 务 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中夹標淮局晨工消費合作社印$i 462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 速度較快時*則會雯成第三圖(b)之資料配置530 b 。如此,則Μ通常之主盤記錄装置,即可區別正規C D及 不法拷貝C D之資料配置5 3 0之不同。Κ通常之市販C D用主盤記錄装置 > 係可藉0 · 00 lm/s之高精度設 定線速度。然後,K 一定之線速度製作原盤時,Μ此高精 度,即使以1 2m/s之線速度作成74分鐘之CD原 盤*在最外周軌跡,誤差偏向PLUS側時*將產生1 1 - .,八 • 783周份之誤差。亦即•比其理想原盤,可作成在最 外周具有1 1 ‘ 783周X36 0度之角度誤差之資料配 置530b之原盤。因此,品第三圖(a)及(b)所示 ,資料配置530亦即各個的A1 〜A26之位址32 3 a〜X ,在正規CD和不法複製CD上將有所不同。例 如定義四等分、Z1〜Z4之配置區53 1時,A1〜A 26之位址323之配置區域531 將不同。因 此,於作成兩個CD配置區域531和位址3 23之 對應表,亦即物理配置表5 3 2之場合,如第三圖(a ) 及第三圖(b)所示,在正規CD和不法複製之CD上, 各個物理配置表5 3 2 a及5 3 2將有所不同。故可利用 此差異,辨別正規C D及不法複製C D 。 惟*單只作 成難K物理性複製之C D ,因改篡對照正規C D是否為正 規CD之方法甚為容易,故其效果甚為薄弱。如第五圖所 示,在本發明中,係將該物理位置表5 3 2 ,於C D原盤 之製作中或原盤製怍完了後|方作成。將此物理配置表5 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標孪(CNS ) A4規格(2 10 X 297公嫠) ---------二衣------1T-------0 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁〕 經濟都中央標濟.局員工消费合作杜印製 462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 3 2 ,藉由R S A方式之公開暗號键方式等之單方向性函 數,而藉暗號化手段5 3 7將之暗號化,並將之記錄於C D媒體2之光R OM部6 5或C D媒體2 a之磁性記錄軌 跡67内。其次,在驅動器(dr i ver)側,自CD 媒體2或2a ,將暗號信號538b再生,並使甩自CD 之光記錄部再生出之暗號解讀程式5 3 4 |復元物理配置 表5 3 2。復使用同樣自CD中再生出之碟片檢查程式5 3 3 a ,從前述之FG所產生之回轉脈衝信號或索引|獲 得現茛之CD之位址38a之碟片回轉角資訊335 ,並 將之與物理配置表532之資科對照,若為〇1^則5丁卉 RT ·若為NO則判定其為不法複製之CD ,而停止遊戲 軟體之動作或音樂軟體之再生。第三圖(b)中所示之不 法拷貝之CD ,其物理配置表532b係與正規者不同· 故被退出。只要暗號編碼程式5 3 7無法解謓,不法複製 之C D及無法作動。因此,g卩使拷貝暗號信號,亦會被退 出。如此一來,其即具有可完全防止不法複製CD之再生 之宏大效果。而不法複製業者若為找出對付本發明之CD 驅動器之對策,係有下述三者可尋。1 ·製作出具有完全 相同之信號著槽圖樣之CLV碟片之原盤。2 ·藉由暗號 解碼程式534解讀第五圖之s e c r e f key之暗號 編碼程式。3 ^分析CD — ROM中之所有程式,並藉由 改造暗號解碼程式534或碟片檢查程式533a *並更 換之。在上述三者中,第三種方法*因解讀及改造程式須 -2 6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) I--- n I---- I 士^_ - n ---- τ η______ 丨 *0^. {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本莨) 462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 花費相當之時間,亦即高額成本,其複製C D之之獲利較 少且無意義。又,在本發明中 > 暗號解碼程式534及碟 Η檢查程式5 3 3 a並非存在驅動器側,而係在媒體側, 故可依C D - R Ο Μ之標題和壓縮別任易麥更。因此,因 須對應每個標題投資程式解讀及 暗號解讀| 而使不法複製業者之預葺惡化,而可達到經濟性之防止複 製效果。其次,有關第二種方法•本發明中係採甩第五圖 - .声,,. 所示之R S Α方式等之公開暗號键方式之簞方向函數。例 如,可使用演算式C = E (M) = M° mon η。因此,即 經濟部中央標準局負工消費合作·杜印^ (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 使CD — ROM上公開暗號解碼程式,即鍵之一部份,而 另一部份之键之暗號编碼程式5 3 7之解謓須花費例如十 億年之故,故不會被解謓出。只是,暗號編碼程式537 之實訊係有可能洩漏。但,藉由第五圖之方法,暗號解碼 程式 5 3 4係位於媒體側而非在驅動器側。因此,萬一 洩漏出去,在洩漏賞時,藉由雯更一對之暗號程式1即可 再次回復防止複製之狀態。最後|第一個方法之製作出具 有完全相同之信號槽圖樣之CL V原盤者,以現狀之CL V用主盤記錄楗装置5 2 9 ,其一回轉係產生一脈衝之回 轉信號,但因未設有可高精度檢知、控制回轉角之機構, 故甚困難。但是,藉由謓取被複製之C D之回轉角資訊及 記錄信號,並於複製時使其回轉脈衝同步化即可製成雖 未完全正確,但有某部份位置精度相似之信號槽圖樣。但 是 > 此情形須在藉由與被複製CD之線速度相同之速度予 _ 2 7 - 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4坑格(210 X 297公釐) 462039 A7 B7 4£濟部中央S"H?員工消资合咋·ΐί.,ρ5^ 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 1 I 記 錄 時 方 才 成 立 〇 本 發 明 之 主 盤 記 錄 健 装 置 5 2 9 如 1 1 1 第 一 圖 所 示 今 C L V 調 製 信 5K 發 生 部 1 0 a 發 生 C L V I I 請 1 I 調 製 信 號 某 場 合 下 將 之 送 至 線 速 度 調 製 部 2 6 a > 某 場 閱 1 1 合 下 將 之 送 至 光 記 錄 回 路 3 7 之 時 間 铀 調 製 部 3 7 a » 進 讀 背 [ I 調 夕 1 ίτ C L V 製 〇 具 由 線 速 度 調 製 部 2 6 a 時 t 如 第 二 圖 (^ 注 1 意 I a ) 所 示 可 將 線 速 度 任 意 調 製 於 C D 規 格 之 m 圍 1 2 事 項 I i 再 1 m / S '1 4 m / S 内 0 此 情 形 在 線 速 度 為 — 定 並 填 裝 寫 本 藉 由 時 間 铀 調 製 部 3 7 a 調 製 成 信 號 時 亦 可 琨 相 同 之 頁 1 | 情 形 〇 此 場 合 下 即 不 須 要 改 造 装 置 0 此 線 速 度 調 製 欲 自 被 1 1 複 製 C D 側 以 高 精 度 檢 測 出 者 係 甚 困 難 0 因 非 施 以 任 意 之 1 1 控 制 而 記 錄 之 故 即 使 是 製 作 原 盤 之 主 盤 記 錄 4*16 W 装 置 亦 八》1 ί 订 1 法 複 製 Q 每 次 作 出 之 原 盤 均 不 相 同 0 因 此 欲 兀 全 地 複 製 施 以 本 發 明 之 線 速 度 調 製 之 C D 近 乎 不 可 能 0 但 是 因 C 1 1 D 之 線 速 度 係 在 1 2 m / S 1 4 τη / S 之 規 格 範 圍 I 1 内 故 現 在 市 販 之 通 常 之 C D — R 〇 Μ 遊 敷 機 均 可 正 常 地 J 备V 再 生 其 資 料 0 其 次 如 第 二 圖 ( b ) 相 像 將 同 一 資 料 } 1 kk —- 定 之 1 2 m / S 之 線 速 度 記 錄 於 特 之 光 軌 跡 6 1 1 5 a 之 場 合 之 起 點 當 作 S 則 資 料 記 錄 终 了 之 終 點 A 1 則 1 1 來 到 3 6 0 0 之 位 置 0 此 場 合 如 第 二 圖 ( C ) 所 示 於 - I | 回 轉 白 1 2 m / S 至 1 4 m / S 均 一 增 速 之 場 合 t 1 1 I 位 址 A 3 之 物 理 位 置 5 3 9 a 則 來 到 偏 差 3 0 〇 之 物 理 位 1 1 置 5 3 9 b 〇 m 後 在 1 / 2 回 轉 增 速 之 場 合 ) 則 來 到 偏 I I 差 4 5 〇 之 物 理 位 置 5 3 9 C 0 亦 即 1 其 — 周 13 取 大 可 改 變 1 I 28 - 1 1 本紙乐尺度適用中國國家標聳(CNS ) A4規格(210X 29?公釐) 462039 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印繁 五、發明说明( ) I 1 \ 1 4 5 0 之 位 置 0 通 常 之 C L V 用 之 主 盤 記 錄 機 裝 置 j 其 — 1 1 1 周 發 生 — 回 之 回 轉 脈 衝 t 故 若 累 積 兩 回 轉 其 誤 差 將 累 積 1 I 請 1 1 而 造 成 9 〇 〇 之 位 置 偏 差 0 將 來 , 即 使 不 法 複 製 業 者 可 實 先 Μ 1 j 讀 1 行 回 轉 控 制 藉 由 本 發 明 之 線 速 度 調 製 t 在 正 規 之 原 盤 與 背 1 ίι I 製 之 1 不 法 複 之 原 盤 間 仍 將 發 生 9 〇 之 位 置 差 別 0 而 藉 由 檢、 | I 知 此 位 置 差 別 即 可 檢 知 不 法 複 製 之 原 盤 0 又 已 知 位 置 事 項 1 ί 再 1 偏 差 之 檢 知 分 解 能 可 為 9 0 C Μ 下 0 因 此 令 線 速 度 在 1 填 寫 本 裝 2 1 4 ΙΠ S 之 範 圍 内 要 化 之 場 合 如 第 二 圖 ( a 頁 1 I ) ( b ) 所 示 至 少 設 為 Z 1 、 Ζ 2 、 Z 3 、 Ζ 4 的 四 1 1 個 9 0 0 之 分 割 區 域 即 可 檢 知 不 法 C D 〇 亦 可 說 四 等 分 1 I 上 之 角 度 分 割 即 為 有 效 〇 當 然 若 新 開 發 出 極 高 精 度 1 訂 之 C L V 用 之 主 盤 記 錄 機 装 置 則 不 法 複 製 業 者 即 可 作 成 1 1 完 全 相 同 之 信 D占 槽 圖 樣 0 但 是 這樣的装置在世界上僅有 1 1 幾 家 可 能 開 發 且 其 並 非 種 通 常 使 用 所 必 須 之 機 能 〇 而 1 I 為 保 護 著 作 權 藉 由 限 定 此 種 主 盤 記 錄 jflfc m 裝 置 之 出 貨 * 1 即 可 元 全 防 止 不 法 之 複 製 〇 接 著 在 第 一 圖 所 示 之 附 設 有 1 | 回 轉 角 度 感 應 器 1 7 a 之 主 盤 記 錄 機 裝 置 上 藉 由 輸 人 之 1 1 位 址 資 訊 3 2 a 之 資 料 及 來 白 馬 達 1 7 之 回 轉 角 度 之 i 1 位 置 =^z 貝 訊 3 2 b 作 成 物 理 位 置 表 5 3 2 並 藉 由 喑 號 編 1 I 碼 器 5 3 7 加 Μ 暗 號 化 並 藉 由 光 記 錄 回 路 3 7 將 之 記 錄 1 1 j 於 原 盤 2 之 外 周 部 上 〇 藉 此 可 在 第 五 圖 之 碟 片 2 之 光 軌 I 1 跡 6 5 上 於 原 盤 作 成 時 記 錄 下 被 暗 化 之 物 理 配 置 表 1 1 5 3 2 0 因 此 此 碟 片 即 使 在 沒 有 磁 頭 之 普 通 C D 一 R 〇 1 I - 2 9 - 1 i 1 本紙張尺度適用中®國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2!0X297公釐) 462039 A7 B7 輕濟部中央榡準局員工消f合作杜印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 1 Μ 驅 動 器 上 亦 可 再 生 〇 只 是 t 該 場 合 下 t 其 須 如 第 五 圖 及 J 1 1 第 六 圖 所 示 須 於 II 動 器 中 設 置 碟 片 回 轉 角 1 I 請 1 I 感 π» 愿 器 3 3 5 〇 此 一 檢 知 手 段 t 只 要 茌 可 檢 知 位 址 3 2 3 先 Μ 1 | 讀 1 之 相 對 位 置 及 9 〇 0 之 ΐ品 域 即 可 i 故 未 必 須 使 用 角 度 感 應 背 1 ιέ [ 器 般 之 複 雜 感 應 器 0 第 四 圖 所 示 即 為 該 相 對 位 置 檢 知 方 法、 < 1 | 1 - 例 如 第 四 圃 ( a ) 所 示 1 馬 達 之 回 轉 脈 衝 及 光 感 應 器 事 項 J I 再 1 之 索 引 信 號 於 碟 片 •Γγ 回 轉 — 圈 時 係 發 生 — 次 0 此 間 隔 如 第 % 本 i 四 圖 ( b ) 所 示 藉 由 分 割 時 間 r 若 為 - 八 等 分 區 域 之 場 合 頁 、—· 1 1 t 信 號 位 置 之 時 隙 ( t m e S 1 〇 t ) 2 1 Ζ 6 係 1 1 被 決 定 0 一 方 面 從 再 生 信 5K 之 子 碼 ( S U b C 〇 d e ) I 1 f 如 前 述 可 得 到 位 址 信 號 3 2 3 a 3 2 3 b 0 如 此 即 1 IT 可 從 信 號 位 置 信 號 檢 知 位 址 A 1 在 區 域 Z 1 位 址 A 2 在 1 區 域 Ζ 3 〇 此 場 合 在 子 碼 中 記 錄 回 轉 信 13由 或 區 域 信 號 I 1 時 其 構 成 雖 較 簡 單 但 此 資 料 可 被 複 製 成 一 模 一 樣 故 1 1 無 防 止 複 製 之 效 果 σ 因 此 如 本 發 明 之 除 光 記 錄 部 以 外 » 1 線 復 設 有 檢 知 回 轉 角 之 手 段 之 方 法 其 防 止 複 製 之 效 果 甚 高 1 I 〇 再 回 到 第 一 圖 在 記 錄 再 生 装 置 1 中 >λ 光 再 生 回 1 1 路 3 8 再 生 信 α占 若 光 軌 跡 中 存 在 有 物 理 配 置 表 5 3 2 1 i 則 會 從 第 七 圖 之 流 程 圖 之 步 驟 4 7 1 b 進 行 至 步 驟 4 7 1 1 I d Λ 4 7 1 e 0 步 驟 4 7 1 b 若 為 N 0 則 在 步 驟 4 7 1 l 1 C 將 檢 査 磁 性 記 錄 部 6 7 中 是 否 有 暗 號 資 料 若 為 N 0 j 1 1 則 進 行 至 步 驟 4 7 1 r 許 可 其 起 動 0 若 為 Y Ε S I 則 進 1 I 行 至 步 驟 4 7 1 d 4 7 1 e 再 生 暗 號 資 料 1 並 起 動 記 I I - 3 0 - 1 1 本紙張尺度速用中®國家樣隼(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 經濟部中央椋準局眞工消f合作社印震 ''4 6 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 錄於驅動器之R OM或磁碟中之暗號解碼器5 34之暗號 解謓程式|而解謓暗號,在步驟4 7 1 f 1則作成物理配 置表532,即An : Zn之區域位址對應表。在步驟4 7 1 w ,將檢查媒體内是否存在有碟片檢查程式,若為N 〇,則進行至步驟4 7 1 p ,若為Y E S ,則在步驟4 7 ^ 1 g起動記錄於碟片内之碟片檢査程式。在步驟47 1 f 之碟片檢査程式中,首先,在步驟47 1 h使n =〇,而 -.广》- 在步驟47 1 i使n = n+ l ,在步驟47 1j ,在驅動 器刺,找尋碟片2之位址An *並再生之。在步驟47 1 k <藉由前述之位址位置檢知手段3 3 5檢知位置資訊Z ’ η並輸出。在步驟471m,檢視Z’ n=Zn,若為 NO ,在步驟47 1 u判定其為不法拷貝之CD ,將”不 法拷貝之CD”之訊息送出至顯示部1 6 ,在步驟47 1 s令其STOP。在步驟47 lm若為YE S ,茌步驟4 7 1 η檢查η =最後•若為N 0則回到步驟4 7 1 i ,若 為YE S <則前進至步驟47 1 p。在步驟47 1 p將檢 查驅動器側之ROM或RAM内是否有碟片檢査程式,若 為N ◦時 > 在步驟471 r啟動軟體。若為YES ,在步 驟47 1 Q起動碟片檢查程式。此内容與步驟4 7 1 t完 全相同。若為N ◦則進行步驟47 1 u 、47 1 s 。若為 YE S ,則在步驟47 1 r開始再生碟片内之軟體。在目 前所生產之CD音響中,於再生線速度之變化在1 · 2〜 1 _4m/s間之碟片時,可毫無問題地再生原信號。一 -3 1 ~ 本紙張尺度逍用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4現格(2丨0X297公釐) --------i------iT---1---r ^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央標车局員Η消费合作社印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 方 面 主 盤 記 錄 機 装 置 可 在 0 0 0 1 m / S 之 相 當 嚴 密 1 1 1 之 線 速 度 精 度 下 刻 蝕 信 號 槽 〇 在 此 作 為 主 盤 記 錄 機 裝 置 1 j 請 1 I 之 規 格 係 設 有 線 速 土 0 〇 1 m / S 之 C D 規 格 〇 為 先 Μ 1 1 遵 讀 1 守 此 C D 規 格 如 第 十 一 圖 ( a ) ( b ) 所 示 i 可 在 規 背 1 面 j 格 內 使 線 速 度 例 如 由 1 2 〇 1Ό / s 上 曰 升 至 1 2 2 m / 乂 注 ί 1 意 1 S C 此 場 合 如 第 + — 圖 ( C ) ( d ) 所 示 碟 片 轉 一 圈 > 事 項 1 Ι 再 I 同 位 址 之 角 度 之 物 理 配 置 僅 偏 差 5 9 度 即 5 3 9 填 寫 本 裝 a 至 5 3 9 b 0 如 第 十 二 圖 所 示 > 若 於 記 錄 再 生 装 置 側 頁 I j 設 置 可 檢 知 此 5 9 度 之 角 度 偏 差 之 回 轉 角 度 感 應 器 3 3 1 5 則 可 辨 別 此 物 理 配 置 之 不 同 0 C D 之 場 合 具 由 6 〇 1 1 之 分 解 能 即 一 圏 可 作 1 / 6 〇 Μ 上 之 角 度 分 割 之 回 轉 角 ί 訂 1 1 度 感 應 器 3 3 5 即 可 0 此 種 回 轉 角 度 感 應 器 3 5 5 之 構 成 係 揭 示 於 第 十 - 圖 之 記 錄 再 生 装 置 之 方 塊 圖 ! I 中 〇 將 馬 達 1 7 的 F G 等 的 回 轉 角 度 感 應 器 1 7 a 所 輸 出 f 1 之 脈 衝 藉 由 碟 片 物 理 配 置 檢 知 部 5 5 6 中 角 度 位 置 檢 知 1 Ί 郜 5 5 3 中 之 時 間 分 割 回 路 5 5 3 a 加 以 時 間 分 割 而 1 I 使 其 一 回 轉 方 可 得 到 一 次 之 回 轉 脈 衝 信 時 洌 如 可 獲 得 1 I 士 5 % 之 時 間 精 度 之 場 合 因 可 作 2 0 等 分 故 可 獲 得 1 1 1 8 0 左 右 之 角 度 分 解 能 0 有 11 其 動 作 參 照 第 四 圖 ( a ) 1 I b ) ( C ) 加 以 說 明 〇 若 為 C D 因 具 有 土 2 0 0 U m 1 1 Ι 之 偏 心 故 將 發 生 因 其 偏 心 所 専 致 之 角 度 到 量 誤 差 〇 若 為 I i C D 規 格 之 碟 片 » 因 偏 心 將 發 生 在 P — Ρ 上 最 大 0 8 1 1 度 之 角 度 測 量 誤 差 0 因 此 若 為 須 要 1 〇 之 角 度 測 量 分 解 1 I - 3 2 - 1 t 1 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ 297公嫠) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作杜印製 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 i 能 之 場 U3 t 則 將 Μ 法 測 量 C 為 免 此 倩 形 } 若 須 要 高 精 度 ! 1 1 之 角 度 分 解 能 時 可 於 第 十 六 圖 中 之 角 度 位 置 檢 知 部 5 5 i i 請 ί I 3 設 置 偏 心 量 檢 知 部 5 5 3 C > Η 撿 知 偏 心 量 » 並 藉 由 偏 先 Μ 1 I 讀 1 心 Μ 補 正 部 5 5 3 b 實 行 補 正 演 算 i Μ 補 正 因 偏 心 所 造 成 背 i 面 1 - 1 之 影 W 0 下 說 明 有 關 此 偏 心 量 之 檢 知 及 補 正 值 之 演 算 方:, 注 1 意 I 法 〇 如 第 十 九 圖 ( a ) 所 示 全 沒 有 偏 心 時 1 碟 片 之 同 言 1 } 再 l — 半 徑 上 之 A B Λ C 二 點 為 θ a = Θ b = Θ C 時 1 該 填 寫 本 裝 角 形 之 中 心 即 為 真 正 之 碟 片 中 心 5 5 7 0 實 際 上 > 如 第 十 頁 'w1· 1 I 九 圖 ( b ) 所 示 因 碟 片 之 偏 心 或 碟 片 装 設 時 之 偏 差 將 1 1 產 生 偏 心 5 5 9 0 如 第 十 九 圖 ( b ) 所 示 藉 由 角 度 感 應 1 1 器 3 5 3 檢 知 三 點 之 位 址 A 、 B C 之 相 仲丨 對 角 度 碟 Η 之 1 訂 回 轉 中 心 5 5 8 和 真 正 之 碟 片 中 心 5 5 7 之 偏 差 L ) a 1 1 1 如 圈 所 示 可 藉 由 L I a 二 f ( Θ a Θ b Θ C ) 之 演 1 1 算 求 出 〇 在 偏 心 補 正 部 5 5 3 b 使 用 該 演 算 所 得 之 偏 ! i 心 量 補 正 演 算 回 轉 角 度 感 應 器 1 7 a 之 回 轉 角 信 Otto 5K 藉 1 i 此 即 可 補 正 偏 心 之 影 m 故 可 獲 得 將 角 度 分 解 能 提 昇 至 1 ί 1 0 以 下 之 精 度 之 效 果 1 而 可 使 不 法 碟 片 之 檢 知 精 度 更 高 1 1 ° 前 述 之 6 〇 左 右 之 低 分 解 檢 知 角 度 位 置 時 1 在 正 規 I 1 及 不 法 碟 片 之 判 別 结 果 上 其 要 由 求 要 有 相 當 之 嚴 謹 度 0 1 I 持 別 是 將 正 規 之 碟 片 判 為 不 法 者 將 ΛΛ 市 给 使 用 者 偌 大 之 1 1 1 損 失 故 必 須 絕 對 避 開 之 0 為 此 t 如 第 十 四 圖 之 流 程 圖 之 1 f 步 驟 5 5 1 t 5 5 1 U 5 5 1 V 所 示 Iti Μί 判 定 為 不 法 1 1 之 位 址 > 追 蹤 2 次 Μ 上 之 複 數 次 並 再 生 之 η 由 該 檢 查 1 1 - 3 3 - 1 1 本紙张尺度適用中國國家標隼(CMS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 462039 A7 B7 經濟部中央標牟局貝工消費合作社印策 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 1 >λ 避 開 錯 誤 之 判 定 0 其 基 本 之 流 程 圖 因 與 第 七 圈 相 同 故 省 1 I 1 胳 之 » Μ 下 僅 說 明 追 加 之 步 m 0 在 步 驟 5 5 1 Γ 判 定 為 非 1 1 請 1 t 在 容 許 值 內 時 1 在 步 驟 5 5 1 t 對 位 址 A η 作 複 數 次 再 追 先 1 I 蹤 在 步 驟 5 5 1 U 撿 知 揭 示 A π 之 相 m 角 度 之 區 域 號 碼 讀 背 1 I 面 I Ζ t Π 在 步 驟 5 5 1 V 作 相 同 之 複 数 次 檢 查 以 確 定 甚 是^ j 1 | 意 I 否 在 容 許 值 内 若 為 Y E S 則 視 為 正 規 碟 Η J 並 進 行 步 驟 項 1 1 1 } 5 5 1 S 0 若 為 Ν 0 則 視 為 不 法 碟 片 進 行 步 驟 4 7 1 U 填 寫 本 裝 4 7 1 S 而 不 允 許 該 程 式 動 作 〇 又 作 為 防 止 錯 惡 判 頁 1 I 斷 之 另 — 方 法 可 藉 由 追 加 之 统 計 處 理 提 局 其 判 定 精 度 1 I 0 如 第 十 二 圖 ( a ) 所 示 正· 規 之 原 盤 其 角 度 — 位 址 > 1 1 角 度 — 循 跡 方 向 s 位 址 — 循 跡 方 向 Λ 角 度 一 信 號 槽 深 度 、 i 1 丁 位 址 — 信 號 槽 深 度 等 之 頻 次 分 布 保 如 第 1 表 所 示 0 在 此 t 1 I 如 表 2 所 示 選 擇 特 定 資 料 並 Η 驅 動 器 再 生 時 選 擇 易 1 1 分 辨 之 樣 本 位 址 之 資 料 〇 然 後 如 第 十 二 圖 ( b ) 所 示 t ! 1 再 生 成 形 之 碟 片 並 找 出 表 3 之 黑 色 部 份 所 示 之 容 許 值 1 焱 塢 差 之 信 P占 部 並 如 表 4 所 示 » 將 @ 容 許 值 偏 差 之 異 宮 值 1 f 自 表 列 中 m 除 0 圖 中 雖 揭 示 角 度 — 位 址 配 置 之 頻 次 分 布 1 1 , 但 信 C7占 槽 深 度 之 分 布 與 位 址 — 循 跡 量 之 分 布 j 亦 可 得 到 1 1 相 同 之 效 果 〇 藉 此 因 可 將 不 易 辨 別 亦 即 容 易 被 判 疋 為 1 I 錯 誤 之 拷 貝 防 止 信 號 部 S 表 列 中 排 除 J 故 驅 動 器 再 生 時 1 1 1 可 減 少 再 生 時 發 生 錯 誤 判 疋 之 機 曰 0 藉 由 再 次 追 蹤 前 1 1 述 之 2 次 Μ 上 被 判 斷 為 不 法 之 位 址 » 可 減 低 錯 誤 判 疋 之 機 f 1 會 0 — 方 面 1 若 為 不 法 複 製 原 m 時 如 第 十 二 圈 ( C ) 所 1 I - 3 4 - 1 ! 1 本紙張尺度適用中囷國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(21 OX 297公釐) 462039 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局員工消費合作杜印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 示 因 係 謓 取 已 成 形 之 碟 片 位 址 而 怍 成 原 盤 1 故 首 先 將 1 1 1 如 表 5 所 示 > 將 發 生 分 布 於 —- 疋 之 或 然 率 之 範 圍 内 之 C P 1 t 請 1 1 ( 防 止 拷 貝 ) 信 α占 0 此 時 * 如 前 所 述 , 因 碟 片 物 理 配 置 表 先 VI 1 | 篡 讀 1 無 法 被 改 1 故 Μ 法 實 行 如 表 2 之 貝 料 之 選 擇 作 0 因 此 背 i 面 1 J 不 法· 原 盤 之 物 理 配 置 區 將 存 在 有 非 常 接 近 容 許 值 限 度 之 之 注 f 1 意 1 =欠 貝 料 或 超 越 容 許 值 之 C Ρ 信 號 0 如 第 十 二 圖 ( d ) 所 示 事 項 1 I 再 1 y 1 在 此 種 i 不 法 原 盤 施 以 成 形 沖 壓 所 製 成 之 光 碟 上 t 將 被 · 寫 本 裝 添 增 成 形 偏 差 所 造 成 之 誤 差 i 而 成 為 如 表 6 之 分 布 i 而 作 頁 1 1 成 如 塗 黑 部 份 所 示 之 超 過 容 許 值 之 物 理 配 置 信 號 5 5 2 1 i b 〇 此 種 不 法 碟 Η 上 所 特 有 之 物 理 配 置 信 號 5 5 2 b t 因 [ 1 將 被 碟 片 檢 査 程 式 所 檢 出 故 程 式 之 動 作 將 停 止 而 可 1 訂 ! 防 止 拷 貝 碟 片 之 使 用 〇 如 此 角 度 — 位 址 之 C P ( C 0 P Y P R 0 T E C Τ ) 信 號 之 分 布 藉 成 形 沖 壓 將 分 1 1 散 於 小 ie 圍 内 0 相 對 於 此 第 十 七 圖 ( b ) 所 示 之 信 號 槽 1 1 深 度 之 場 合 因 蝕 刻 及 成 形 條 件 其 深 度 將 大 幅 變 化 因 ! .¾ 其 精 密 度 控 制 係 甚 為 困 難 故 不 法 複 製 碟 片 在 製 造 時 其 產 1 量 將 大 幅 降 低 0 因 此 信 號 槽 m 度 之 場 合 將 可 賦 與 強 力 1 1 之 防 止 拷 貝 機 能 〇 在 此 說 明 有 m 第 十 二 圖 之 可 檢 知 及 防 1 1 止 碟 片 之 物 理 配 置 之 頻 次 分 布 被 拷 貝 之 再 生 装 置 及 流 程 圖 I 1 C· 記 錄 再 生 装 置 1 係 如 Λ-·ν 弟 十 二 圖 及 第 十 、- 圖 所 示 具 有 碟 l 1 片 物 理 配 置 檢 知 部 5 5 6 該 檢 知 部 中 係 具 有 角 度 位 置 檢 1 1 知 部 5 5 3 循 跡 雯 位 檢 知 部 5 5 4 、 信 號 槽 深 度 撿 知 部 1 1 5 5 5 等 三 個 檢 知 部 其 可 檢 知 角 度 位 置 資 訊 Z η \ 循 ! I - 3 5 一 1 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國S家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2i〇X 297公釐) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局負Η消費合作.社印袈 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 1 跡 要 位 Τ r η 、 信 號 槽 深 度 D t η f 而 輸 出 檢 知 信 號 〇 藉 f I 1 由 確 認 位 址 檢 知 部 5 5 7 之 信 號 A η 和 時 間 性 之 — 致 1 1 1 請 1 I 可 獲 得 A , η — Z 1 η A t η - T > η 、 A , η — D , 先 VI ! r 和 讀 1 η Z η 一 下 η \ 2 , η — D η 、 Τ η — D Π 背 1 A I 之 對 應 資 料 〇 在 將 該 等 貢 料 藉 由 暗 號 解 碼 器 5 3 4 加 K 復、 冬 1 | 意 j 元 所 成 之 正 規 基 準 碟 片 物 理 配 置 表 5 3 2 之 A η 、 Z η 事 項 1 i 再 1 f 、 T η Λ D η 和 對 照 部 5 3 5 中 I 藉 由 對 照 如 發 現 為 不 填 鳥 本 裝 法 碟 片 即 藉 由 輸 出 / 動 作 停 止 手 段 5 3 6 t Sw-" 1 I 停 止 該 碟 片 之 程 式 之 動 作 〇 其 次 說 明 有 關 使 用 统 記 ! I 方 法 減 少 碟 片 判 定 錯 誤 情 形 之 流 程 圖 0 第 十 四 圖 中 與 第 1 1 七 圖 相 同 之 部 份 係 省 略 而 著 重 於 碟 片 物 理 配 置 資 料 之 第 1 訂 i I 十 二 圖 之 表 1 6 所 示 之 分 布 頻 次 並 僅 限 定 說 明 有 關 不 法 碟 片 之 判 f h 之 部 份 0 首 先 於 碟 片 檢 査 程 式 4 7 1 t 中 1 1 > 於 碟 片 檢 查 程 式 和 應 用 程 式 之 各 處 設 致 檢 查 點 >λ 檢 1 1 査 步 驟 5 5 1 W 之 C Ρ ( C 0 Ρ Y Ρ R 〇 T E C Τ ) 暗 1 i 號 解 除 程 式 亦 即 第 十 圖 中 之 暗 號 解 碼 器 5 3 4 中 之 基 1 | 準 物 理 配 置 表 5 3 2 之 暗 號 之 解 除 用 之 R S A 等 之 DO 単 方 向 1 I 性 函 數 演 算 部 5 3 4 C 所 被 包 括 之 第 — 暗 號 解 碼 器 5 3 4 1 1 a 是 否 被 荽 更 為 不 法 ) 亦 即 是 否 被 篡 改 為 不 法 並 被 藉 由 1 j 不 法 之 暗 號 解 碼 器 予 Κ 不 合 法 地 解 除 其 暗 號 由 每 次 之 1 1 | 撿 查 j 若 察 覺 其 為 Υ Ε S 時 1 即 中 止 其 動 作 〇 藉 此 1 可 防 1 t 止 不 法 複 製 »UL 呆 者 將 第 — 暗 X) 士 A7J m 碼 器 5 3 4 a 換 成 不 法 之 喑 1 1 號 解 碼 器 1 故 可 提 高 暗 號 之 安 全 度 > 而 巨 有 強 化 防 止 他 人 1 I - 3 6 - ! 1 本紙張尺度適用中國g家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ 297公釐) 4 6203 9 A7 經濟部中夬標準局負工消費合作社印製 B7五、發明説明() 複製之效果。其次,說明步驟55 1 f 。在此步驟,對於 角度位置|係測定特定之位址 之位置 < 並測 定區域號碼之基準物理配置衷5 3 2之基準角上之偏差量 之分布狀態。若定義m = ◦為無偏差狀態*而m = ±n& η個區域產生偏差時*在步驟55 1 s ,m = — 1 ,在步 ^ 驟551h,m = m+ l ,在步驟551 i ,檢査以測量 之角度區域Ζ' η是否有m個偏差,若為NO則回到步驟 5 5 1 h ,若為Ϋ^Ε έ則在步驟5 5 1 <ΐ追加到Z, η之 偏差分布表列中,而漸次作成偏差量之分布表。在步驟5 5 1 k ,若已是最後,則進行下一步驟47 1 η ,若為Ν 0則回到步驟5 5 1 h 。如此,如第+六圖所示,將逐次 測量特並位址之角度位置、循跡位移、信號槽深度和角度 /位址位置等之基準間之偏差之分布狀態。碟片檢査程式 47 1 t中之步驟551m *係藉由正當性判別程式•在 步驟5 5 1 ?1中 > 將被暗號化並記錄於磁性層或光記錄層 之例如位址η之角度配置Ζ’ η之自基準值偏差所產生之 偏差量m之最大容許值Pn ( m ),暗號復元化並謓出> 並檢査前述之步驟55 1 f之物理位置偏差分布測量程式 所作成之第十八圖所示之偏差分布表5 5 6 a和基準之物 理配置表532a ,以判斷碟片之真假。首先,在步驟5 = 0 ,在步驟 551q ,在步 驟5 5 1 !,檢査其是否在容許值之範圍内。藉由檢視 η之數目是否比第十八圖之P n (m)為小,以檢査其是 -3 7 - (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) I - I nl^pi I - -I - —I il^^i - - I-1 --- n T , - - --1^1^1 fg L. -- I .¾. i 沒 本紙法尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 4 6203 9 B7 A7 經濟部中央標準局員工消资合作社印袈 五、發明説明( ) 1 i 1 否 在 容 許 值 之 範 圍 内 0 若 為 N 〇 則 進 行 上 述 之 步 驟 5 5 1 1 i 1 f 再 度 追 蹤 該 位 址 若 不 行 則 判 定 其 為 不 法 t 若 為 0 Κ i I 讀 1 I 則 進 行 步 驟 5 5 1 S 〇 在步驟 5 5 1 Γ 若 為 Y E S 則 進 行 先 Μ 1 I 5 I 步 驟 5 5 1 S 0 m 若 為 最 末 則 進 行 步 驟 4 7 1 P 為 背 1 & 1 之 1 N 〇 則 回 到 步 驟 5 5 1 Q 〇 如 此 藉 由 測 量 Z η 之 相 對^ 注 | 意 I 於 Z η 之 偏 差 分 布 進 行 若 在 容 許 值 以 内 則 為 正 規 碟 片 ί 事 項 1 I 再 1 若 在 容 許 值 >λ 外 則 為 不 法 碟 片 之 判 之 統 記 處 理 ΰ 藉 此 填 寫 本 袈 可 獲 得 將 正 規 碟 Η 誤 判 為 不 法 碟 片 之 機 率 及 其 相 反 之 機 率 X 1 I 被 減 低 之 效 果 0 又 在 第 十 四 圖 之 流 程 圖 中 在 步 驟 5 5 1 I 1 a 藉 由 如 第 十 圖 所 示 亂 數 發 生 器 5 8 3 等 之 隨 機 1 I 抽 出 器 5 8 2 對暗號解碼器 5 3 4 或 磁 性 再 生 回 路 3 1 訂 0 送 出 部 份 性 選 擇 信 號 選 擇 記 錄 有 暗 號 之 全 軌 跡 之 —^. 1 [ 部 份 之 磁 性 軌 跡 或 光 軌 跡 追 蹤 並 再 生 之 0 藉 此 因 只 須 1 1 追 蹤 暗 σ占 m 資 料 全 部 中 之 — 部 份 例如 萬 個 中 之 1 0 0 0 1 1 個 左 右 IP 可 其 Hr» m 械 性 之 追 蹤 時 間 將 被 縮 短 而 具 有 縮 短 [ { 複 製 檢 査 時 間 之 效 果 Q 又 隨 機 抽 出 器 5 8 2 係 對 暗 號 解 1 I 碼 器 5 3 4 送 出 選 擇 信 號 實 行 被 再 生 之 暗 號 實 料 之 部 份 I i 資 料 之 暗 號 解 除 0 例 如 若 為 5 1 2 b t 之 單 方 向 性 函 I i 數 之 暗 號 時 於 其 暗 號 解 除 Μ 3 2 位 元 之 電 腦 為 例 亦 1 I 須 要 數 分 之 一 秒 C 但 是 藉 由 採 用 此 部 份 選 擇 方 式 可 得 I 1 I 到 縮 短 暗 號 解 m 時 間 之 效 果 0 藉 由 亂 數 發 生 1 1 器 5 8 4 因 每 此 僅 須 撿 査 si 取 低 須 要 之 樣 品 量 即 每 次 僅 I 1 須 檢 査 不 同 之 樣 品 資 料 例 如 在 1 〇 〇 0 0 點 之 樣 本 點 中 1 1 - 38 - 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國®家標準(CMS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央標準局—Η消賢合作杜印製 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 \ 1 每 回 只 檢 查 1 〇 〇 個 樣 本 點 之 糸 统 上 5 其 最 後 亦 將 檢 查 1 I 1 全 部 之 1 〇 0 0 0 個 樣 本 點 0 因 此 複 製 λΟΑ m 者 必 須 將 1 〇 1 I 請 1 f 0 〇 〇 個 樣 本 點 全 部 之 物 理 配 置 複 製 成 與 基 準碟片 為 完 全 先 Μ 1 1 讀 1 相 同 之 形 狀 0 因 複 製 全 部 的 樣 本 點 之 角 度 循 跡 量 信 號 背 1 * I 槽 之 1 深 度 係 甚 為 困 難 * 其 防 止 複 製 之 效 果 甚 高 0 藉 由 追 加 此、 注 | 意 I m 機 抽 出 器 5 8 2 , 可 實 現 不 失 高 度 防 止 複 製 效 果 而 可 本 1 I 再 1 1 大 幅 縮 短 碟 片 檢 查 時 間 之 宏 效 0 琨 在 再 回 到 第 十 三 圖 及 填 寫 本 第 十 - 圖 之 記 錄 再 装 置 之 圖 式 作 說 明 0 第 + 圖 之 記 錄 頁 1 ] 再 生 装 置 1 之 碟 片 物 理 配 置 檢 知 部 中 除 上 述 之 角 度 位 置 1 1 檢 知 部 5 5 3 外 復 設 有 循 跡 量 檢 知 部 5 5 4 及 信 號 槽 深 1 i 度 檢 知 部 5 5 5 的 兩 個 檢 知 部 0 首 先 循 跡 量 檢 知 部 5 5 1 訂 1 1 4 接 受 光 讀 頭 6 之 循 跡 控 制 部 2 4 之 可 測 量 顔 動 ( W 0 b b 1 η g ) 等 之 循 跡 錯 誤 檢 知 回 路 般 之 循 跡 虽 咸 應 器 1 i 2 4 a 所 送 來 之 位 址 η 之 循 跡 量 丁 η 測 量 循 跡 量 和 其 它 1 1 之 A * η Z f η 、 D t η 等 之 其 它 檢 知 信 號 間 之 時 1 k 間 _- 致 性 而 作 成 Τ r η 並 輸 出 至 對 照 部 5 3 5 0 以 ! I 第 二 十 圖 ( a ) ( b ) 說 明 此 原 理 0 在 第 二 + 圖 ( a ) 之 [ 1 正 規 碟 片 上 位 址 A 1 之 物 理 位 置 5 3 9 於 原 盤 作 成 時 係 ! t 被 添 加 m 動 等 之 循 跡 方 向 之 調 製 〇 因 此 在 外 周 方 向 其 1 I 循 跡 動 作 將 偏 移 C 若 將 此 疋 義 為 Τ 1 = 1 i 在 位 址 A 2 1 1 1 之 物 理 位 置 5 3 9 b Τ 2 — 1 0 此 資 訊 可 在 原 盤 作 I 1 成 時 或 原 盤 作 成 後 判 別 出 並 被 作 成 基 準 物 理 配 置 表 5 3 1 1 2 t 復 被 暗 0^. 化 並 記 錄 於 媒 體 2 0 其 次 在 第 二 十 圖 ( 1 1 - 3 9 - 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 3ί濟部中央標準局員工消费合作社印衷 五、發明説明( ) 1 ί 1 b ) 所 示 之 不 法 複 製 媒 體 2 上 通 常 不 會 追 加 循 跡 位 移 0 1 ! 1 又 卽 使 其 追 加 循 跡 位 移 如 圖 所 示 角 度 區 域 Z 1 上 之 i ! 請 1 I 位 址 A 1 、 A 2 之 循 跡 位 移 T t 1 丁 » 2 分 別 成 為 例 如 先 Μ 1 1 讀 1 〇 1 + 1 其 測 得 之 碟 片 物 理 配 置 表 5 5 6 與 正 規 碟 片 之 背 1 面 1 之 i 基 準 物 理 配 置 表 5 3 2 將 有 所 不 同 〇 因 此 可 藉 由 第 十 / \ 1 t- i 圖 之 碟 片 檢 查 部 5 3 3 之 截 昭 部 5 3 5 將 之 檢 出 而 藉 由 事 項 f I 再 1 l 輸 出 / 動 作 停 止 手 段 5 3 6 停 止 程 式 之 輸 出 、 程 式 之 動 作 填 寫 «% 本 或 苐 二 暗 Wu 解 碼 器 5 3 4 b 之 應 用 程 式 之 暗 號 解 並 頁 1 I 將 // 不 法 拷 貝 碟 片 // 之 訊 息 輸 出 至 顯 示 部 1 6 0 第 十 六 圖 1 1 之 情 形 碟 片 檢 查 程 式 本 身 因 係 被 第 二 暗 σ由 解 碼 器 5 3 4 I 1 b 暗 號 化 故 碟 片 檢 查 程 式 5 3 3 之 篡 改 變 得 困 難 而 可 I 訂 提 高 防 止 複 製 之 效 果 0 其 次 說 明 信 『 槽 深 度 檢 知 部 〇 如 1 | 第 十 六 圖 所 示 來 自 光 謓 頭 6 之光再生信號將被送至信號 1 1 槽 檢 知 部 5 5 5 之 包 絡 線 ( e η V e 1 〇 Ρ e ) 等 之 振 幅 I I 調 製 度 之 麥 動 或 多 值 位 準 限 幅 器 等 之 振 幅 量 檢 知 部 5 5 1 5 a 由 該 振 幅 雯 化 中 可 檢 知 信 號 槽 深 度 將 檢 知 輸 出 D 1 I > π 送 至 對 照 部 5 3 5 將 之 與 基 準 物 理 配 置 表 5 3 2 之 1 I 質 料 對 照 〇 其 對 照 若 發 現 不 同 則 it 入 拷 貝 防 止 動 作 1 1 如 此 如 第 二 十 一 圖 ( a ) ( b ) ( C ) ( d ) 所 示 位 1 I 址 A η 角 度 Z η 、 循 跡 位 移 量 T η 、 信 號 槽 深 度 D η 之 1 1 f 四 涸 檢 查 參 數 因 可 對 — 個 樣 本 點 之 物 理 位 置 5 3 9 a 、 [ 1 5 3 9 b 5 3 9 C 分 別 檢 查 故 複 製 時 須 複 製 全 部 之 ! 1 樣 本 點 上 之 四 個 參 數 之 條 件 完 全 _. 致 之 原 盤 方 可 〇 欲 kk 高 1 I 一 4 0 - 1 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(2Ι0Χ297公釐) 經濟部中夬標準局員工消肯合作社印裝 4 6203 9 厂 A7 B7五、發明説明() 相同率複製滿滿足上述條降之原盤者係甚為困難。因此, 可實琨強力之防止拷貝功效。持別是在改雯幅度後|欲複 製匯聚不同深度之信號槽之信號槽群者,係甚困難,並使 相同率減低,而ί吏其不苻經濟性。本發明之場合,如第三 十六圖所示,在步驟584a ,例如在同一原盤上之1 ◦、 0〇組信號槽中,以記錄輸出、脈衝幅度等I 0 0 0組不 同之記錄條件,加以記錄時,在步驟5 84b K —定相同 率,例如1 / 2 0 3之相同率,製作出五組合乎條件之信 號槽群。在步驟5 6 4 c 1將虻合格之信號漕群之物理配 置等|以雷射光從原盤上藉由螢幕顯示將之找出。在步铤 5 84 d |作成合格信號槽群之物理配置表 > 在步認5 8 4 e實行物理配置表之暗號化,在步驟5 84 f *若為光 記錄部,則在步耧5 8 4 s將此暗號記錄於原盤之第二感 光部572a 。在步驟584h ,對原盤注入塑膠,以形 成光碟|在步驟584 i形成反射膜,在步驟584」若 無磁性層則完成,若有.則在步發ί 5 8 4 k作成磁性記錄 部,在步驟5 84m將暗號記錄於磁性記錄部|而完成光 碟之製作。於原盤作成後,測量信號槽深度•並加以暗號 化,並記錄配置表,玟原盤作成時之相同率可被提高至近 乎1 00%。 在此,說明有關信號槽深度檢知部555 中之信號槽深度之檢知法。第十ir圖(a)之不法複製碟 片之信號槽56 la〜f ,係為同漾深度。而在第十七圖 (b )之正規碟片之信號槽中*信號嘈560c 、d 、e -4卜 (請先閱讀背面之洼意事項再填寫本頁)Increase the radius r, so the signal increase is recorded as a spiral. Thus, as shown in the third figure (a), the data is recorded in a spiral shape on the original disk. If it is a CAV disc of Vi d e o d sk, the original disc can be reproduced, and the rotation and rotation control can be fully linked to make the original disc. Therefore, when the third party obtains the original data 5 2 8, the master disc recorder device 5 2 9 can easily make a disc master with the same signal groove pattern as the CAV disc manufactured normally. If it is a CAV, the difference between the signal groove pattern of the legally manufactured original disk and the illegally copied original disk will be within several um. Therefore, with conventional methods, it is impossible to distinguish between a regular-made and an illegally-made disc from the physical configuration of the signal slot pattern. On the one hand, if it is a CLV disc of CD-ROM, a certain linear velocity initially set in the range of Ml'2 ~ 1, 4m / s is recorded on the original disc on the spiral portion. If it is CAV, the number of data recorded in a week is always constant. If it is CL V * By changing the line speed, the number of data in one week will be diamondized. If the line speed is slow, the data configuration of the third figure (a) will be 5 3 0 a. If the line -24 " this paper size is common Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2) 0X 297 mm) 111--i _---I 1 I--II:--I-— ^ ϋ. .1 -'--- ϋ I— τ Oral Affairs (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Economy Printed by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the People's Republic of China Huai Bureau Chengong Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. Print $ i 462039 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () When the speed is fast *, the data configuration of the third picture (b) will be 530b. In this way, the usual master disk recording device of M can distinguish between the regular CD and the illegal copy CD data configuration 5 3 0. KK Master disk recording device for general commercial CDs > The line speed can be set with a high accuracy of 0 · 00 lm / s. Then, when making the original disc at a certain linear speed, K has this high accuracy, even if the original CD of 74 minutes is created at a linear velocity of 12 m / s * at the outermost track, when the error is biased to the PLUS side *, 1 1-., August • 783 week error. That is, it can be made into an original disc with a data configuration of 530b with an angular error of 1 1 ′ 783 cycles X36 0 degrees at the outermost periphery than its ideal original disc. Therefore, as shown in (a) and (b) of the third product, the data configuration 530, that is, the addresses 32 3 a to X of each of A1 to A26, will differ between regular CDs and illegally copied CDs. For example, when the quarter area and the configuration area 53 1 of Z1 to Z4 are defined, the configuration area 531 of the address 323 of A1 to A 26 will be different. Therefore, when a correspondence table between two CD allocation areas 531 and addresses 3 23 is created, that is, a physical allocation table 5 3 2, as shown in the third figure (a) and the third figure (b), in the regular CD The physical configuration table 5 3 2 a and 5 3 2 will be different from those of the illegally copied CD. Therefore, this difference can be used to distinguish between regular CD and illegal copy CD. However, it is only possible to create a CD that is difficult to physically copy. Because the method of tampering with the regular CD is a regular CD is very easy, its effect is very weak. As shown in the fifth figure, in the present invention, the physical position table 5 3 2 is created during the production of the CD original disk or after the original disk is finished. This physical configuration table 5 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2 10 X 297 cm) --------- 二 衣 ------ 1T ----- --0 (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page.) The economic capital is centrally located. The employee's consumer cooperation of the bureau is du 462039 A7 B7. 5. Description of the invention () 3 2. And a unidirectional function such as ciphering, and ciphering it by ciphering means 5 3 7 and recording it in the light R OM portion 65 of the CD medium 2 or the magnetic recording track 67 of the CD medium 2 a. Second, in On the drive (dr i ver) side, the code signal 538b is reproduced from the CD medium 2 or 2a, and the code interpretation program reproduced from the optical recording part of the CD is reproduced 5 3 4 | Fuyuan physical configuration table 5 3 2. Reuse The disc inspection program 5 3 a a reproduced from the CD is also obtained from the rotation pulse signal or index generated by the aforementioned FG | Obtain the disc rotation angle information 335 of the current CD address 38a, and compare it with The physical configuration table 532 is compared with the asset section. If it is 〇1 ^ then 5 Ding Hui RT · If it is NO, it is judged to be an illegally copied CD, and the game software is stopped Reproduction of music or music software. The illegally copied CD shown in the third picture (b), its physical configuration table 532b is different from the regular one, so it is withdrawn. As long as the code encoding program 5 3 7 cannot be resolved, it cannot be copied. The CD ca n’t be moved. Therefore, g 卩 causes the copy signal to be copied and also withdrawn. In this way, it has the great effect of completely preventing the reproduction of the illegal copy of the CD. The countermeasures of the CD drive can be found in the following three ways: 1. Make an original disc with the same signal and groove pattern as the CLV disc. 2. Interpret the secret key of the fifth picture by the code decoding program 534 Code encoding program. 3 ^ Analyze all programs in CD — ROM, and modify the code decoding program 534 or disc inspection program 533a * and replace them. Among the above three methods, the third method * is to interpret and modify the program Be-2 6-This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) I --- n I ---- I ^ _-n ---- τ η ______ 丨 * 0 ^. { (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this card) 4 62039 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () It takes a considerable amount of time, that is, a high cost, and the profit of copying CD is relatively small and meaningless. Also, in the present invention, the password decoding program 534 and the disc check program 5 3 3 a are not on the driver side, but are on the media side, so they can be compressed according to the title of CD-R OM and compression. Therefore, due to the interpretation of each title investment program and the interpretation of the secret code, the forecast of the illegal copying business is deteriorated, and the economical effect of preventing copying can be achieved. Secondly, in relation to the second method, in the present invention, the 箪 direction function of the public secret key method such as the R S A method shown in the fifth figure-... For example, you can use the formula C = E (M) = M ° mon η. Therefore, that is, the work cooperation between the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Du Yin ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Make the CD-ROM publicly reveal the code decoding program, which is part of the key, and the other The decryption of the secret code encoding program 5 3 7 of the share key takes, for example, one billion years, so it will not be solved. However, the actual information of the code encoding program 537 may be leaked. However, by the method of the fifth figure, the code decoding program 5 3 4 is located on the media side instead of the drive side. Therefore, in the event of a leak, when the reward is leaked, the password-protection program 1 of the pair can return to the state of preventing copying again. Finally | the first method of making a CL V original disk with the exact same signal slot pattern, using the current CL V master recorder 楗 device 5 2 9, one of its rotation systems generates a pulse of rotation signal, but because It is very difficult to provide a mechanism that can detect and control the rotation angle with high accuracy. However, by capturing the copied rotation angle information and recorded signal of CD, and synchronizing the rotation pulses during copying, it is possible to make a signal slot pattern that is not completely correct, but has some parts with similar position accuracy. But > In this case, the speed must be the same as the linear speed of the CD being copied. 2 7-This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 grid (210 X 297 mm) 462039 A7 B7 4 The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central S " H? Staff consumption and capital cooperation, 55. V. Description of the invention () 1 1 1 I Only established when the record is made. 0 The master recording device of the present invention 5 2 9 Such as 1 1 1 As shown in the figure, the CLV modulation signal 5K generation unit 1 0 a CLVII occurs, please send the 1 I modulation signal to the linear velocity modulation unit 2 6 a > 1 in a certain field and then send it to the optical record Time of loop 3 7 Uranium modulation part 3 7 a »Reading back [I 调 夕 1 ίτ CLV system 0 with linear velocity modulation part 2 6 a Hour t as shown in the second figure (^ Note 1 Note I a) Modulate the linear speed arbitrarily in the m range of the CD specification. 1 2 Matters I i Within 1 m / S '1 4 m / S 0 In this case, the online speed is-set and fill the script when the signal is modulated by the time uranium modulation unit 3 7 a. The same page 1 can also be used | That is, there is no need to modify the device. 0 This linear speed modulation is difficult to detect by 1 1 when copying the CD side with high accuracy. 0 It is recorded because it is not subject to arbitrary 1 1 control, even if it is the master record of the original disc. 4 * 16 W device also eight "1. Order 1 Copy Q. The original disc is different each time. Therefore, it is almost impossible to copy the CD with the linear velocity modulation of the present invention. However, because of C 1 1 D, The linear velocity is within the specification range of 1 2 m / S 1 4 τη / S. Therefore, the usual CD-R 〇M walking machine currently available in the market can be used normally. (b) The same information like 1} kk —- The fixed line speed of 1 2 m / S is recorded on the special light track 6 1 1 5 a. The starting point of the occasion is regarded as S. The end point of the data recording end A 1 then 1 1 comes to the position 0 of 3 6 0 0. The second picture (C) is shown in-I | Rotating white 1 2 m / S to 1 4 m / S when the speed increases uniformly t 1 1 I The physical position of address A 3 5 3 9 a comes to deviation 3 0 〇 physical position 1 1 set to 5 3 9 b 〇m in the case of 1/2 rotation speed increase) then came to the physical position of partial II difference 4 5 〇 5 3 9 C 0 that is 1 its-week 13 to take It can be changed 1 I 28-1 1 This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 29? Mm) 462039 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of invention () I 1 \ The position of 1 4 5 0 is 0. Usually the master recorder device used for CLV. Its — 1 1 1 cycle occurs — the return pulse t. Therefore, if two rotations are accumulated, the error Will accumulate 1 I, please 1 1 and cause a position deviation of 900. In the future, even if the illegal copying operator can make M 1 j read 1 line of rotation control by the linear velocity modulation of the present invention t on the regular original disk and back 1 I System 1 Illegal duplicates between the original discs will still have a position difference of 0. 0, and by checking the | I know this position difference, you can detect the illegally duplicated original discs 0 and known position matters 1 ί 1 more deviation detection The decomposition energy can be 9 0 C Μ and 0. Therefore, if the linear velocity is to be filled in the range of 2 1 4 ΙΠ S, set at least Z 1 as shown in the second figure (a page 1 I) (b). The four, 11, 9, 0, 4 divided areas of Z2, Z2, Z3, and Z4 can detect illegal CDs. It is effective to cut. Of course, if a new master recorder device for CLV with a high accuracy is ordered, it is impossible for copying companies to make 1 1 the same letter D. The slot pattern is 0. But such a device is only in the world. There are 1 1 several companies that may develop and it is not a function necessary for ordinary use. 1 I is for copyright protection. By limiting this master disk to record the shipment of jflfc m devices * 1 can prevent illegal copying. On the master recorder device with 1 | rotation angle sensor 1 7 a shown in the first figure, the information of 1 1 address information 3 2 a and the rotation angle of the motor 7 i 1 position = ^ z Beixun 3 2 b Create a physical position table 5 3 2 and edit it with 喑 number 1 I encoder 5 3 7 plus Μ secret code and record it by optical recording circuit 3 7 1 1 j in On the outer periphery of the original disk 2 Track 5 of the five-picture disc I 1 Track 6 5 The physical configuration table that was darkened was recorded when the original disc was created 1 1 3 3 2 0 Therefore, this disc is even a normal CD without a magnetic head-R 〇1 I -2 9-1 i 1 This paper size is applicable in the National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2! 0X297 mm) 462039 A7 B7 Printed by the staff of the Central Bureau of Standards and Commerce of the Ministry of Economy and Trade. 5. Production Description () 1 1 1 1 Μ Can also be regenerated on the drive. ○ t In this case, t must be set in the II actuator as shown in the fifth figure and J 1 1 sixth figure. 1 I Please 1 I sense π »The wishing device 3 3 5 〇 This detection means t As long as you can detect the address 3 2 3 first M 1 | read the relative position of 1 and the product domain of 9 〇 i, so it is not necessary to use the angle sensing back 1 ιέ [organ-like complex sensor 0 as shown in the fourth figure The relative position detecting method, < 1 | 1-For example, the rotation pulse of the 1 motor shown in the fourth garden (a) and the light sensor matters. The index signal of the JI re 1 is on the disc. As shown in the fourth figure of this figure (b), by dividing the time r if it is-eight equal divisions of the page, the time slot of the 1 1 t signal position (tme S 1 〇t) 2 1 ZZ 6 is 1 1 is Decision 0 On the one hand, the address code of the 5K sub-code (SU b C ode) I 1 f can obtain the address signal 3 2 3 a 3 2 3 b 0 as described above. 1 IT can detect the address A from the signal position signal. 1 In area Z 1 Address A 2 In area 1 Z 3 〇 In this case, the revolving letter 13 is recorded in the subcode. Although the structure is simple, this data can be copied exactly as it is. 1 1 No prevention The effect of reproduction σ is therefore as in the present invention Except for the optical recording section »The method of detecting the rotation angle is provided by the 1-line repetition method, which has a high effect of preventing copying. 1 I 〇 Return to the first picture in the recording and reproduction device 1> λ Light reproduction back 1 1 Path 3 8 The regeneration letter α accounts if there is a physical configuration table in the light track 5 3 2 1 i will proceed from step 4 7 1 b of the flowchart in the seventh figure to step 4 7 1 1 I d Λ 4 7 1 e 0 Step 4 7 1 b If it is N 0, then step 4 7 1 l 1 C will check whether there is any secret data in magnetic recording section 6 7 If it is N 0 j 1 1 then proceed to step 4 7 1 r Permit its start 0 If it is Y Ε SI, go to 1 I and go to step 4 7 1 d 4 7 1 e Regenerate the password information 1 and start recording II-3 0-1 1 This paper is in quick use ® National Sample (CNS) A4 Specification ( 210X297 mm) Central Government Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Industrial Cooperatives, Cooperatives, Co-operatives, India, `` 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () recorded in the drive The R OM or the secret code decoder 5 34 of the magnetic disk is used to resolve the program | and to decrypt the secret code. At step 4 7 1 f 1 a physical configuration table 532 is created, that is, the area address correspondence table of An: Zn. In step 47 1 w, it will check whether there is a disc check program in the medium. If it is N 〇, go to step 4 7 1 p, if it is YES, then start recording on the disc in step 4 7 ^ 1 g. Disc inspection program inside. In the disc inspection program of step 47 1 f, first, make n = 0 in step 47 1 h, and-. Guang--make n = n + l in step 47 1 i, and pierce the drive in step 47 1j, Find the address An * of Disc 2 and reproduce it. 1k at step 47 < The position information Z 'η is detected by the aforementioned address position detection means 3 3 5 and output. In step 471m, check that Z 'n = Zn. If NO, determine in step 47 1 u that it is an illegally copied CD, and send the message of “illegally copied CD” to the display section 16. In step 47 1 s, Its STOP. In step 47, if lm is YE S, 茌 step 4 7 1 η check η = last • if it is N 0, go back to step 4 7 1 i, if YE S < Proceed to step 47 1 p. In step 47 1 p, it will check if there is a disc check program in the ROM or RAM on the drive side. If it is N ◦ > start the software in step 471 r. If YES, start the disc check program in step 47 1 Q. This is exactly the same as step 4 7 1 t. If it is N, go to steps 47 1 u and 47 1 s. If it is YE S, then the software in the disc is regenerated at step 47 1 r. In the currently produced CD audio, the original signal can be reproduced without any problems when reproducing discs with a change in linear speed between 1 · 2 and 1-4 m / s. I-3 1 ~ This paper standard is free to use Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 丨 0X297mm) -------- i ------ iT --- 1 --- r ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Vehicles of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ΗConsumer Cooperatives V. Description of the invention () 1 1 1 The master recorder device can be installed at 0 0 0 1 m / S is quite tight. 1 1 1 Etches signal grooves with linear velocity accuracy. 0 As the master disc recorder device. 1 j Please 1 I specifications are provided with line speed soil 0 〇 1 m / S CD specifications. 〇 is the first M 1 1 follow the 1 to comply with this CD specifications as shown in the eleventh figure (a) (b) i can make the line speed in the j frame of the surface 1 for example from 1 2 0 1 s / s Up to 1 2 2 m / 乂 Note ί 1 SC 1 SC in this case as shown in Figure +-(C) (d) Rotate the disc > Item 1 Ι ReI The physical configuration of the angle of the address only deviates by 5 9 degrees, that is, 5 3 9 Fill in this installation a to 5 3 9 b 0 As shown in the twelfth figure > If you set I j on the side of the recording and reproduction device, you can detect this 5 The rotation angle sensor with an angle deviation of 9 degrees 3 3 1 5 can distinguish the physical configuration of the 0 CD case. It can be resolved by 6 0 1 1, that is, it can be divided by 1/6 〇. Turn the angle to order 1 1 degree sensor 3 3 5 can be 0 The structure of this type of rotation angle sensor 3 5 5 is disclosed in the block diagram of the recording-reproducing device in the tenth-picture! I in the 0 FG of the motor 1 7 etc. The pulse of f 1 output by the rotation angle sensor 1 7 a is detected by the angular position of the disc physical configuration detection unit 5 5 6 1 Ί 郜 5 5 3 The time division circuit 5 5 3 a 1 I make it one turn to get one In the case of a rotary pulse signal, if a time accuracy of 1 I ± 5% can be obtained, it can be divided into 20 equal parts, so 1 1 1 8 0 can be obtained with an angular resolution of about 0. There are 11 actions. Refer to the fourth figure (a) 1 I b) (C) Explained. If the CD has an eccentricity of 2 0 0 U m 1 1 Ι, an angle-to-quantity error due to the eccentricity will occur. If it is an I i CD specification disc » Because of the eccentricity, the maximum angular measurement error of 0 8 1 1 will be 0. Therefore, if it is necessary to decompose the angular measurement of 1 〇 1 I-3 2-1 t 1 This paper standard is common Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 Specifications (210 × 297 cm) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative Standards Department of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China. 5. Description of the invention () 1 1 i Energy field U3 t will be measured by M method C to avoid this situation} If you need high precision! The angle resolution of 1 1 can be shown in the corner of the sixteenth figure. Degree position detection unit 5 5 ii Please ί I 3 Set the eccentricity detection unit 5 5 3 C > Η Pick up the eccentricity amount »and perform correction by the first M 1 I reading 1 heart M correction unit 5 5 3 b The calculation of i Μ corrects the shadow of the back surface 1-1 caused by the eccentricity. W 0 The calculation method of the detection and correction value of this eccentricity is explained below. Note 1 means I, as shown in Figure 19 (a). When there is no eccentricity, the same language of the disc 1} Then l — AB Λ C on the radius The two points are θ a = Θ b = Θ C 1 The center of the filled corner is the real disc center 5 5 7 0 In fact > As shown on page 10, 'w1 · 1 I Nine Figure (b), due to the eccentricity of the disc or the deviation when the disc is installed, 1 1 will be eccentric 5 5 9 0 (b) as shown With angle sensing 1 1 device 3 5 3 to detect the three points of the address A, BC phase 丨 to the angle disc 1 of the order L 5 5 8 and the true disc center 5 5 7 deviation L) a 1 1 1 As shown in the circle, it can be obtained by performing a 1 1 calculation of LI a two f (Θ a Θ b Θ C). 0 In the eccentricity correction part 5 5 3 b Use the deviation obtained by this calculation! I Cardiac correction calculation Otto 5K of the rotation angle sensor 1 7 a Borrow 1 i This can correct the eccentric shadow m, so you can get the effect of the angle resolution can be improved to 1 ί 1 0 or less, which can detect illegal discs Knowing the accuracy is higher 1 1 ° When the above-mentioned low resolution detection angle position of about 60% is 1 in the determination result of regular I 1 and illegal discs, it must be reasonably rigorous 0 1 I A regular disc is judged as a criminal who will give ΛΛ to the user. The loss is 1 1 1 The absolute avoidance of 0 is t. As shown in the flow chart of the fourteenth figure. F Step 5 5 1 t 5 5 1 U 5 5 1 V Iti Μί The address of 1 1 judged to be illegal 1> Track 2 times Μ The η of multiple times and regeneration is checked by this 1 1-3 3-1 1 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 462039 A7 B7 Cooperative cooperative policy V. Description of the invention () 1 1 1 1 > λ Avoid error judgment 0 The basic flow chart is the same as in the seventh circle, so 1 I 1 is used. Μ Only the additional step m 0 will be described below. In step 5 5 1 Γ is judged to be non- 1 1 Please 1 t when it is within the allowable value 1 In step 5 5 1 t Make the address A η multiple times before chasing 1 1 Trace in step 5 5 1 U Pick and reveal A Phase number of π phase m angle read back 1 I plane I ZZ t Π Make the same complex number in step 5 5 1 V Check to see if it is ^ j 1 | Meaning I is within the allowable value. If it is YES, it is regarded as a regular disc Η J and proceed to step 1 1} 5 5 1 S 0 If it is Ν 0, it is regarded as an illegal disc. Step 4 7 1 U Fill in this package 4 7 1 S and do not allow the program to operate. 0 It is also used to prevent misjudgment. Page 1 I is broken. — The method can be used to increase the accuracy of the decision by additional statistical processing. 1 I 0 The original master disk shown in Figure 12 (a) shows its angle—address> 1 1 angle—tracking direction s address—tracking direction Λ angle—signal slot depth, i 1 address—signal slot depth, etc. The frequency distribution is as shown in Table 1. 0 Here t 1 I Select specific data as shown in Table 2 and select the data of the sample address that is easy to resolve 1 1 when the drive is regenerated. Figure (b) shows t! 1 and reproduces the formed disc and finds the allowable value shown in the black part of Table 3. The letter P of the difference is shown in Table 4 and the deviation of @ allowable value is shown in Table 4. The different house value 1 f is divided from m in the table by 0. Although the angle-frequency distribution of the address allocation 1 1 is shown in the figure, the distribution of the depth of the slot occupied by the letter C7 and the location-tracking quantity j can also be obtained 1 1 The same effect 〇 This makes it difficult to distinguish, that is, it is easy to be judged as 1 I J is excluded from the copy prevention signal section S list, so when the drive is reproduced 1 1 1 can reduce the chance of error judgment during reproduction 0 By tracing the address that was judged to be illegal on M twice before the previous 1 1 mentioned »can reduce the chance of false judgment f 1 will be 0 — aspect 1 if it is illegal to copy the original m, such as the twelfth circle (C ) So 1 I-3 4-1! 1 paper size China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 OX 297 mm) 462039 A7 B7 Consumption cooperation by employees of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Du V. Description of the invention () 1 1 The original disk 1 is located here, so first 1 1 1 as shown in Table 5 > CP 1 will occur in the range of --- probability probability 1 t Please 1 1 (copy protection) The letter α occupies 0 at this time * as As mentioned above, because the physical configuration table of the disc is VI 1 | Tampering 1 cannot be changed, so M method implements the selection of the material as shown in Table 2 as 0. Therefore, the back surface 1 J is illegal. The physical configuration area of the original disk will exist There is a note f1 that is very close to the limit of allowable value. Note 1 = C pp signal that is owed or exceeded the allowable value. 0 As shown in the twelfth figure (d), 1 I then 1 y 1 To On the disc made by forming and stamping, the error i caused by the forming deviation will be added to the writing set, and will become the distribution i as shown in Table 6. Page 1 1 will become the physical value exceeding the allowable value as shown in the blackened part. Allocation signal 5 5 2 1 ib 〇The physical allocation signal 5 5 2 bt unique to this kind of illegal disc Η Because [1 will be detected by the disc inspection program, the program operation will stop and can be ordered 1! Prevent copying the disc The use of the film is so angled-the distribution of the CP (C 0 PYPR 0 TEC) signal at the address will be divided into 1 1 by small punches by forming stamping 0 relative to the signal shown in the seventeenth figure (b) In the case of the depth of the groove 1 1, the depth will change greatly due to the etching and forming conditions!. ¾ Its precision control system is very difficult, and it is impossible to duplicate the disc during production. The production volume 1 will be greatly reduced 0 Therefore, in the case of the signal slot m degree, a strong 1 1 copy-prevention function can be assigned. Here is explained a reproduction device that can detect and prevent the physical distribution of the frequency distribution of the 1 1-stop disc. And flow chart I 1 C · Recording and reproducing device 1 has a disc l 1 piece physical arrangement detection section 5 5 6 as shown in Λ- · ν, twelfth figure, and tenth figure. The detection section has an angle. Position detection 1 1 knowledge unit 5 5 3 tracking position detection unit 5 5 4 and signal groove depth detection unit 1 1 5 5 5 The three detection units can detect angular position information Z η \ Follow! I -3 5 1 1 1 This paper size is applicable to China Standards (CNS) A4 (2i0X 297 mm) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is responsible for consumer cooperation. Explanation () 1 1 1 The trace requires bits T r η and signal slot depth D t η f to output a detection signal. Confirm that the signal A η of the address detection unit 5 5 7 is time-dependent—to 1 1 1 Please 1 I can obtain A, η — Z 1 η A t η-T > η, A, η — D, first VI! R and read 1 η Z η and then η \ 2, η — D η, τ η — D Π are backing up the corresponding data of 1 AI. We are using the code decoder 5 3 4 to add K complex, winter 1 | The physical configuration table of the regular reference disc made by Italian j yuan 5 3 2 A η, Z η Matters 1 i and 1 f, T η Λ D η and I in the comparison section 5 3 5 By comparison, if found as If you do not fill the disc, you can use the output / action stop means 5 3 6 t Sw- " 1 I to stop the operation of the program of the disc. ○ Secondly, explain the use of the system! I method to reduce the disc judgment error situation Flowchart 0 Fourteen The same parts as in Figure 11 and Figure 7 are omitted and focus on the physical configuration of the disc. The first order i I Figure 12 shows the distribution frequency shown in Table 6 and only restricts the judgment of the disc. Fh Part 0 First in the disc inspection program 4 7 1 t 1 1 > Set check points everywhere in the disc inspection program and application > λ check 1 1 Check step 5 5 1 W C P ( C 0 Ρ Y Ρ R 〇TEC Τ) Anonymous 1 i cancellation program, that is, base 1 in the cipher decoder 5 3 4 in the tenth figure | quasi-physical configuration table 5 3 2 DO 単 direction 1 The first included in the function calculation unit 5 3 4 C — whether the code decoder 5 3 4 1 1 a is more illegal if it is accused), that is, whether it has been tampered with and turned into illegal by 1 j The password decoder Yu K illegally lifts its password by 1 1 each time | check j if you notice it When it is Ε S, 1 will stop its action. By this, 1 can prevent 1 t from being illegally copied. »UL dull will replace the first-dark X) taxi A7J m encoder 5 3 4 a with the illegal encoder 1 1 decoder 1 Therefore, it can improve the security of passwords and strengthen it to prevent others. 1 I-3 6-! 1 This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 × 297 mm) 4 6203 9 A7 BPrinted by the Bureau of Standards and Consumer Cooperatives B7 V. Invention Description () Effect of reproduction. Next, step 55 1 f will be described. In this step, for angular position | < and determine the distribution state of the deviation amount at the reference angle of the reference physical configuration of the area number 5 3 2. If it is defined that m = ◦ is an unbiased state * and m = ± n & n regions have deviations * at step 55 1 s, m =-1, at step 551h, m = m + l, at step 551i, Check whether there are m deviations in the measured angle region Z ′ η. If it is NO, go back to step 5 5 1 h. If it is 则 ^ Ε deg, go to step 5 5 1 < ΐ is added to the deviation distribution table of Z and η, and a distribution table of deviation amounts is gradually created. At step 5 5 1 k, if it is the last step, proceed to the next step 47 1 η, and if it is N 0, return to step 5 5 1 h. In this way, as shown in Figure +6, the distribution state of the deviation between the reference positions such as the angular position, tracking displacement, signal slot depth, and angle / address position of the special address will be measured successively. Step 551m in the disc inspection program 47 1 t * is based on the legitimacy discriminating program. • In step 5 5 1? 1> will be secretized and recorded in the magnetic layer or optical recording layer, such as the angle of the address η. The maximum allowable value Pn (m) of the deviation amount m generated from the deviation of the reference value of Z 'η is configured, and the password is restored and extracted> and the physical position deviation distribution measurement program made in step 55 1 f described above is made The deviation distribution table 5 5 6 a shown in the eighteenth figure and the physical configuration table 532 a of the benchmark are used to judge the authenticity of the disc. First, in step 5 = 0, in step 551q, and in step 5 5 1!, Check whether it is within the allowable range. Check that the number of η is smaller than P n (m) in the eighteenth figure to check that it is -3 7-(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) I-I nl ^ pi I --I-—I il ^^ i--I-1 --- n T,----1 ^ 1 ^ 1 fg L.-I .¾. I The Chinese paper standard (CNS) ) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 4 6203 9 B7 A7 Seal of the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention () 1 i 1 Is not within the allowable value range 0 If N 〇, the above steps are performed 5 5 1 1 i 1 f If the address is not tracked again, it will be judged as t. If it is 0 KI i Read 1 I, go to step 5 5 1 S 〇 If it is YES, go to Μ 1 I 5 I Step 5 5 1 S 0 m If it is the last step, proceed to step 4 7 1 P is the back 1 & 1 of 1 N 〇 return to step 5 5 1 Q 〇 so by measuring the relative of Z η ^ Note | The discrepancy between I and Z η will be a regular disc if it is within the allowable value. Item 1 I then 1 if the value is outside the allowable value > λ, it will be a general record of the judgment of an illegal disc. The probability that the regular disc is misjudged as an illegal disc and the opposite probability X 1 I can be reduced. 0 In the flowchart of the fourteenth figure, in step 5 5 1 I 1 a, as shown in the tenth figure The random number generator 5 8 3 shown is random 1 I extractor 5 8 2 to the password decoder 5 3 4 or magnetic regeneration circuit 3 1 Order 0 Send a partial selection signal to select the full track recorded with the password— ^ 1 [Part of the magnetic or light trajectory is tracked and reproduced by 0. Therefore, only 1 1 is required to track the dark σ accounting for m of all data — some such as 1 in 10,000 1 0 0 0 1 1 For each IP, its Hr »m mechanical tracking time will be shortened and has a shortened effect [{Copying the effect of the inspection time Q and random extractor 5 8 2 is a solution to the secret code 1 I encoder 5 3 4 Send a selection signal to be implemented The part of the reproduced secret code I i. The secret code of the data is removed. For example, if the password of the unidirectional function I i is 5 1 2 bt, the password is removed from the M 3 2-bit computer as an example. 1 I Require A fraction of a second C, but by using this part of the selection method, the effect of I 1 I to shorten the solution time of the password m can be obtained. 0 occurs by random numbers 1 1 device 5 8 4 so you only need to check si to get low The required sample volume is only I 1 at a time. Different sample information must be checked. For example, in the sample point of 1 000 0 points 1 1-38-1 1 This paper size is applicable to China® Home Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X297 (Mm) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Co-printed by Du Xiaoxian, printed by Du. V. Description of the invention () 1 1 \ 1 Only 1 sample point of each time is checked. 5 It will also be checked at the end. 1 I 1 All 1 0 0 0 0 sample points 0 Therefore, those who copy λΟΑm must copy all physical configurations of 1 〇1 I, 1 f 0 〇〇 sample points into the same shape as the reference disc M 1 1 read 1 0 because of the copy of all sample points Angle trace signal back 1 * The depth of I slot 1 is very difficult * Its effect of preventing copying is very high 0 By adding this, note | Note I m machine extractor 5 8 2 can achieve copying without losing height The effect can be this 1 I then 1 1 Macro effect that greatly shortens the disc inspection time 0 琨 Return to the thirteenth figure and fill out this tenth-figure The description of the recording and re-device diagram is shown on page 0. Figure 1 of the recording page 1] The disc physical configuration detection section of the reproduction device 1 is provided with a tracking amount in addition to the above-mentioned angular position 1 1 detection section 5 5 3 Detection section 5 5 4 and signal groove depth 1 i Degree detection section 5 5 5 Two detection sections 0 First tracking amount detection section 5 5 1 Order 1 1 4 Tracking control section for receiving optical head 6 2 4 Measurable Yan Dong (W 0 bb 1 η g), etc. Tracking error detection loop-like tracking Although the response is from the address 1 sent by the reactor 1 i 2 4 a D η measurement Tracking time and other detection signals such as A * η Z f η, D t η, etc. 1 k time _- consistency, and τ r η is generated and output to the control section 5 3 5 0! I The twentieth chart (a) (b) illustrates this principle. 0 The second + chart (a) of [1 The physical position of the address A 1 on a regular disc 5 3 9 was created when the original disc was created! T was added m The modulation of the tracking direction of the movement and so on. Therefore, its 1 I tracking action in the peripheral direction will be offset by C. If this is defined as Τ 1 = 1 i at the physical position of the address A 2 1 1 1 5 3 9 b Τ 2 — 1 0 This information can be discriminated when the original disc is made, or after the original disc is made, and made into a reference physical configuration table 5 3 1 1 2 t It is darkened 0 ^. And recorded in the media 2 0 Second in the second Ten maps (1 1-3 9-1 1 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 () 1 ί 1 b) The illegal copying medium 2 shown in Figure 2 usually does not add a tracking shift of 0 1! 1 and makes its additional tracking shift i as shown in the angle region Z 1 in the figure. Please 1 I The tracking displacements T t 1 and D 2 of the addresses A 1 and A 2 become, for example, the first M 1 1 Read 1 〇1 + 1 The measured physical configuration table of the disc 5 5 6 and the standard physical configuration table 5 of the back of the regular disc 1 5 1 will be different. Therefore, the tenth / \ 1 t- i Figure disc inspection section 5 3 3 Section 5 5 5 Check it out and use the item f I and then 1 l Output / action stop means 5 3 6 Stop the output of the program, fill in the operation of the program « % This or the second dark Wu decoder 5 3 4 b Application code unlinking page 1 I Output // the message of illegally copying the disc // to the display 1 6 0 Sixteenth Figure 1 1 The film inspection program itself is secretly changed by the decoder 5 3 4 I 1 b by the second dark σ. Therefore, it is difficult to change the disc inspection program 5 3 3 and I can improve the effect of preventing copying. 0 Explanation letter "Slot Depth Detection Section 〇 As shown in Figure 1 | Figure 16 the light reproduction signal from optical head 6 will be sent to the signal 1 1 Slot detection section 5 5 5 envelope (e η V e 1 〇 Ρ e) and other amplitude II modulation degree of wheat or multi-level level limiter and other amplitude quantity detection unit 5 5 1 5 a can detect the depth of the signal slot in the amplitude culture and output the detection D 1 I > π sent to the comparison section 5 3 5 and compare it with the reference physical configuration table 5 3 2 1 I material comparison 〇 If the comparison is found, it enters the copy prevention action 1 1 This is as shown in the twenty-first figure ( a) (b) (C) (d) 1 I Address A η Angle Z η, Tracking displacement T η, Signal groove depth D η 1 1 f Four parameters can be checked for each sample point The physical positions of 5 3 9 a and [1 5 3 9 b 5 3 9 C are checked separately, so all of them must be copied when copying! 1 Four parameters on the sample point All the pieces are _. The original can only be obtained. 〇 kk High 1 I 1 4 0-1 1 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 size (2Ι0 × 297 mm). 4 6203 9 Factory A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () It is very difficult to copy the original disk that meets the above requirements at the same rate. Therefore, a strong copy prevention effect can be achieved. It is very difficult to reduce the same rate after changing the amplitude | It is difficult to reproduce the signal channel group that converges signal channels of different depths, and it is not economical. In the case of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 36, in step 584a, for example, in 1 signal group and 0 signal group on the same original disk, different output conditions such as recording output, pulse amplitude, and other I 0 0 0 groups are recorded. When recording, in step 5 84b K-set the same rate, for example, the same rate of 1/20 3, to create five combinations of conditional signal slot groups. In step 5 6 4 c 1 find out the physical configuration of the qualified signal group, etc. | Use the laser light to find it from the original disk through the screen display. At step 5 84 d, create the physical configuration table of the qualified signal slot group. At step 5 8 4 e, the physical configuration table is darkened. At step 5 84 f * If it is an optical recording section, then at step 5 8 4 s records this secret code in the second photosensitive part 572a of the original disc. In step 584h, plastic is injected into the original disk to form a disc. In step 584i, a reflective film is formed. In step 584, the step is completed if there is no magnetic layer. Step 5: Record the password in the magnetic recording section at 84m to complete the production of the optical disc. After the original disk is created, the depth of the signal groove is measured and coded, and the configuration table is recorded. The same rate when the original disk is created can be increased to nearly 100%. Here, the detection method of the signal groove depth in the signal groove depth detection unit 555 will be described. The signal grooves 56 la ~ f of the illegally copied disc of the tenth ir figure (a) are at the same depth. And in the signal slot of the regular disc in Figure 17 (b) * the signal is noisy 560c, d, e-4 (please read the intent on the back before filling this page)

. I, · n I 1 -I --- I I -^, if - -- I - --1¾ I i V J1- I. I I — -Sr -I —i - - - - -I— _1 I HI I I 1- ....... in . . l, 、T 本紙張尺度逋用中國國家標车(CMS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 經濟部中央樣隼局肩工消资合作社印製 '4 6203 9 A7 B7五、發明説明() 之深度較淺。因此,如第十t:圖(c)所示,再生脈衝5 62c 、d 、e之極埴變低,在多位準眼傾器555b之 基準限幅位準SO *如第十t圖(f)雖可輸出> 但在檢 知甩限幅位準S 1 ,則如第十七圖(d )所示無有輸出。 因此,藉由採取S 1之相反值和S 0之邏辑乘積,如第十 七圖(s )所示,僅在正規碟片之場合,可得到複製防止 信號563c 、563d 、563e。在不法碟片上,因 檢知用限幅位準g1之輸出連缜而成為1 ,故不被輸出複 製防止信號。因此,可檢知複製碟片。又,此情形下1如 第十t圖(e)所示|光輸出波形之包絡線之振幅之減低 或調製率之減低 > 係可由振幅量檢知部5 5 5檢知•即使 獲得S 1之相反符號亦可得到同漾之效果。從第二十三圖 之防止複製效果之比較表即可清楚了解,通常之CD或Μ D之原盤作成装置 > 因不具有角度控制餞能,其角度方向 之碟片檢查 > 亦極A,係為有效。一方面,雷射碟片(L D)用、MD用或CD用之ROM用之原盤作成裝置,因 不具有顫動•即循跡方向之控制手段,故循跡方向之位移 ,亦即B ,係為有效。一方面*深度方向,亦即C ,若被 添加於習知之回路時,則輸人回路中須要有振幅或調製度 之檢知回路· έέ Μ現有之C D用I C係無法檢知。因此, 在目前,藉由A + Β ·不但其防止複製效果甚高,且其與 既有之I C具有互換性,故對CD、MD而言,其為最具 效果之組合。在現狀之原盤作成装置中· A + B ,即角度 -4 2- (請先背&之注意事項再填寫本莧) ^m. ϋ I— I — - - 二— - il 二·1_ ----坤衣 本纸張尺度通用乍S國家榇率(CNS ) A4规格(210X29?公釐) 462039 A7 績濟部中夬標牟局負二消f合作ώ印龙 B7五、發明説明() 方向和循跡方向之兩個參數之組合之檢查方式係為最有效 者。 此一對角度方向和循跡方向和信號槽深度施加調 製之碟片之原盤装置像如第二十四圖所示=第二十四圖之 主盤記錄機装置5 2 9 ,其在基本上與已說明之第一圖之 主盤記錄機装置具有近乎相同之構成及動作,故省珞其説、 明,而僅敉述其相異處。苜先,說明有關循跡調製方式。 系統控钊部中•係具有循跡調製信號發生部564 ,對循 跡控制部2 4輸送Ίΐ製信號,並根據基準軌跡間距2 4 a ,實行一定半徑r 0之循跡。在循跡半徑r 0 = d r之範 圍内,陁K顗動之調製處理\因此|在原盤572上,將 作成如第二十圖(a) (b)所示之拕行之軌跡。此循跡 位移量,將被送到位置資訊輸人郜3 2 b之循跡位移資訊 部32g。在防止拷貝信號發生部565中•將作成第十 三圖所示之表列有位址An、角度Ζ η 、循跡位移量Τ η 、和信號槽深度Dn之基準物理配置表5 3 2 *並以暗號 编碼器5 3 7將之暗號化成暗號。此暗號係被記錄於第三 十二圖、第三十三圖所示之設於原盤外周部之第二原盤5 7 2a ,或第三十四圖、第三十五圖中之設於外周部之第 二領域之原盤上。又•信號槽深度方向之調製D η亦可獨 立附加。第二十四圖之系统控制部1 ◦中具有光輸出調製 信號發生部566 ,藉由將光記錄部3 7 b之輪出調製部 5 6 7之雷射輸出之振幅要'化成如第三十圖(b )所示, 或如第三十圖(a )所示|在一定之振幅中,將脈衝幅度 -4 3 - (請先聞讀背面之洼意事項再填寫本頁)I, · n I 1 -I --- II-^, if--I---1¾ I i V J1- I. II — -Sr -I —i-----I— _1 I HI II 1- ....... in.. L,, T This paper size is printed on the Chinese National Standard Vehicle (CMS) A4 (210X 297 mm). '4 6203 9 A7 B7 5. The description of the invention () is shallow. Therefore, as shown in the tenth t: diagram (c), the poles of the regeneration pulses 5 62c, d, and e become lower, and the reference limit level SO at the multi-level quasi-eye tilter 555b is as shown in the tenth t diagram (f ) Although it is possible to output >, at the detection limit level S 1, there is no output as shown in the seventeenth figure (d). Therefore, by taking the logical product of the opposite value of S 1 and S 0, as shown in the seventeenth figure (s), the copy prevention signals 563c, 563d, and 563e can be obtained only in the case of a regular disc. On an illegal disc, the output of the detection limit level g1 is set to 1 and therefore the copy prevention signal is not output. Therefore, the copied disc can be detected. In this case, as shown in the tenth figure (e), the amplitude of the envelope of the light output waveform or the reduction of the modulation rate is detected by the amplitude detection unit 5 5 5. Even if S is obtained, The opposite sign of 1 can also get the same effect. It can be clearly understood from the comparison table of the copy-prevention effect of the twenty-third figure that the original CD or MD original disk making device > has no angular control function, and its disc inspection in the angular direction > is also extremely A Is valid. On the one hand, the original disks used for laser discs (LD), MD, or CD ROMs are made of devices. Because they do not have the control method of chattering, that is, the tracking direction, the displacement in the tracking direction, that is, B, is Is effective. On the one hand, the depth direction, that is, C, if it is added to the conventional circuit, there must be an amplitude or modulation detection circuit in the input circuit. The existing C D I C system cannot detect it. Therefore, at present, A + B · is not only highly effective in preventing copying, but also has interchangeability with the existing IC. Therefore, it is the most effective combination for CD and MD. In the original device for making the original disk · A + B, namely angle-4 2- (please fill in this note before back & note) ^ m. --- Kun clothing paper size General ZS National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X29? Mm) 462039 A7 The Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the second-fifth cooperation, and the Yinlong B7. The combination of the two parameters of direction and tracking direction is the most effective one. The original disk device of the pair of discs whose modulation is applied in the angular direction and the tracking direction and the depth of the signal groove is shown in FIG. 24 = master disk recorder device 5 2 9 in FIG. 24, which is basically It has almost the same structure and operation as the master recorder device of the first picture already explained, so its explanation and explanation are omitted, and only the differences are described. First, explain the tracking modulation method. The system control unit includes a tracking modulation signal generating unit 564, which sends a control signal to the tracking control unit 24, and performs a tracking with a certain radius r 0 according to the reference track interval 24a. Within the range of the tracking radius r 0 = d r, the modulation process of 陁 K is automatically adjusted. Therefore, on the original disk 572, the trajectory shown in the twentieth figure (a) (b) will be created. This tracking displacement will be sent to the location information input unit 32g of the tracking displacement information unit 32b. In the copy signal generation preventing section 565, a table shown in the thirteenth figure is created with the reference physical arrangement table of the address An, the angle Z η, the tracking displacement τ η, and the signal slot depth Dn 5 3 2 * The password is converted into a password with a password encoder 5 3 7. This code is recorded on the second original disc 5 7 2a on the outer periphery of the original disc shown in Figures 32 and 33, or on the outer periphery shown in Figures 34 and 35. On the original disc of the second field of the Ministry. Also, the modulation D η in the depth direction of the signal slot can be added independently. The system control section 1 of the twenty-fourth figure has a light output modulation signal generating section 566, and the amplitude of the laser output of the optical recording section 3 7 b and the modulation section 5 6 7 is to be reduced to the third As shown in Figure 10 (b), or as shown in Figure 30 (a) | In a certain amplitude, the pulse amplitude is -4 3-(Please read the intent on the back before filling in this page)

本紙沬尺度適用中國S家標车(CNS ) Α4現格(210X297公釐) 經濟部中央樣李局員工消費合作枉甲^ (4 6203 9 A7 _B7_五、發明説明\ ) 或脈衝間隔·藉由脈衝幅度調製部5 6 8加以調製| g卩可 使雷射輸出之實效值變化。之後,如第三十圖(:c )所示 ,於原盤572之感光部5 7 3 ,形成深度不同之感光部 5 7 4。藉由黃陁蝕刻工程,將形成如第三十圖(b )所 示之不同深度之信號槽560a〜560e,gp形成人/ 、 4之深度左右之深信號樓560a 、560 c 、56〇d *和例如僅有人/ 6之深度左右之淺信號槽5 6 0 b 、5 6 0 e。藉由對ifcT原盤5 7 2實行鍍鎳等之金屬電镀,即 可作成第三十圈(e)所示之金屬原盤5 7 5 ,藉由塑膠 成型,即作成成形碟片57S。如此*费換雷射輸出之振 幅,於原盤上肜成信號槽時 > 如第三十一圖之波形(5) 之波形圖所示 > 再生輸出之極值將減低,故以限幅器限制 特定之限幅位準時|比其信號槽深度較深之信號槽,脈衝 幅度將被狹小地檢知,而不能獲得正常之數位輸出。因此 ,對第三十一圖之波形(1)之圖所示之同步之T原信號 ,藉由脈衝韫度調整部5 6 9 ,使發生波形(2 )所圖示 之Τ+ΔΤ之寬幅脈衝時,如波形(S)所圖示者,數位 信號將被補正。若無補正,則如波形(7 )所圖示者,將 獲得幅度較原信號為窄之被限幅化之數位輸出,结果錯誤 之數位信號被输出。如此,藉由光瑜出調製部5 6 7將信 號槽深度調製•信號槽深度資訊D η則被從光輸出調製發 生部5 6 6送至信號增深度責訊部3 2 h在防止拷貝信號 發生部565中,將作成表列上逑之An 、Ζη 、Τη、 I , \ ] J 訂 -^ (請先閱讀背面之·.¾意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張又度適用t國國家輮準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0 X 297公釐) 經濟部中夬姝莩局員二消f合作狂印^ 4 6 203 9 A7 B7五、發明説明() Dn之基準物理配置表53 2 ,並以暗號編碼器5 3 7將 之暗號化|復將之磁性記錄於磁性記錄層。或者,如苐三 十四圖之工程|於作成設於原盤外周部之未感光部5 7 7 原盤後•如工程5所示 > 测量信號f曹深度等,Μ獲得物理 配置表並將之暗號化|在工程6中 > 藉由將該暗號記錄於u 第二感光部577 ,如工程7 、8 、9所示,可在一片原 盤上同時記錄程式軟體及物理配置表5 3 2 。如不對每片 碟片記錄以不同之Ί D號碼,則未必須要磁性層,以此方 式•僅以光記錄部即可具有防止拷貝之效果3第三十五圖 為原盤之上視圖及斷面圖。又,可如第三十二圖及第三十 三圖所示,貼合兩片原盤。又 > 在第二十四圖中*設有可 與外部通信之界面5 8 8 ,如第二十九圖所示,在外部之 钦體著作權者所擁有之外部暗號編碼器5 7 9中,藉由第 —暗號键3 2 d ,將物理配置表暗號化,並將該暗號自外 部暗號編碼器579 >經由第二通信界面578 a 、通信 線路、通信界面5 7 8 ,送返光碟製造公司之主盤記錄機 装置529。K此方式,著作權者之第一暗號鍵32d , 因不會被光碟製造公司所知悉,故具有提高暗號之安全性 >及即使第一暗號鍵3 2 d萬一被第三者所盜用時•光碟 製造業者亦不須擔負責任之效果。又,光信號槽深度方向 之精密加工之控制,因係包含有:感光材料之感度、伽馬 (S amma)特性、雷射光之輸出雯動或光束形狀、玻 璃基板之熱特性、蝕刻持性、成形沖壓之尺寸誤差等之眾 -45- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The standard of this paper is applicable to Chinese S standard car (CNS) Α4 (210X297 mm). The Central Government Li Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's consumer cooperation cooperation 枉 (4 6203 9 A7 _B7_V. Description of invention \) or pulse interval · borrowing Modulated by the pulse amplitude modulation section 5 6 8 | g 卩 can change the actual value of the laser output. After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (: c), photosensitive portions 5 7 3 of the original disk 572 are formed with photosensitive portions 5 7 4 having different depths. Through the Huanghuang etching project, signal grooves 560a to 560e of different depths will be formed as shown in Figure 30 (b), and gp will form deep signal buildings 560a, 560c, and 56 ° d to a depth of about 4,000. * And for example shallow signal grooves 5 6 0 b, 5 6 e with only a depth of about / 6 people. By performing metal plating such as nickel plating on the ifcT original disc 5 7 2, the metal original disc 5 7 5 shown in the 30th circle (e) can be produced, and the molded disc 57S can be formed by plastic molding. In this way, when the amplitude of the laser output is changed into a signal slot on the original disk, as shown in the waveform of the waveform (5) in Figure 31, the extreme value of the reproduction output will be reduced, so the amplitude is limited. The device restricts the specific limit level on time. For signal slots deeper than its signal slot, the pulse amplitude will be detected narrowly, and normal digital output cannot be obtained. Therefore, for the synchronized T original signal shown in the waveform (1) of the thirty-first figure, the pulse width adjustment section 5 6 9 is used to make the width of T + ΔT shown in the waveform (2) occur. For amplitude pulses, as shown by the waveform (S), the digital signal will be corrected. If there is no correction, as shown in the waveform (7), the digital output with the amplitude narrower than the original signal will be obtained, and the digital signal with the wrong result will be output. In this way, the signal slot depth modulation and signal slot depth information D η are sent from the optical output modulation generating portion 5 6 6 to the signal increasing depth responsible portion 3 2 h to prevent copying of the signal by the light-emitting modulation section 5 6 7. In the generating section 565, An, Zη, Tη, I, \] J on the list will be made.-^ (Please read the .. on the back before filling out this page) This paper is also suitable for countries of t Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 X 297 mm) Member of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Chinese Communist Party of China, second cooperation f cooperation frenzy ^ 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Dn reference physical configuration table 53 2 , And password-encoded it with a password encoder 5 3 7 | and magnetically recorded it in the magnetic recording layer. Or, as shown in the figure 34, after the unsensitized part 5 7 7 is set on the outer periphery of the original disc, as shown in the process 5 > measuring the signal f Ca depth, etc., M obtains the physical configuration table and Encryption | In Engineering 6 > By recording this password in the u second photosensitive part 577, as shown in Engineering 7, 8, 9, 9, the program software and physical configuration table 5 3 2 can be recorded on an original disk at the same time. If you do not record a different D number for each disc, you do not need a magnetic layer. In this way, only the optical recording part can have the effect of preventing copying. 3 The thirty-fifth figure is the top view of the original disc and broken. Face view. In addition, as shown in Figures 32 and 33, two original disks can be bonded. Also> In the twenty-fourth figure *, an interface 5 8 8 capable of communicating with the outside is provided. As shown in the twenty-ninth figure, in the external password encoder 5 7 9 owned by the external copyright owner With the first secret key 3 2 d, the physical configuration table is secretly coded, and the secret code is sent from the external secret code encoder 579 > via the second communication interface 578 a, the communication line, and the communication interface 5 7 8 to the disc Master recorder device 529 of manufacturing company. In this way, the copyright owner ’s first secret key 32d will not be known by the disc manufacturing company, so it will improve the security of the secret key> and even if the first secret key 3 2 d is misappropriated by a third party • Optical disc manufacturers do not need to be held responsible. In addition, the control of the precision processing of the optical signal groove depth direction includes: the sensitivity of the photosensitive material, the gamma (S amma) characteristics, the laser light output or beam shape, the thermal characteristics of the glass substrate, and the etching resistance. , Dimensional error of forming and stamping, etc. -45- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

本纸張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) Αί規格(210X297公瘦) 4 6203 9 Λ7 B7 經濟部中夬標隼局—工消跫合作.社印製 五、發明説明( ) ! 1 1 多 m 動 因 素 故 甚 困 難 〇 例 如 , 如 第 二 十 二 圖 所 示 f 欲 組 J i 1 合 及 要 更 信 號 槽 之 脈 衝 幅 度 及 深 度 時 其 每 — 脈衝幅度中 I I η 1 | 之 田 射 輸 第 出 之 振 幅 和 脈 衝 幅 度 之 m 佳 條 件 將 有 所 不 同 〇 因 Μ 讀 1 1 此 t 如 二 十 二 圖 所 示 t -4PC 到 伽 馬 持 性 t 可 作 出 η 個 雷 背 1 Ι& I 射 _ 出 Z 輸 出 值 和 脈 衝 幅 度 之 變 化 組 合 條 件 0 m 如 作 成 數、 之 | 意 1 百 個 雷 射 輸 出 之 組 合 i 而 >λ 數 百 次 不 同 條 件 作 成 原 盤 時 1 % 1 I 再 1 其 中 將 有 數 次 各 個 信 號 槽 深 度 被 Γ3Ι 取 佳 化 0 亦 即 Ρ 數 百 画 填 寫 本 裝 原 盤 中 將 有 數 個 合 格 原 盤 0 以 此 合 格 原 盤 再 生 信 號 時 S 如 頁 1 I 第 二 十 二 圖 之 波 形 ( 3 ) 之 波 形 5 8 1 a 、 5 8 1 C 所 示 1 1 * 將 形 成 到 達 基 準 電 壓 S 〇 V, 但 不 到 達 檢 知 電 壓 S 1 之 信 i 1 5K 槽 群 0 但 是 Η 一 個 軟 體 而 作 出 數 百 個 無 用 之 原 盤 者 1 訂 I | * 係 須 要 數 千 萬 之 花 費 故 不 付 經 濟 性 〇 在 此 本 發 明 中 係 使 用 Μ — 次 之 原 盤 作 成 作 出 or m 佳 信 號 槽 之 方 式 0 如 1 1 第 十 圖 所 示 設 置 數 百 組 即 Π 姐 之 5 8 〇 a d 之 信 1 1 號 槽 群 並 記 錄 以 各 個 不 同 之 雷 射 輸 出 條 件 0 然 後 從 組 線 Π 中 得 到 數 個 例 如 數 百 組 中 數 組 之 健 率 之 具 有 合 乎 1 I 巨 的 條 件 之 信 樓 深 度 及 信 號 m 形 狀 及 脈 衝 幅 度 之 信 號 槽 1 1 群 0 如 苐 十 五 圖 所 示 將 此 合 格 信 槽 群 5 8 0 C 之 物 理 1 1 配 置 表 5 3 2 暗 號 化 1 並 記 錄 於 碟 片 2 之 磁 性 記 錄 部 J 或 1 1 第 十 二 圖 第 二 十 五 Μ 所 示 之 第 二 原 盤 或 第 二 感 光 部 之 1 I 原 盤 5 7 2 之 光 記 錄 部 時 ) 即 可 製 成 利 用 信 槽 深 度 防 止 1 ! 拷 貝 之 碟 片 0 此 場 合 產 生 合 格 信 f曹 群 之 相 同 率 越 低 i 1 信 號 ft 群 之 η 組 數 g 將 增 加 t 其 防 止 拷 貝 能 力 J-i. ϋ 形 提 高 1 t - 4 6 - 1 ί 本紙伕尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210/297公釐) ½.一*邹中央埭'草局員二.'iif合咋吐印釔 *4 6203 9 A7 B7五、發明説明() 實際上,信號m群5 6 0之1組之總信號嘈數和脈衝幅度 種類若增加,組合之數目亦增加,可使相同率減低成數百 分之一。物理配置表5 3 2如前述,因係Μ葷方向函數加 以暗號化,抆除非知道暗號鍵,否則即無法篡改。因此, 除非複製業者作出每個價值1 0萬元以上之原盤數百個| ' 否則無法複製。亦即•雖得到一腫複製原盤,確須花費數 千萬|其不符合經濟要求,如此複製業者將打消複製之念 頭,而具有防止複1之效果。一方面,設置數百種類之1 0 b i t之信號槽群,8卩使將該信號槽群作成數百姐,缌 容虽僅為數十KB ·此情形對洌如容量為640MB之C D — ROM而言|其影響僅為一萬分之一,故本發明具有 近乎不減少容量之效果。在圖中,係使用CD等之ROM 碟片為例作說明,惟,利用局部ROM之記錄型光碟,將 物理配置表暗號化並記錄於R A Μ之記錄層部時,亦可得 到同樣之效果。又*碟片檢査程式5 84 |如第三十七圖 之流程圖所示,於各處,例如1 0 0 0個處所,配置應用 軟體中之程式5 8 6中之程式安装程序5 84 d 、印刷程 (請先5Ϊ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本瓦) -----〆,裝 訂^· 部局 式查一法 全 略程檢 第方 式省 杳一片 關知 程使檢 碟有檢 講 即片 個明及 解故碟數說成 非 -之複,作 除 5 下 置此之 ,8 剩 布在誌 時 5 它散 。標 等式 其分果 D f 程 由由效 I 4查藉 藉 之理 8 檢, -難物 5 片 5 此困即 序碟 8 如變亦 程除 5 。 製, 存削式止複法 保或程 停使方 、 改查 作生二 e 篡檢 動產第 4 法片 其可之 8 無碟使 - 洌 5 即之 可式施 序-部:亦程實 本紙乐尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2I0X297公釐) 經濟部中央榡准局員Μ消斧合作狂印艾 ^ 6 203 9 ; f A7 ' B7五、發明説明() 。具體上在CD - ROM等之ROM光磲之由AL等構 成之光反射層之一部上,多會持意地設置沒有反射層之領 域,以形成物理I D。第三十八圖、第三十九圖、第四十 圖所示者為第一實施洌之第二方法之原理之糸统方塊圖。 又,第四十一圖所示者為形成媒體碟片之固有物理I D之 狀態。如第十五圖(d )所示•於反射膜形成時,有意地 設置半徑方向上之1 0根不具有反射膜48之低反射部5 84、584 〜"5 84丨,和1 1涸基準低反射部58 5。當光謓頭6之先束集束於低反射部5 8 4上時,比其 反射部4 8 ,其反射光量將極端減少。因此,如第四十一 圖(e)之光再生信號圖所示,信號位準極端降低。此信 號位準之顯著降低|如第三十九圖之方塊圖所示,低反射 光量檢知部5 8 6之比較器5 8 7 ,藉由檢知比光基準值 5 8 8為低之信號位準之類比光再生信號•可險知低反射 光量部。於檢知期間,輸出第四十二圖(5)之波形之低 反射部檢知信號。而推測此信號之開始位置及终了位置之 位址及時鐘位置。又|光再生信號 > 藉由具有AGC59 0 a之波形整形回路5 9 ◦,其被實行波彩整形,而雯成 數位信號。時鐘再生部3 8 a以波形整形信號,再生時鐘 信號。復原部5 9 1之E F Μ復原器5 9 2將信號復原, ECC則訂正錯誤,而輸出數位信號。EFM復原信號, 在物理位址輸出部5 9 3中,若為C D ,從子碼之Q信號 槽,MS F之位址自位址輸出部594輸出,機架同步信 _ 4 8 - (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫太頁) --- p - ,- - 1 1 ---- i- : 1 4 l I - - -I— - - -=- —1 - -Γ 本紙张又度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(2ί0Χ 297公釐) 462039 A7The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Αί specifications (210X297 male thin) 4 6203 9 Λ7 B7 The Ministry of Economic Affairs, China Standards Bureau-Industry and Consumer Cooperation. Printed by the agency V. Invention Description ()! 1 1 m The dynamic factors are very difficult. For example, as shown in Figure 22, when f wants to group J i 1 and the pulse amplitude and depth of the signal slot are to be changed, each of the — pulse amplitudes II η 1 | The optimum conditions of the amplitude of the pulse and the amplitude of the pulse will be different. Because M reads 1 1 this t as shown in the twenty-two chart t -4PC to the gamma persistence t can make η Rayback 1 Ι & I shot_out Z Output value and pulse amplitude change combination condition 0 m If the number is created, it means | a combination of one hundred laser outputs i and> λ hundreds of times when different conditions are used to make the original disk 1% 1 I then 1 which will be several times Individual signal slot depth Γ3Ι Take optimized 0, that is, P. Hundreds of pictures, fill in the original disc. There will be several qualified original discs. 0 When the qualified original disc is used to reproduce the signal, S, as shown in page 1 I. Waveform (3) in Figure 22 5 8 1 a 1 1 shown in 5 8 1 C * will form the letter i 1 reaching the reference voltage S 0V, but not the detection voltage S 1 5K slot group 0 but one software makes hundreds of useless original disks 1 order I | * It costs tens of millions of dollars and therefore does not pay for economy. In this invention, the method of using the M-secondary original disk to make a good signal slot of 0 or m is set as hundreds of groups as shown in the tenth figure. That is, the 8th letter of the Π sister 1 slot group 1 records the different laser output conditions 0, and then obtains from the group line Π several, for example, the health of the arrays in hundreds of groups, which has a size of 1 I. Condition of signal building depth and signal m shape and pulse amplitude Signal slot 1 1 Group 0 As shown in Figure 15, this qualified slot group 5 8 0 C Physical 1 1 Allocation table 5 3 2 Code 1 and record it in the magnetic recording section J or 1 of disc 2 In the second original disk shown in the twelfth figure in the twenty-fifth M or the optical recording section of the 1 I original disk 5 7 2 of the second photosensitive part), it can be made into a disc that uses the depth of the groove to prevent 1! Occasionally, the lower the same rate of the qualified letter f Cao group, the lower the i 1 signal ft group η group number g will increase t its copy prevention ability Ji. 提高 shape increase 1 t-4 6-1 ί Common paper national standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210/297 mm) ½. One * Zou Zhongyang 埭 'Member of the Grass Bureau.'iif combined with spitting yttrium * 4 6203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () Actually, the signal m group 5 6 0 If the total signal noise and pulse amplitude types of a group increase, the number of combinations also increases, which can reduce the same rate by several hundred percent. The physical configuration table 5 3 2 is as described above. Because the direction function of the MEMS signal is encrypted, it cannot be tampered unless the secret key is known. Therefore, it cannot be copied unless the copying company makes hundreds of original discs each worth more than 100,000 yuan. That is, although it takes tens of millions to get a swollen copy of the original disk | it does not meet the economic requirements, so the copying business will eliminate the idea of copying and have the effect of preventing duplicates. On the one hand, there are hundreds of types of 10-bit signal slot groups, and the signal slot group is made into hundreds of sisters, although the capacity is only tens of KB. This situation is for a CD-ROM with a capacity of 640MB. In terms of | its impact is only one ten thousandth, so the present invention has the effect of almost not reducing capacity. In the figure, a ROM disc such as a CD is used as an example. However, the same effect can also be obtained when the physical configuration table is secretly recorded and recorded in the recording layer portion of the RAM using a recording disc of a local ROM. . Also * disc check program 5 84 | As shown in the flowchart of the thirty-seventh figure, the program in the application software 5 8 6 is installed in various places, such as 1 00 places, 5 84 d 、 Printing process (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this tile) ----- 〆, binding ^ · The partial inspection method is a complete method of inspection. The method saves a piece of knowledge to make the inspection discs available. The number of discs with a clear understanding and explanation is said to be a non-complex, which is divided by 5 and placed at 8; the remainder is distributed at the time of 5 and scattered. The standard equation and its result D f are checked by the principle of checking the borrowing and borrowing by I 4.-Difficulties 5 pieces 5 This difficulty is the sequence disc 8 If it changes, the process is divided by 5. System, restoring or reinstating the law or stopping the envoy, re-examining it as the second law, tampering with movable property, the fourth law, it ’s possible, 8 without a disc, 洌 5, which can be ordered, and the department: also Cheng Shi This paper music scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2I0X297 mm). Member of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, M Xiaoxian, cooperates with Ai ^ 6 203 9; f A7 'B7 V. Description of the invention (). Specifically, a part of a light reflection layer made of AL or the like of a ROM light beam of a CD-ROM or the like is intentionally provided with a field without a reflection layer to form a physical ID. The thirty-eighth, thirty-ninth, and fortieth figures are the general block diagrams of the principle of the second method of the first implementation. The forty-first figure shows a state in which the physical physical ID of the media disc is formed. As shown in the fifteenth figure (d), when the reflective film is formed, 10 low-reflection sections 5 84, 584 to 5 quot; 5 1 1 and 1 1 which are not provided with the reflective film 48 are intentionally provided in the radial direction.涸 Refined low-reflection section 58 5. When the light beam 6 is focused on the low-reflection portion 5 8 4, the reflected light quantity will be extremely reduced compared to the reflection portion 4 8. Therefore, as shown in the optical reproduction signal diagram of the forty-first figure (e), the signal level is extremely reduced. This signal level is significantly reduced | As shown in the block diagram of Figure 39, the comparator 5 8 7 of the low-reflected light amount detection section 5 8 6 detects that it is lower than the light reference value 5 8 8 Signal level analog light reproduction signal During the detection period, the low reflection part detection signal of the waveform in Figure 42 (5) is output. The address and clock position of the start position and end position of this signal are inferred. The optical reproduction signal > With the waveform shaping circuit 5 9 ◦ having AGC59 0 a, it is subjected to wave shaping, and the signal becomes a digital signal. The clock reproduction unit 38 a reproduces the clock signal by waveform-shaping the signal. The E F Μ restorer 5 9 2 of the restoration unit 591 restores the signal, and the ECC corrects the error and outputs a digital signal. EFM restoration signal, if it is CD in the physical address output section 5 9 3, it is output from the Q signal slot of the subcode, the address of MS F is output from the address output section 594, and the rack synchronization signal _ 4 8-(Please First read the notes on the back and then fill in the page.) --- p-,--1 1 ---- i-: 1 4 l I---I—---=-—1--Γ This paper GM China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2ί0χ 297 mm) 462039 A7

濟部中夬埭*局員工消f含作·ΐ印U B7五、發明説明() 號等之同步信號將自信號輸出部5 9 5輸出。從時鐘再生 部3 8 a輸出復元時鐘信號。在低反射部位址/時鐘信號 位置信號輸出部5 9 6 ,使甩η — 1位址檢知部5 9 7和 位址信號,和時鐘計時器5 9 8和同步時鐘信號,或復原 時逭,藉由低反射部開始/終了位置檢知部599 ,正確 地計測低反射部5 8 4之開始點及终了點。使用第四十二 圖之波形圈具體說明前述方法。如第四十二圖(1)之光 碟斷面圖所示,標號碼1之低反射部5 8 4被部份性地 設置。第四十二圖(2)所示之反射光信號,亦即第四十 二圖(3)之包絡線信號被輸出,在反射部中•光量基準 值5 8 8變較低。藉由光量位準比較器5 8 7檢知此荽化 *則第四十二圖(5)之低反射光量檢知信號自低反射光 量檢知部5 8 6被輸出。其此*為求取此低反射光量檢知 信號之開始、终了位置.須使用位址資訊和第四十二圖( 6)之復原時鐘或同步時鐘。首先,測量第四十二圖(7 )之位址η之基準時鐘605。藉由η — 1位址輸出部5 9 7 ·預先檢知位址η之前一個位址,如此即可知道下一 偭3乂11(3 604為位址:1之3 7110;。此3 711〇60 4和低反射光童檢知信號之開始點| g卩至基準時鐘6 0 5 之時鐘數|可藉時鐘計時器5 9 8加以計測。將此時鐘數 定義為基準延遲時間TD ·並藉基準延遲時間TD測量部 6 0 8加以測蛋並記憶。 因再生装置之關係,回路之延遲時間將有所不同,故 -49- (請先閲讀背面之注意事磅再填寫本f ) -H -n - - I -- - - 1 - r k I - -i - —I --I 一eJ1il[ -I- 1 t- I - I ---- ; 本紙法尺度適用中國國家橾车(CNS ) Α4規格(210X297公鼇) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 涇濟邹.?夬_^4苟員工A斧合乍!±中纪 五、發明説明() 此基準延遲時間T D亦不同。為此,使用此T D I時間延 遲補正部6 0 7將簧行時間補正,如此*在任意之再生装 置上,均可具有可正確測量低反射部之開始時鐘數之效果 。其次,如第四十二圖(8 )所示,於求取次一軌跡之光 學標誌N ◦· 1之開始、終了泣址、時鐘數後•即可泣址 n + 12之時鐘m+14。因TD=m + 2 ,故時潼數被 補正為1 2 ,但在說明中係使用n + 1 4。 在此|說明有~關低反射部位址表。預先在工廠|測量 第三圖所示之每涸碟片之低反射部5 8 4 ,並作成低反射 部位址表6 0 9。將此表,以第四十四圖所示之單方向函 數加从暗號化,而如第十五圖所示,在第二次之反射層形 成工程中,於碟片之最内周部,記錄條肜瑪狀之無反射層 之低反射部群。或如第三十八圖所示,亦可記錄於CD-ROM之磁性記錄部67。如第三圖所示*在正規之CD 及不法複製之CD上,其低反射部位址表609 、609 X將大幅不同。因此|如第三十八圖所示·復原此被暗號 化之表,製作正規之表•並藉由對照程式5 3 5簧行對照 ,即可區別正規之碟Η及不法複製之碟片,而可停止複製 碟片之動作。第四十二圖之例中 < 如第四十三圖所示,正 規之碟片於不法複製之碟片*其低反射部位址表6 0 9、 609χ之值係不相同。如第四十二圖(8)所示,在正 規碟片上•標誌1之次一軌跡之開始終了為m + 1 4 、m + 267 ,如第四十二圖(9)所示,在不法複製之碟片 -5 0 - 本纸汝尺度逍用中國國家標牟(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0X;297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)The staff of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China and the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of the People's Republic of China will write the synchronizing signals such as the seal U B7 and the invention description () number, etc., to be output from the signal output section 5 9 5. The reset clock signal is output from the clock regeneration section 38a. In the low reflection part, the address / clock signal position signal output unit 5 9 6 causes the η — 1 address detection unit 5 9 7 and the address signal, the clock timer 5 9 8 and the synchronous clock signal, or when it is restored. With the start / end position detection unit 599 of the low-reflection unit, the start point and end point of the low-reflection unit 5 8 4 are accurately measured. The method described above will be explained in detail using the wave circle in the forty-second figure. As shown in the cross-sectional view of the disc in Fig. 42 (1), the low reflection portion 5 8 4 of the number 1 is partially provided. The reflected light signal shown in Fig. 42 (2), that is, the envelope signal shown in Fig. 42 (3), is output, and the light amount reference value 5 8 8 becomes lower in the reflection section. This change is detected by the light amount level comparator 5 8 7 * The low reflected light amount detection signal of Fig. 42 (5) is output from the low reflected light amount detection section 5 8 6. Here * is to obtain the start and end positions of the low-reflection light detection signal. The address information and the recovered clock or synchronized clock in Figure 42 (6) must be used. First, a reference clock 605 at an address n of the forty-second figure (7) is measured. With η — 1 address output section 5 9 7 · The previous address of address η is detected in advance, so that the next 偭 3 乂 11 (3 604 is the address: 1 of 3 7110; this 3 711 〇60 4 and the starting point of the low-reflection light detection signal | g 卩 the number of clocks to the reference clock 6 0 5 | can be measured by the clock timer 5 9 8. This clock number is defined as the reference delay time TD · and The reference delay time is measured by the TD measurement unit 608 and memorized. Due to the relationship of the regeneration device, the delay time of the circuit will be different, so -49- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this f)- H -n--I---1-rk I--i---I --I a eJ1il [-I- 1 t- I-I ----; The paper method standard is applicable to the Chinese national car (CNS ) Α4 specifications (210X297 Gongao) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Ji Zou.? __4 Gou A Axe! ± Medium V. Description of the invention () This reference delay time TD is also different. For this reason, use This TDI time delay correction section 6 7 corrects the spring travel time, so * on any reproduction device, it can have the effect of accurately measuring the number of start clocks of the low reflection section. Second, as As shown in the figure forty-two (8), after obtaining the optical mark N of the next trajectory, the beginning, end of the address, and the number of clocks • The clock m + 14 of address n + 12 can be obtained. Because TD = m + 2, so the time frame number is corrected to 1 2, but n + 1 4 is used in the description. Here, it is explained that there is a table of low reflection parts. In the factory |低 The low-reflection part 5 8 4 of the disc is created as a low-reflection part address table 6 0. This table is converted into a secret code with a one-way function shown in Figure 44, and as shown in Figure 15 It is shown that in the second reflection layer forming process, a group of low reflection parts without a reflection layer in the shape of a stripe is recorded at the innermost peripheral part of the disc. Or as shown in Figure 38, it can also be recorded. On the magnetic recording section 67 of the CD-ROM. As shown in the third picture * On regular CDs and illegally copied CDs, the low reflection part address tables 609 and 609 X will be significantly different. Therefore | Show · Restore this coded table and make a regular table • And use the comparison program 5 3 5 to check, you can distinguish between regular discs and illegally copied discs, and you can stop copying The operation of making a disc. In the example in Figure 42 < as shown in Figure 43, a regular disc is on a disc that cannot be copied *. Not the same. As shown in Figure 42 (8), on a regular disc, the start and end of the next track of the mark 1 are m + 1 4 and m + 267, as shown in Figure 42 (9). Indicate that the disc is illegally copied-50-This paper is a Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X; 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

- -- - If i I 、f -- I. - - ! -n --D 一eJJ—f - - - - t 1 - - 1-- I '4 6203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中夬樣準局員工消矛合诈社印災 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 1 1 上 i 則 為 m + 2 1 m + 2 ? 7 而 有 所 不 同 「3 如 此 — 來 1 I 1 如 第 四 十 三 圖 所 示 1 低 反 射 部 位 址 表 6 〇 9 6 0 9 X 之 1 I 請 1 j 值 像 不 相 同 , 故 可 h 判 斷 出 複 製 碟 片 C 此 情 形 若 在 C L V 先 I 1 讀 1 上 I 如 前 述 J 可 利 用 原 盤 之 位 址 之 坐 標 配 置 之 差 Μ 點 〇 第 背 ! & I 四 十 五 圖 所 示 者 為 有 關 實 際 C D 之 位 址 位 置 之 測 量 结 果 之 1 意 ί 如 此 即 可 更 明 白 位 址 座 標 之 差 異 0 又 * 依 本 發 明 方 法 t 事 項 1 1 再 1 t 例 如 gp ί吏 原 盤 相 同 ϊ 在 反 射 膜 作 成 工 程 削 除 — 部 份 反 射 膜 填 裝 鳥 本 1 故 每 個 碟 片 之 低 k 射 部 均 不 相 同 VX 信 號 槽 軍 位 正 確 頁 1 1 地 削 除 部 份 反 射 膜 之 動 作 在 通 常 之 工 程 中 幾 為 不 可 行 0 I I 因 此 複 製 本 發 明 之 碟 片 在 Ε 濟 上 係 不 合 理 故 其 防 止 複 1 1 製 效 果 甚 高 0 第 二 十 圖 所 示 者 為 藉 由 低 反 射 部 檢 知 複 製 C 1 訂 D 之 流 程 圖 0 其 說 明 因 已 重 複 故 省 略 0 1 I 其 次 說 明 有 關 低 反 射 部 之 作 成 法 〇 第 四 十 t 圖 為 在 I 1 第 四 十 七 圖 ( 2 ) 之 X 程 中 設 置 蒸 著 防 止 部 6 1 〇 並 使 1 1 其 接 觸 於 碟 Μ 之 基 板 上 者 0 在 第 四 十 圖 之 工 程 ( 3 ) 中 % 1. 级 寅 行 唄 濺 而 作 成 無 反 射 層 之 低 反 射 部 5 8 4 〇 在 工 程 ( 1 I 4 ) 中 1 若 使 基 板 之 折 射 率 η 1 和 保 護 層 6 1 1 之 折 射 率 1 I η 2 相 近 j 低 反 射 部 5 8 4 之 反 射 光 量 將 減 少 〇 因 η 1 = 1 1 丄 5 5 故 為 1 3 η 2 1 7 即 可 0 1 丨 第 四 十 八 圖 為 塗 布 透 光 m 低 之 油 里 6 1 2 之 X 程 ( 3 l 1 j ) t 並 使 U V 硬 化 > 而 在 工 程 ( 4 ) 附 上 反 射 膜 0 因 油 墨 1 1 6 1 2 之 透 光 率 較 低 1 形 成 低 反 射 部 5 8 4 之 第 四 十 九 圖 I 1 ) 在 工 程 ( 2 ) 中 t 藉 由 接 著 部 6 1 4 將 遮 光 部 6 1 3 接 1 I - 5 1 - 1 1 本纸張尺度通用t國國家標丰(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 4 6203 9 短濟部中夬標"局員工消贫合作枉印^ A7 B7五、發明説明() 著於基板,在工程(3),藉由第一光罩,於内周部之光 軌跡以外之部份肜成反射膜•以形成低反射部5 8 4。在 工程(4),以光謓頭6檢知低反射部584之位置,作 成低反射部位址表6 0 9 ,在工程(5 )則加以暗號化。 在工程(6 ),將此暗號資料調製成條碼資料般之調製信 號|並藉由印字部6 1 _7和油墨6 1 2 ,於暗號資料記錄 部6 1 8 ,在基板上將調製信號作成光學標誌。 在工程(7' Γ '使油墨硬化·在工程(8 ),將暗號 資料記錄部619以外.使用提蔽(.masking)過 之第二光罩6 1 6 ,以嗔濺等|彤成反射膜48。在油墨 6 1 2之部份,反射光量減低,而形成第二低反射部58 4。在工程(9),被減少部份光量之包絡線被再生,在 工程(10),低反射部檢知信號被再生,藉由條狀碼復 原部62 ί ,暗號資料被再生。如第四十九圈之工程(1 2 )所示,在暗號資料記錄部S 1 9中*非僅磔形碼6 2 0 ,亦可印刷文字圖樣622 而藉由對每一碟片印刷I D號碼之文字|則具有以目視即可確定I D號碼之效果。 第五十圖為於暗號資料記錄部6 1 9 ,印刷圓形條形碼6 20及文字圖漾6 2 2 ,钽亦使用具有熱轉寫甩發熱部6 2 3之發熱頭6 2 4 |將塗布於膠片6 2 5上之油墨6 1 2,局部地熱轉寫於基板上,而如工程(2)所示,基板 上將殘留油墨6 1 2。若有必要,可使用U V油墨•在工 程(3)中使油墨硬化。在工程(4),使用第二光罩6 -5 2 - (請先Μ讀背面之';iJ意事項再填寫本頁) 装-- -訂 --^-- 本紙汝尺度通用t國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X25»7公釐) 462039 A7 B7 蛵濟邹士-夬.¾4局員工消费合呤.比;>泛 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 I 1 9 » 僅 在 暗 3占 貝 料 記 錄 部 形 成 金 靥 反 射 _ j 在 如 X 程 ( 1 1 ! 5 ) 1 以 光 m 頭 6 獲 取 工 程 ( 6 ) 般 之 僅 衰 減 低 反 射 部 所 1 1 讀 j r 成 之 再 生 波 形 0 在 工 程 ( 6 ) * 獲 得 低 反 射 部 檢 知 信 號 α 先 閱 1 I 讀 1 如 第 四 十 九 Μ 所 示 >1 條 形 碼 復 元 器 6 2 1 輸 出 數 位 信 背 1 Ι& j 號 而 可 獲 得 C P 主 盤 暗 號 信 號 J 此 信 號 因 每 — 片 C D 均^ 之 1 j 不 同 1 故 每 一 片 均 可 獲 得 不 同 之 物 理 I D 〇 此 主 盤 二 暗 號 事 項 f I 再 1 i 6 2 6 如 第 五 十 二 圖 所 示 將 第 三 圖 所 述 之 各 碟 固 有 4 l 寫 本 装 物 理 資 訊 之 低 反 射 部 位 址 表 6 〇 9 般 之 各 碟 片 固 有 之 碟 片 頁 i I 物 禮 I D 6 2 6 ί 或 第 ~ 圖 之 物 理 配 置 表 般 之 錄 片 製 造 1 i m 物 理 I D 6 2 7 和 钦 體 公 司 隨 意 附 上 之 序 列 管 理 號 碼 1 ! 之 碟 片 管 理 I D 6 2 8 作 成 _ 資 料 列 並 kk 翬 方 向 函 數 1 訂 之 暗 號 編 碼 器 加 以 暗 化 作 成 主 盤 Π^Γ. 陌 號 6 2 9 0 因 此 > 1 | 即使使用者欲篡改碟片 管 理 I D 6 2 8 碟 片 物 理 I D 6 1 1 2 6 亦 不 改 故 具 有 不 可 篡 改 之 效 果 0 i 1 此 碟 片 物 理 1 D 係 被 以 第 四 十 一 圖 般 之 光 標 誌 Μ 1 鍊 作 為 地 作 成 於 第 四 十 九 圈 之 碟 片 上 視 圖 之 C P 光 標 誌 部 6 i | 1 8 若 再 生 此 信 α占 t 如 第 五 十 三 圖 藉 由 對 各 光 學 標 誌 1 1 , 將 其 位 址 分 割 成 〇 9 之 十 個 角 度 號 碼 i 可 獲 得 十 個 資 1 1 料 而 可 定 義 1 0 涸 > m 3 2 b i t 之 碟 片 物 理 ϊ D 6 2 1 I 6 α 然 後 t 如 前 述 > 碟 片 物 理 I D 在 原 盤 上 雖 為 相 同 i 但 J i I 在 每 片 碟 片 上 均 不 同 故 以 暗 號 化 對 應 特 定 之 碟 片 管 理 I I 1 D 6 2 8 1 m 可 防 止 碟 片 管 理 I D 被 篡 改 0 藉 此 * 可 使 其 1 ί 具 有 大 蝠 提 高 程 式 之 保 護 用 密 碼 之 解 除 安 全 性 之 效 果 0 又 1 ! 5 3 - 1 1 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4现格(2【〇X29?公釐) 經濟部中夬標李局員工消斧合阼汪印^ 462039 A7 _B7_五、發明説明() ,位址和時鐘數·以上雖說明檢知光學標誌之實施洌,如 第2DQ圖所說明者•從第三十八圖之碟片回轉檢知部3 3 5之碟片回轉資訊和低反射光量檢知信號,藉幽低反射部 角度位置信號輸出部6 Ο 1之低反射部角度位置檢知6 0 2 ,可_出低反射部角度位置信號,而可作成第五十三圖 般之碟片物理表609。 如第五十一圖所示,藉由設置可寫人之寫人層.6 3 0, 不僅可藉篷寫下密%,因寫入層S 30之厚度甚厚,故巨 有防止磁性記錄部損傷之效果。藉由於此寫入層6 3 0上 ,印刷碟片管理I D628之文字及條肜碼,在販賣店中 即可作I D對照。 接著說明在碟Η上特意設置錯誤信號· K作為複製防 止信號之方法。 如第五十四圖所示,正規之碟片2上.於特定之位址 、時鐘部,係配置有錯誤符號632。此配置資訊,被作 成錯誤符號一位址表6 3 1 >以暗號化記錄於碟片2上。 此暗號化資訊被暗號解碼器5 3 4從物理I D輸出部6 3 3輸出。一方面,碟片2上之CP錯誤符號632 ” 11 01 1001”藉由奇偶較驗器(par i ty),以錯 誤C P符號檢知器S 3 3 ,將之與錯誤符號列表6 3 4對 照,而從錯誤CP苻號之位址、時鐘位置輸出部635 , 書出錯誤C P符號之位址、時鐘,並藉由對照程式5 3 5 ,將之和錯誤符號——位址表6 3 1對照,若一致數η 1在 -S 4 - {請先M讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --Hi ί - . -, - i - - ] - ' - I I --- . —ii -1 i— - —i -- \T i! ί» - - - J -ii 1 本紙乐尺度過用中國國家搮準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 462039---If i I, f-I.--! -N --D-eJJ-f----t 1--1-- I '4 6203 9 A7 B7 Central Bureau of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Disclosure of the invention by the employee's counterfeit cooperative. 5. Description of invention () 1 1 1 1 is different from m + 2 1 m + 2? 7 "3 so-come 1 I 1 as shown in Figure 43 Table 1 Address of low reflection part 6 〇9 6 0 9 X 1 I Please 1 j value is not the same, so h can be judged to copy the disc C. In this case, if CLV is I 1 read 1 and I is as above J may The difference between the coordinate arrangement of the address of the original disk is used. The number is shown in the figure. The figure 45 shows the meaning of the measurement result of the actual CD address position. This makes it easier to understand the address coordinates. The difference is 0 and * According to the method of the present invention, the matter is 1 1 and 1 t. For example, the original disk is the same. Process Removal — Part of the reflective film is filled with Torimoto1, so the low-k emission part of each disc is different. VX signal slot military position is correct. Page 1 1 The action of removing part of the reflective film is almost impossible in ordinary engineering. Line 0 II Therefore, copying the disc of the present invention is not economically reasonable, so its prevention of copying 1 1 is very effective. The figure 20 shows the process of copying C 1 and ordering D by detecting the low reflection part. Fig. 0 The description is omitted because it has been repeated. 0 1 I Next, the method of making the low reflection part will be explained. The fortieth t is the provision of the evaporation prevention part 6 in the X process of I 1 47 (2). 〇 Make 1 1 contact with the substrate of the dish M. 0 In the process (3) of the fortieth figure,% 1. The low-reflection part with a non-reflective layer is formed by sputtering and forming 5 8 4 〇 1 I 4) in 1 if the refractive index η 1 of the substrate and the protective layer 6 1 1 The refractive index 1 I η 2 is close to j. The amount of reflected light of the low reflection part 5 8 4 will be reduced. Θ 1 = 1 1 丄 5 5 so 1 3 η 2 1 7 can be 0 1 丨 The forty-eighth figure is coating Transmit m low oil 6 X 2 (3 l 1 j) t in the oil and harden the UV > and attach a reflective film in the process (4) 0 because the ink 1 1 6 1 2 has a lower light transmittance 1 Form the forty-ninth figure of the low reflection part 5 8 4 I 1) In the process (2) t, the light shielding part 6 1 3 is connected to the 1 1-5 1-1 1 by the bonding part 6 1 4 GM National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X 297 mm) 4 6203 9 Ministry of Economy and Trade of China " Poverty alleviation cooperation stamp of bureau staff ^ A7 B7 V. Description of invention () (3) With the first mask, a reflective film is formed on a portion other than the light track of the inner peripheral portion to form a low reflection portion 5 8 4. In the process (4), the position of the low-reflection part 584 is detected with the optical head 6. The low-reflection part address table 609 is created, and in the process (5), it is coded. In project (6), this coded data is modulated into a barcode-like modulation signal | and the printed signal 6 1 _7 and ink 6 1 2 are used in the coded data recording section 6 1 8 to make the modulated signal on the substrate optically. Sign. In the process (7 'Γ') to harden the ink. In the process (8), the password data recording unit 619 is used. A second mask 6 1 6 that has been masked is used to make reflections such as splashes. Film 48. In the portion of the ink 6 1 2, the amount of reflected light is reduced to form a second low-reflection portion 58 4. In the process (9), the envelope of the reduced amount of light is regenerated, and in the process (10), the low The detection signal of the reflection unit is reproduced, and the bar code data is reproduced by the bar code restoration unit 62. As shown in the forty-ninth circle project (1 2), in the bar code data recording unit S 1 *, it is not only The 码 code is 6 2 0, and the text pattern 622 can also be printed. By printing the ID number text on each disc, it has the effect of visually determining the ID number. The fifty-fifth figure is in the secret data recording section 6 1 9, printing circular bar code 6 20 and text figure 6 2 2, tantalum also uses heating head 6 2 3 with thermal transfer writing and heating part 6 2 3 | ink 6 6 that will be coated on film 6 2 5 , Local thermal transfer on the substrate, and as shown in the project (2), there will be residual ink on the substrate 6 1 2. If necessary, use UV ink (3) to harden the ink. In the process (4), use the second photomask 6 -5 2-(Please read the "I" on the back before filling in this page) Install --- Order-^- -The standard of this paper is the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X25 »7mm) 462039 A7 B7 Aid Zou Shi- 夬. ¾ staff consumption of the 4 bureaus. Ratio; > Fifth, the description of the invention () 1 1 I 1 9 »A gold reflection is formed only in the dark 3 cm shell material recording area. J Attenuates only the low reflection area like the X-path (1 1! 5) 1 with the light m head 6 acquisition process (6) 1 Read jr into the reproduced waveform 0 In process (6) * Obtain the detection signal of the low reflection part α Read 1 1 Read 1 As shown in the 49th M > 1 Barcode resetter 6 2 1 Output digital letter back 1 Ⅰ & j can get the CP master signal signal J This signal is different for every CD ^^ 1 j is different 1 so each piece can get a different Physical ID 〇 The two secret items on this master disk f I then 1 i 6 2 6 As shown in Figure 52, each disk described in the third figure is inherently 4 l Write the address of the low-reflection part of the physical information contained in this table 6 〇9 The disc pages inherent to each disc i I Material gift ID 6 2 6 ί or the physical configuration table of the figure ~ General video production 1 im Physical ID 6 2 7 and the serial management number randomly attached by the company 1! Of disc management ID 6 2 8 Create _ data line and kk 翚 direction function 1 The hidden code encoder ordered to be darkened into the master disk Π ^ Γ. Momo 6 2 9 0 Therefore > 1 | Even if the user wants Tampering with the disc management ID 6 2 8 Disc physical ID 6 1 1 2 6 It has no tampering effect without change 0 i 1 The physical 1 D of this disc is marked with the light of the forty-first figure Μ 1 chain Made as a land on the 49th lap The CP light marking section 6 i | 1 8 of the top view of the disc. If this letter is reproduced, α accounts for t. As shown in the fifty-third figure, the address is divided into ten angle numbers of 009 by using each optical mark 1 1. i can get ten materials 1 1 material and can define 1 0 涸 &m; 2 m bit physical ϊ D 6 2 1 I 6 α then t as above > the physical ID of the disk is the same i However, J i I is different on each disc, so it is coded to correspond to a specific disc management II 1 D 6 2 8 1 m can prevent the disc management ID from being tampered with 0. This can make it 1 ί has a large bat The effect of improving the security of the program's protection password is 0 and 1! 5 3-1 1 This paper standard is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 [〇 × 29? Mm). Employees' work together Wang Yin ^ 462039 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (), address and number of clocks · Although the above explains the implementation of detecting optical signs, such as As shown in Figure 2DQ: • From the disc rotation detection section 3 3 5 of the thirty-eighth figure, the disc rotation information and the low-reflection light detection signal, and the low-reflection section angular position signal output section 6 〇 1 The detection of the angular position of the low-reflection part is 6 0 2, and the angular position signal of the low-reflection part can be obtained, and a physical table 609 of the disc as shown in FIG. 53 can be created. As shown in the fifty-first figure, by setting the writable person's writing layer. 6 3 0, not only can write down the dense% by the canopy, because the thickness of the writing layer S 30 is very thick, it has great protection against magnetic recording. Effect of internal injuries. With this writing layer 630, the characters and barcodes of the printed disc management I D628 can be used for ID comparison in the sales shop. Next, a method of intentionally setting the error signal K on the disc as a copy prevention signal will be described. As shown in the fifty-fourth figure, an error symbol 632 is arranged on the regular disc 2 at a specific address and clock section. This configuration information is created as a bit address table of the error symbol 6 3 1 > and is recorded on the disc 2 with a password. This cryptographic information is output from the physical ID output section 6 3 3 by the cryptographic decoder 5 3 4. On the one hand, the CP error symbol 632 ”11 01 1001” on disc 2 is compared with the error symbol list 6 3 4 by the parity checker (par i ty) and the error CP symbol detector S 3 3. From the address and clock position output part 635 of the error CP 苻 number, the address and clock of the error CP symbol are written, and they are summed with the error symbol by comparing the program 5 3 5-address table 6 3 1 In contrast, if the consistent number η 1 is in -S 4-{Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) --Hi ί-.-,-I--]-'-II ---. —Ii- 1 i—-—i-\ T i! Ί »---J -ii 1 This paper music scale has been used in China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) 462039

A7 B7五、發明説明() —定之比例以上*則判別為正規碟片。此錯誤一 c p符號 "1 1 Ο 1 1 Ο Ο 1 ”被E C C解碼器3 6 e訂正錯誤, 而玻輸出成” 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 ”即表示輸出資料沒問題 ,一方面,不法複製碟M2 a ,因複Μ訂正錯誤後之通常 符號6 35 ,故將與正規碟片2之CP錯誤符號632不 同。此場合,輸出資料與正規碟片2同為〃 110 110 11” 。惟•錯誤C Ρ符號檢知器6 3 3所檢知之錯誤符 號不僅較少,同#1^誤符號一位址表和錯誤符號之配置因 不一致,在對照程式5 3 5中判定為複製碟片,而防止其 動作。如此|即可實現防止複製碟片。此場合,係具有僅 雯更信號亦可,而亦可僅追加錯誤C Ρ苻號檢知部6 3 3 ,而使糸统簡里化之效果。 其次,使用第五十六圖所示之防止複製(CP)用之 特殊EFM荽換表636,說明簧行拷貝保護之方法。在 EFM變換中•原資料637被調製成標準符號635” 0 0 1000010 00010 ” >在EFM 解碼器 59 2中*被復元成復元資料638。在防止複製碟片2上, 僅在持定之位址上,記錄C Ρ特殊符號6 3 9 * Μ取代標 準符號6 3 5。苻號被E M F復元後,因係被復元成通常 之復元資枓638 " 01 101 1 1 1 ,故僅以輸出資料 係無法區別。 有翮其具體構成> Κ第五十五圈之方塊圖說明之。在 正規之碟片2上,CP特殊符號檢知部646於檢知CP (請先閱讀背面之>i意事項再填寫本頁) I - ·ϊ Ϊ 11 - ! J _ I | J. 1— ΐ Mi - i - - m .-¾ ,v* Λ^. 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準(CNS ) Α4現格(2iOX 297公釐) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 經濟部_夬樣準局員工消铲合作枉印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 ί 持 殊 付 OA 5K 6 3 9 後 » 從 C Ρ 特 殊 付 號 位 址 輸 出 部 6 4 1 V 1 1 1 輸 出 C P 特 殊 符 號 之 位 址 〇 在 正 規 碟 片 對 照 部 5 3 5 » 將 ! I 請 i I 之 與 白 暗 號 解 碼 器 5 3 4 11 元 之 C P 持 _ 符 號 一 位 址 表 6 先 vt 1 1 讀 i 4 2 相 對 m t 若 有 基 準 值 η 〇 kk 上 之 對 m 值 則 判 定 為 正 背 1 & I 規 碟 片 0 在 不 法 複 製 之 碟 片 2 a 上 因 只 記 錄 有 標 準 信 號、 之 1 1 I 6 3 5 t 在 C P 持 殊 AS%· 付 號 檢 知 部 6 4 〇 t C P 特 殊 幅 號 檢 事 項 I Ι 再 1 知 信 號 除 發 生 錯 誤 時 外 將 不 產 生 〇 因 此 i 在 正 規 碟 片 之 對 填 裝 . 寫 本 眧 部 判 定 為 不 法 m 片 而 停 止 其 動 作 0 買 ·«· 1 1 依 此 方 式 藉 由 使 用 Ε F Μ 持 殊 菱 換 表 6 3 6 f 在 調 1 ί 製 信 號 之 階 段 SP 可 防 止 被 拷 貝 〇 若 與 第 五 十 四 圖 之 錯 誤 特 1 1 殊 *r^ 付 號 方 式 比 較 其 可 得 到 複 製 更 形 困 難 之 效 果 0 且 其 只 1 訂 1 I 須 變 更 信 α占 玟 其 構 成 亦 較 簡 單 □ 其 次 說 明 有 關 利 用 主 盤 暗 號 6 2 9 和 商 店 碼 ( d e 1 1 a 1 e Γ C 〇 d e ) 之 安 装 管 理 方 法 0 第 五 十 八 圖 所 示 1 i 者 係 說 明 有 關 次 暗 解 碼 器 6 4 3 之 全 體 流 程 0 此 流 程 圈 l 级 傜 由 公 司 之 處 理 步 驟 4 0 5 a % 商 店 之 處 理 步 驟 4 〇 5 b 1 j 及 使 用 者 之 處 理 步 驟 4 0 5 C 等 三 大 步 m 所 構 成 0 首 先 1 1 1 在 钦 體 公 司 之 處 理 步 驟 4 0 5 a t 如 第 — 實 施 例 之 第 五 十 1 1 二 圖 所 說 明 者 係 Μ 主 盤 暗 號 編 碼 器 5 3 7 m 括 原 盤 固 有 1 j 之 原 盤 I D 6 2 7 、 碟 Μ 之 物 理 I D 6 2 6 序 列 號 碼 等 1 1 之 碟 片 管 理 I D 6 2 8 、 和 次 暗 號 解 瑪 號 碼 η 5 * m 如 η 1 1 5 = 1 5 1 等 並 將 之 暗 號 化 為 主 盤 暗 號 6 2 9 0 因 此 即 1 1 可 防 止 篡 改 0 對 每 個 商 店 或 服 務 中 心 之 商 店 ϊΚ 碼 為 η 5 之 1 Ι 一 5 6 - 1 1 本紙張尺度邁用中a國家標牟(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐〉 462039 A7 植濟部中央標隼局員工消骨合作让印^ B7五、發明説明() 商店,只提供一個暗號。而每個碟片在其主盤暗號6 2 3 中|係將次暗號解碼號碼η 5 6 4 4設定為例如η 5 = 1 5 1 。因此,第五十t圖之碟片之次暗號645僅被Μ商 店號碼為1 5 1之次暗號解碼器6 4 6所符號化。在此碟 片上,次暗號解碼器647,像Κη5例如η5=15Ι二 和商店暗號6 2 9加以設定。因此,昍使Μ其它號碼之次 暗號編碼器6 4 6家以编碼|因此部份不被復元,故無法 動作。 因此,只有n5=l 5 1號之商店,可利用n5=i 5 1之暗號編瑪器6 4 6 a ».設定此碟片之流通控制,即 程式之解除及台數之設定。 在下一個商店之處理步驟4 0 5 b ,將作成次管理資 料649。其中,除碟片物理I 〇626夕卜,更包含碟片 管理I D 6 2 8之安装限制台數6 5 0 、使用限制時間6 5 1 、及服務用密碼等。此次管理資料649係為n5 = 1 5 1之商店所保密,而使用所擁有之η 5 = 1 5 1之次 暗號編碼器6 4 6 a加以暗號化,並作成次暗號6 4 5 * 而記錄於碟片2之磁性記錄部中。 在其次之使用者處理步驟4 0 5 c ,再生主盤暗號6 29 |並以主盤暗號解碼器5 34將主盤管理資料64 8 復元。並以其中之原盤物理I D檢查原盤是否為複製,以 碟片物理I D626和碟片管理I D628實行I D號碼 篡改之檢査。次信號解碼號碼6 44被復元,在步驟4 0 (請先"讀背面之.-;IJ意事項再填寫水頁) in HJI I-n I S I - - . ^~^ - ί^—np I - 1 I —I- I 'I --- —...... j 1 _ I -I I 1 -: --- 本紙法尺度通用中國國家榡準(CNS ) A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 462039 A7 經濟部卡央揉準局員工消f含咋.ttipw B7五、發明説明() 5d ,次暗號解碼號碼n5 ·洌如n5=l 51被選擇3 在碟片2之光R Ο Μ部| ί系暗號化並記錄有Μ如Q Q 1號 至9 9 9號之次暗號解碼號之程式或資料。其中•特定之 ,亦即η 5 = 1 5 1之寅料被再生,在主盤暗號解磚器5 34上將η5=151之次暗號解碼器647復元3此場^ 合•因次暗號解碼器被暗號化.故具有不會被篡改之效果 。藉由次暗號解磚器6 4 7 ,從次暗號中,將次管理資科 549復元。因次^理資料549中包含有物理I D6 2 6 ·故可實行資料篡改之檢査。又,因記錄有安装台數6 5 0 、使用限制時間6 5 1 Υ解除程式號碼6 5 2 ,此碟 片2之被解除之程式號碼和可安装之台數等卽可被限制。 此設定可由商店號碼η 5之商店任意設定。因此,有關碟 片及钦體之販賣狀況I各國之各地區之商店可簧行其最佳 之設定。 Κ下使用第五十八圖之流程圖更詳细說明第五十七圖 之流程。在第五十八圖中•軟體公司之碟片製造程序40 5 a係被添加於商店之碟片之使用限制程序4 0 5 b ,並 追加商店之程式使用許可程序4 0 5 d和使用者之安中程 序405c 。首先*在碟片製造程序405a ,以步驟4 1 0 a之原盤製造工程作成原盤,並抽出其位址-座標表 、錯誤-位址表等原盤物理I D。在將原盤製造成碟片基 板之步驟4 1 Ob之第一金屬反射膜製造工程中,如前述 •藉由設置間歆之無反射層之低反射部等手段,於各個碟 -58 - (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ! Ί------,ιτ------線------- 本纸張尺度通用中國國家標车(CNS ) AO見格(210X29?公釐) 462039 A7 i£濟邹中夬樣麥"員工消胥合咋·吐」:ρ5ά B7五、發明説明() 片上作成不同之物理特激,並抽出碟片物理I D。 在步驟4 I 0 c之序列號碼發生工程,使產生每片碟 片均不同之序列號碼等之碟片管理I D ,並指定次暗號解 磚號碼η 5 ,在步驟4 1 0 d ,以主盤暗號解碼器加Μ暗 號化,作成碟片主盤暗號 > 在步驟4 1 Oe ,在第二金靥 反射膜工程中,對各片碟片記錄Μ圓形條肜碼等之不同之 記錄號碼。或者,在步驟4 1 0 f ·記鏵於磁性記錄層, 而製造碟片2 ^在1欠一商店號碼η 6之步驟40 5 b ,在 步驟4 1 0 g作成碟片次管理資料649 ,在步驟4 1〇 h ,以η 6號之次暗號编碼器6 4 6作成碟Η次暗號,在 步驟4 1 0丨將之記錄於磁性記錄層。在次一使甩者之安 装程序405c ,首先,讀取機器ID ·並將機器ID記 錄於安裝管理資料6 54之機器I D記錄區6 5 5。其次 ,在步驟4 1 Ok ,將機器I D記錄於HDD |確認碟片 2中之許可安装之基本程式號®之安装許可標誌653。 標誌653a 、653b 、653c將分別顯示對餞器I D1 、2、3之機器之安装許可。在圖中,僅有機器ID 1和3被許可安装。安装後,在步驟4 1 0 m |記錄全部 之安装管理資料653。在步驟4 1 On ,進入付費即允 許安装之新程式:nP。在步驟410p >做成將nP安 装於機器I D1 、3之場合之追加安装管理資科654a 。資料中•在安装許可標誌653f 、653h中設有安 装許可標誌6 5 3。然後將此資枓傳送给商店。而進人商 -59- 本紙沲尺度通周中®國家標牟(CMS ) A4規格(2iOX297公釐) t請先"讀背面之注意事項再填寫本育) - I - mi ! I II r 、士Γ - - - I -- — 丁 一I-_ · --------------- --------- ------- 4 6 203 9 at B7五、發明説明() 店之使用許可程序40 5 d ,在步驟4 1 0 u >商店將可 確認是否已牧取程式安裝費。若為Y E S則進入步驟4 1 0 v ·並以次暗號編碼器N ◦· η P «將追加之安装管理 資料6 5 4 a暗號化,在步驟4 1 0 w作成安装管理號碼 |並傳送給使甩者。而使用者*在步驟410q,接牧安、 装管理號碼6 5 5 ,在步驟4 1 0 s ·以次暗號解碼器N Ο · nP復元暗號> 並復元追加之安装菅理資料6 54 a ,在步驟4 1 0 t \黄行新程式之安装。此時,在步驟4 1 Ο X *對照披厦元之物理I d資料和從碟片中測得之物 理ID實料•僅在OK之場合,造人步驟410z ,而開 始程式nP之安裝。於篡改時,因物理I D不一致,故可 防止不法篡改。此場合,因追加程式nP中,在安装許可 標誌653a、653中係定為1 ,故僅有機器ID為1 和3之程式安装被許可。又,在第五圖中所示者,係為位 址一座標資訊5 32被暗號化,並將之記錄於光ROM之 方法。惟,如第十五圖所示,暗號化此位址一座標位置資 訊5 3 2 ,作成條形碼狀之光罩圈樣•並作成具有條形碼 状之無反射部之反射膜,即可K光謓頭6再生此條彤磚圖 漾。此場合,係使光再生面和反射側之保護層6 1 0透明 化,藉由於光謓頭6之相反側之面上設置光感應器Μ讀取 條形碼· g卩可再生防止複製信號。此場合,從條形碼中再 生時鐘信號,並控制馬達之回轉,g卩使不使用F G馬達| 亦可使馬達作定速回轉而賁行對磁性記錄部之記錄。如第 -6 0 - (請先MTt背面之注意事項再填寫本瓦)A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ()-If the ratio is above the specified value *, it is judged as a regular disc. This error is a cp symbol " 1 1 Ο 1 1 Ο Ο 1 `` corrected by the ECC decoder 3 6 e, and the glass output is "1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1", which means that there is no problem with the output data. On the one hand, Illegal copying of the disc M2 a, because the normal symbol 6 35 after the correction of the correction of M, will be different from the CP error symbol 632 of the regular disc 2. In this case, the output data is the same as the regular disc 2 〃 110 110 11 ”. However, the error symbol detected by the error CP symbol detector 6 3 3 is not only less, it is the same as the # 1 ^ error symbol bit address table and the configuration of the error symbol is inconsistent. It is determined as a duplicated disc in the comparison program 5 3 5 Film while preventing its action. This way | you can prevent discs from being copied. In this case, it is only necessary to update the signal, and it is also possible to simply add the error detection unit 6 3 3 to simplify the system. Next, the special EFM for copy prevention (CP) shown in Figure 56 is used to replace table 636 to explain the method of spring copy protection. In the EFM transform, the original data 637 is modulated into standard symbols 635 ”0 0 1000010 00010” > In the EFM decoder 59 2 * it is restored into the restoration data 638. On the copy-prevention disc 2, only the fixed address is recorded with the CP special symbol 6 3 9 * Μ instead of the standard symbol 6 3 5. After the 苻 number was restored by E M F, it was restored to the usual restoration information 枓 638 " 01 101 1 1 1, so it ca n’t be distinguished only by the output data. This is illustrated in the block diagram of its fifty-fifth circle. On the regular disc 2, the CP special symbol detection unit 646 detects the CP (please read the > i notice on the back before filling this page) I-· ϊ Ϊ 11-! J _ I | J. 1 — Ϊ́ Mi-i--m .-¾, v * Λ ^. The paper size is applicable to the national standard (CNS) Α4 (2iOX 297 mm) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs _Sample Standard Bureau Cooperate with employees to print and print. 5. Description of invention () 1 1 ί After paying special OA 5K 6 3 9 »From C Ρ special pay number address output section 6 4 1 V 1 1 1 output CP special symbol address 〇 In the regular disc comparison section 5 3 5 »will! I please i I and the white password decoder 5 3 4 11 yuan CP holding _ symbol bit address table 6 first vt 1 1 read i 4 2 relative mt if there is The reference m value on the reference value η 〇kk is judged as the front 1 & I standard disc 0 because only the standard signal is recorded on the illegally copied disc 2 a, 1 1 I 6 3 5 t in C P Special AS% · Pay No. Detecting Department 6 4 〇 t CP Special Amplitude Inspection Items I Ⅰ Re 1 No knowing signal will be generated except when an error occurs. Therefore, i is filled in the regular disc pair. It is judged to be illegal m piece and stop its action. 0 Buy · «· 1 1 In this way, by using Ε F Μ To change the table 6 3 6 f In the phase of adjusting 1 signal SP can be prevented from being copied. The error of the fifty-fourth figure is 1 1 special * r ^ Compared with the payment method, it can get the effect of more difficult copying. 0 and it is only 1 order. 1 I need to change the letter α. Its composition is simpler. Installation management method using the main disk password 6 2 9 and the store code (de 1 1 a 1 e Γ C 〇de) 0 The one shown in the fifty-eighth figure 1 i is to explain the overall process of the secondary dark decoder 6 4 3 0 This process circle Level 傜 is composed of the company's processing step 4 0 5 a% Store's processing step 4 〇5 b 1 j and the user's processing step 4 0 5 C and other three major steps m 0 First 1 1 1 Processing at the Chin Ti company Step 4 0 5 at as described in the fifty-first embodiment of the first embodiment-the second figure is the master disk encoder 5 3 7 m including the original disk ID 1 2 of the original disk ID 6 2 7 and the physical ID 6 of the disk M 2 6 Serial number, etc. 1 1 Disk management ID 6 2 8, and sub-signature solution number η 5 * m, such as η 1 1 5 = 1 5 1 and so on and convert it into a master disc password 6 2 9 0 Therefore That is, 1 1 can prevent tampering. 0 For each store or service center, the ϊ code is η 5 of 1 Ι 5 6-1 1 This paper uses the national standard (CNS) A4 size (210X 297 mm). 〉 462039 A7 The staff of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Plant Economics and the People's Republic of China eliminated the bones and co-operated with the seal ^ B7 V. Description of the invention () The shop only provides a password. And each disc in its main disc secret number 6 2 3 | sets the secondary secret number η 5 6 4 4 to, for example, η 5 = 1 5 1. Therefore, the secondary password 645 of the disc of the fiftieth t is only symbolized by the secondary password decoder 6 4 6 of the M store number 1 51. On this disc, a secondary code decoder 647, such as Kη5 such as η5 = 15Ι 二 and a shop password 6 2 9 is set. Therefore, it is necessary to make the code of the other number of Μ 6 to 6 to encode | so part of it is not restored, so it cannot be operated. Therefore, only shops with n5 = l 5 1 can use the secret code editor 6 4 6 a ». To set the circulation control of this disc, that is, the release of the program and the setting of the number of units. In the next store processing step 4 5 b, the secondary management information 649 will be created. Among them, in addition to the disc physical I 0626, it also includes the disc management ID 6 2 8 installation limit number 6 50, the use time limit 6 5 1 and service passwords. The management information 649 is kept secret by the store where n5 = 1 51, and the secondary password encoder 6 4 6 a with η 5 = 1 51 is used to secretize it, and a secondary password 6 4 5 * is created. Recorded in the magnetic recording section of the disc 2. In the next user processing step 4 0 5 c, the master disk password 6 29 | is reproduced, and the master disk password decoder 5 34 is used to restore the master disk management data 64 8. The physical ID of the original disk is used to check whether the original disk is a copy, and the physical ID D626 and the disk management ID 628 of the disk are used to check the ID number for tampering. The secondary signal decoding number 6 44 is reset, in step 4 0 (please read "-. IJ matters on the back before filling in the water page) in HJI In ISI--. ^ ~ ^-Ί ^ —np I-1 I —I- I 'I --- —... j 1 _ I -II 1-: --- The paper method is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 462039 A7 Employees of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Central Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs include: t.ttipw B7 V. Description of the invention () 5d, the secondary password decoding number n5 · If n5 = l 51 is selected 3 In the light of disc 2 R Ο Μ Department | The code is coded and recorded with a program or data such as the QQ code number from 1 to 9 9. Among them • Specifically, that is, η 5 = 1 5 1 is reproduced. On the main disk, the secret code deblocker 5 34 will be η 5 = 151, and the code decoder 647 will be restored 3. The device is secretized, so it has the effect of not being tampered with. With the secondary secret code solver 6 4 7, from the secondary secret code, the secondary management asset department 549 is restored. Because physical data 549 contains physical I D6 2 6 · Therefore, inspection of data tampering can be implemented. In addition, since the number of installed units is 6 5 0 and the use time limit is 6 5 1 Υ release program number 6 5 2, the number of programs and the number of units that can be removed from this disc 2 can be limited. This setting can be arbitrarily set by the store with the shop number η 5. Therefore, the sales status of discs and chitin bodies can be set to the best settings in each country and region. The flow chart of Figure 57 is explained in more detail using the flowchart of Figure 58 below. In the fifty-eighth figure, the software company's disc manufacturing process 40 5 a is a use restriction process 4 0 5 b added to the store's disc, and the store's program use permission process 4 0 5 d and the user are added. Security Program 405c. First, in the disc manufacturing program 405a, use the original disc manufacturing process of step 4 10 a to make an original disc, and extract the physical ID of the original disc, such as its address-coordinate table and error-address table. In the manufacturing process of the first metal reflective film in Step 4 Ob of manufacturing the original disc into a disc substrate, as described above, by providing a low-reflection part with a non-reflective layer in between, etc., in each disc -58-(Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)! Ί ------, ιτ ------ line ------- This paper size is commonly used by China National Standard Vehicle (CNS) AO (210X29? Mm) 462039 A7 i £ Zou Zhongmai sample wheat " Employees eliminate and combine vomiting ": ρ5ά B7 V. Description of the invention () Create different physical stimuli on the chip, and extract the disc physical ID. In step 4 the serial number of I 0 c is generated, so that a disc management ID such as a different serial number is generated for each disc, and the secondary password is used to solve the brick number η 5. In step 4 1 0 d, the master disc is used. The password decoder adds the M password to create a disc master disk password. At step 41 Oe, in the second gold foil reflective film project, different disc numbers such as M circular bar codes are recorded on each disc. . Or, in step 4 1 0 f · write it in the magnetic recording layer, and manufacture the disc 2 ^ in step 40 5 b in 1 and a shop number η 6; in step 4 10 g, create disc number management data 649, At step 410h, a disc number secondary password is created with the eta 6 secondary code encoder 6 4 6 and recorded in the magnetic recording layer at step 4 10 丨. In the next installer installation program 405c, first, the machine ID is read. The machine ID is recorded in the machine ID recording area 6 5 5 of the installation management data 6 54. Next, at step 41 Ok, record the machine ID in the HDD | confirm the installation permission mark 653 of the basic program number ® permitted for installation in disc 2. The signs 653a, 653b, and 653c will show the installation permits for the machines I D1, 2, 3, respectively. In the figure, only machine IDs 1 and 3 are permitted to be installed. After installation, record all installation management data 653 in step 4 10 m | In Step 4 1 On, enter the new program that allows installation: nP. In step 410p >, an additional installation management resource section 654a is prepared when nP is installed on the devices I D1, 3. In the materials • The installation permission signs 6 5 3 are installed in the installation permission signs 653f and 653h. Then transfer this asset to the store. Entering the People's Quotient-59- This paper has a standard of the middle of the week ® National Standards (CMS) A4 specification (2iOX297 mm) tPlease read the notes on the back before filling in this education)-I-mi! I II r , Shi Γ---I --- Ding Yi I-_ · --------------- --------- ------- 4 6 203 9 at B7 V. Description of the invention () Store license procedure 40 5 d, at step 4 0 u > The store will be able to confirm whether the program installation fee has been collected. If it is YES, go to step 4 1 0 v, and use the secondary password encoder N ◦ η P «to add the additional installation management data 6 5 4 a, and create an installation management number in step 4 1 0 w and send it to Make dumper. And the user * in step 410q, picks up the security number, installs the management number 6 5 5, and in step 4 1 0 s, uses the secondary password decoder N Ο · nP to reset the password > and restores the additional installation management data 6 54 a , In step 4 1 0 t \ Huang Xing new program installation. At this time, in step 4 1 0 X * Compare the physical ID data of Phi Xuan Yuan with the physical ID measured from the disc. Only in the case of OK, create step 410z and start the installation of program nP. At the time of tampering, because the physical ID is inconsistent, illegal tampering can be prevented. In this case, since the installation permission flags 653a and 653 are set to 1 in the additional program nP, only programs with machine IDs 1 and 3 are permitted to be installed. In addition, the one shown in the fifth figure is a method in which a piece of address information 5 32 is coded and recorded in an optical ROM. However, as shown in the fifteenth figure, the location information 5 3 2 of this address is secretly coded, and a barcode-shaped mask circle pattern is made. • A reflective film with a barcode-shaped non-reflective portion is made, and K light can be made The first 6 tiles regenerate this tile. In this case, the protective layer 6 10 on the light reproduction side and the reflection side is made transparent, and the light sensor M is provided on the opposite side of the optical head 6 to read the barcode and g 卩 to prevent reproduction of signals. In this case, the clock signal is regenerated from the bar code and the rotation of the motor is controlled, so that the motor can be rotated at a constant speed without using the F G motor | and the magnetic recording section can be recorded. Such as Section -6 0-(please note the back of MTt before filling in this tile)

1 ΐ * ί ill-- - —fn - = I 1 J . . · --— m- 1 I --I 本紙乐尺度適用令國國家標準{〇^)戍4规格(210父297公着) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 經濟部令夬揉隼局員工消貪合作.社印^ 五、發明説明() 四十六圖所示 > 藉由檢知防止拷貝用光標誌之位址位置、 信號漕被置,gp可識別及排除正規碟片及不法複製碟Η。 又,雖使用RSA函數作為暗號函數,但亦可使用蔺圓曲 線函數或DE S函數。第五十九圖中之光學搮誌3 8 7和 光面之位址為置之角度位置1係•係為每片碟Η均不同f \ 又,條形碼狀之低反射部5 84如第六十圖之工程所 …今 不,係以雪射微調装置(1 aser trimming )所作成者。在工程(3) ( 4 )之第一次雷射微調工程 中,將雷射643之光束· Μ雷射掃瞄器644加以掃瞄 ,以作成非直線狀圖樣653·而做成工程(4)所示之 低反射部584。在本發.明中 > 如工程(3),係萏射加 工為鋸齒狀而非直線狀,因此•在本發明中.藉由1 Τ單 位即可檢知低反射部,故欲複製本發明之碟片,則必須在 信號槽單位,即水平、垂直雙方向上以0 · 8um之精度 實行蝕刻者。對此|汎用之雷射掃瞄餓之精度因均在1 0 u m K上,故以市售之機器係無法複製無反射部5 8 4。 和第四十九圖所示相同.如第六十一圖所示,藉由雷射微 調,在工程(3)做成隨機之ID標誌,在工程(5)檢 知I D標誌之位址、時鐘號碼,將之與邏輯I D號碼一起 暗號化。此暗號,在工程(6)之第二次雷射微調工程中 •被作成條形碼般之脈衝幅度調製信號而被記錄。如此, 即可作成每片碟片均不同,且無法篡改之I D號碼,而形 -6 1 - 本紙張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公;t) (請先閱讳背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) - 圓· i - — - —I 1 i I'0 --1 一 J To ---------------- 462039 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 成於C D之光記錄部上。如第六十七圖所示,在工程(2 )預先檢知原盤之物理配置資訊5 32 ,並以暗號编碼器 5 3 7將之暗號化·復以脈衝幅度調製部6 5 6做成C Ρ 條形碼信號。對已完成之原盤之内周部或外周部,在工程 (3 )中,Μ雷射微調裝置或切削材,切去原盤之一部· 而以C Ρ條形碼之脈衝幅度,設置無信號槽部。在此領域 只可再生0之連續資科。在工程(7 ),以P W Μ度元部 6 2 1 ,測童此碼狀之脈衝幅度,g卩可復元防止拷貝 資料。如此•在使用者階段,即可檢知複製之碟片。又, 如第六十八圖所示,與第三十二圖之情形柜同,在工程( 6),以苐一原盤_完成碟片2,在工程(7),第一原 盤5 7 5之物理配置資訊5 3 2被暗號化,並作成記錄有 該暗號之第二原盤575a,在工程(8),在第一反射 膜48上設置30 wm之透明層,並K公知之2P法,藉 由第二原盤57 5 a ,形成信號槽,並形成第二反射膜4 8 a 。藉此,第二反射膜48 a上,因記錄有第一反射膜 4 8之物理配置資訊5 3 2 ,玟可賁現高保護率之防止拷 貝碟片。 又,如第六十二圖(a )所示,從控制部1 0中檢知 位址A η時,將軌跡偏離切換信號(〇 f f track )送至循跡控制回路24 *藉由軌跡伺服極性反轉回路6 46 ,使軌跡何服回路24a之極性倒反。之後,從第六 十二圖(6)所示之正極性伺服所產生之On T r a c -6 2 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(21 OX 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)1 ΐ * ί ill-----fn-= I 1 J.. · --- m- 1 I --I This paper music standard is applicable to the national standard {00 ^) 戍 4 specifications (210 parent 297) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 The Ministry of Economic Affairs ordered the staff of the Bureau to work together to eliminate corruption. Printed by the company ^ V. Description of the invention (shown in Figure 46) > The location and signal of the light-proof mark to prevent copying by inspection When set, gp can identify and exclude regular discs and illegally copied discs. In addition, although the RSA function is used as the cryptographic function, a 蔺 circular curve function or a DE S function may be used. In the fifty-ninth figure, the optical log 3 8 7 and the light surface address are set at the angular position 1. • Each disc is different. F \ Also, the bar-shaped low reflection part 5 84 is like the sixtieth The engineering institute of the picture ... No, it is made by a snow trimming device (1 aser trimming). In the first laser fine-tuning project of the project (3) (4), the beam of the laser 643 · M laser scanner 644 was scanned to make a non-linear pattern 653 · and the project (4 ) Shown as a low reflection portion 584. In the present. Mingzhong> If the project (3), the firing process is zigzag instead of straight, so in the present invention. The low reflection part can be detected by 1T unit, so I want to copy this Invented discs must be etched in signal slot units, that is, horizontally and vertically, with an accuracy of 0 · 8um. In this regard, the accuracy of laser scanning for general use is 10 μm, so it is impossible to copy the non-reflective part 5 8 4 with commercially available machines. Same as shown in Figure 49. As shown in Figure 61, with laser trimming, a random ID mark is made in the project (3), and the address, The clock number is secretized with the logical ID number. This password was recorded in the second laser fine-tuning project of Project (6) as a bar code-like pulse amplitude modulation signal. In this way, you can create an ID number that is different for each disc and cannot be tampered with, and the shape is -6 1-This paper size is common Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 male; t) (please read the tab on the back first) Please fill out this page again)-Circle · i-—-— I 1 i I'0 --1 J To ---------------- 462039 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () It is formed on the optical recording section of the CD. As shown in Fig. 67, the physical configuration information 5 32 of the original disk is detected in advance in the project (2), and it is encrypted with a coded encoder 5 3 7 and is made by the pulse amplitude modulation unit 6 5 6 C P barcode signal. For the inner or outer peripheral part of the completed original disk, in the process (3), the laser laser trimming device or cutting material is used to cut off one part of the original disk. The pulse width of the CP barcode is set to have no signal groove. . Only continuous resources can be regenerated in this area. In project (7), measure the pulse amplitude of this code with P W Μ degree unit 6 2 1, and g can be restored to prevent copying of data. So • At the user stage, you can check the copied disc. Also, as shown in the sixty-eighth figure, as in the case of the thirty-second figure, in the project (6), the first original disk _ completes the disc 2. In the project (7), the first original disk 5 7 5 The physical configuration information 5 3 2 is coded, and a second original disk 575a recorded with the code is created. In the process (8), a 30 wm transparent layer is provided on the first reflective film 48, and the well-known 2P method is used. A signal groove is formed by the second original disk 57 5 a, and a second reflective film 4 8 a is formed. As a result, the physical configuration information 5 3 2 of the first reflective film 48 is recorded on the second reflective film 48a, so that a high-protection-proof copy-proof disc can be realized. As shown in Fig. 62 (a), when the address A η is detected from the control unit 10, the track deviation switching signal (〇ff track) is sent to the tracking control circuit 24 * by the track servo The polarity reversal circuit 6 46 reverses the polarity of the trajectory and service circuit 24a. After that, On T rac -6 2 generated from the positive-polarity servo shown in Figure 62 (6)-This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 OX 297 mm) (Please read first (Notes on the back then fill out this page)

- ' - I - - - -- I J^—ί m^n i^ili \· L I- 1 I —iurr J^n I 經濟部中央揉李局貞工消f合作.吐印製 4 6 203 9 A7 _B7_五、發明説明() k i n s狀態,亦即信號槽46上之行走樣態,切換成第 六十二圖(c )所示之逆極性伺服。然後•控制使信號槽 46 a、46b之圈樣接近光感應器648 a、648b 之兩端i使光束行走於相鄰接之兩軌跡之正中間。如第六 十二圖(c)所示,當鄭接之軌跡之信號漕46 a 、46 b為同相時'兩者之交調(crosstalk)信號被 強化,而使同相再生信號6 5 ◦被再生。如非同相•則不 再生正常信號。是反向之場合•交調信號將互相抵銷 •而再生成振幅無變化之信號。 如第六十三圖所示*再生CD之全部資料之交調信號 時,將Μ相當低之機率,出現鄰接軌跡之複數涸信號漕4 6完全一致且成為同相之情形。在此領域中,在一定時間 Ts内 > 可檢知連續之同相信號區塊653a 、653b 、_6 53c。此時•當特定位址An在交調時產生衝突時 ,在同相區塊S I之機架Syn c信號654中,僅選取 似到達之同相區塊6 5 3 ,並抽出複數組。然後*將位址 An和配置角度θ η和同相再生碼652a 、652b收 容於原盤物理I D表532 =將此表記錄於CD之光R0 Μ部之條形碼狀無反射部中。或者 > 記錄於磁性記錄部。 於再生此CD時*藉由第六十二圖之光再生部或磁性再生 部,再生此原盤物理配置表5 3 2 ,將資料送至對照部5 3 5。根據此資料,如第六十三圖所示•苜先茌位址A k 設定角度0。接著在位址A i ,交調將產生衝突,而先檢 -63" 本紙張適用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐〉 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)-'-I----IJ ^ —ί m ^ ni ^ ili \ · L I- 1 I —iurr J ^ n I A7 _B7_ V. Description of the Invention () The state of kins, that is, the walking state on the signal slot 46, is switched to the reverse polarity servo shown in Figure 62 (c). Then, control to make the circle patterns of the signal grooves 46 a and 46 b approach the two ends i of the light sensors 648 a and 648 b so that the light beam walks in the middle of two adjacent tracks. As shown in Figure 62 (c), when the signals 郑 46a and 46b of Zheng Jie's trajectory are in phase, the crosstalk signal between the two is strengthened, so that the in-phase regeneration signal 6 5 ◦ is regeneration. If it is not in-phase, the normal signal will not be reproduced. When it is reversed • The intermodulation signals will cancel each other out, and a signal with no change in amplitude will be generated. As shown in Figure 63 * When the intermodulation signal of all the data of the CD is reproduced, there is a very low probability that M will have a complex signal 邻接 signal 涸 4 6 adjacent to the trajectory which is completely consistent and in phase. In this field, within a certain time Ts > the continuous in-phase signal blocks 653a, 653b, _6 53c can be detected. At this time • When a specific address An conflicts during the intermodulation, in the rack Syn c signal 654 of the in-phase block SI, only the in-phase block 6 5 3 that seems to arrive is selected, and a complex array is extracted. Then * the address An, the arrangement angle θ η, and the in-phase reproduction codes 652a and 652b are stored in the physical disk ID table 532 = this table is recorded in the bar-shaped non-reflective portion of the light ROM portion of the CD. Or > Record in the magnetic recording section. When this CD is reproduced * The physical reproduction table 5 3 2 of the original disc is reproduced through the light reproduction section or magnetic reproduction section of Fig. 62, and the data is sent to the comparison section 5 3 5. Based on this information, as shown in Figure 63, • The angle of alfalfa first address A k is set to 0. Then at the address A i, the intermodulation will conflict, and first check -63 " This paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

'13 I ---- . - - I H - * - —I 一- - I I 1 - - I - -- - .f ί I I - I *4 6 203 9 A7 經濟部中央標净局員工消费合作.社印龙 B7五、發明説明() 知機架Sync信號654a ,而測量當時之角度θ 1 。 同時並再生同相再生碼652a” 1 000 1 000 1〇 0 1” ,亦再生反相再生碼” ◦ 0 0 ◦ 0 0 0 ” 。此測量 所得之資料,藉由對照部5 3 5加以對照是否與原盤物理 ID表532 —致,若不一致時,藉由_出/動作淳止部、 5 36 ·使程式之動作或输出停止。對位址A2之同相區 塊6 5 3 b亦實行同樣之對照作業 > 對照同相再生信號之 機絮S y n c信鉍S角度Θ2秸同相再生碼652 〃 1〇 0010010001 · · ”是否與原盤物理ID表一 致。 在第六十三圖之方式中·首先對照同相區塊之同相再 生碼652是否一致。為複製此部份,必須以4 ‘ 3MH z之周期T之0 5T之精度*正確地作成鄰接軌跡之信 號樓。若不藉由C A V鈾刻原盤,即無法到達此精度。同 時,並測量機架Sync654a之角度位置On 。各同 相區瑰653a 、653b之間,係MCLV加以記錄。 因此,欲使角度位置θ η —致,則必須以高精度之C L V 記錄之。亦即 > 欲使角度θ η和同相再生碼完全一致 > 須 以0 · 5 Τ之精度控制C L V Κ作成原盤。此狀況Μ目前 之装置係無法作到=如此,藉由组合角度θ η和同栢再生 碼即可防止原盤被稷製。 本發明係於CD之標籤面具有磁性記錄層。因此,如 第六十四圖(a)所示,於磁性記錄屠上具有垃圾等異物 I —- I - ! I i - I 1 - . - . - -- 1—r - i- 1. να)— - - - -I ________ HJ (請先閱讀背&之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙法疋度適用中國國家橾车(CNS ) A4規格(2!Ox:297公釐) 462039 哩赉部中央嘌竿馬員工消旁=咋.f±.;p" A7 B7五'發明説明() 655a、655b、655c時,其記嬅特性將荽劣。 在苐四十圖之再生輸出檢知部6 5 7中,藉由以比較器6 5 9比較再生輸出和再生輸出基準值6 5 8 ,即可檢知此 變劣狀態。此時,藉由磲片回轉角度檢知部335 ,即可 獲知相對角度*故可檢知異物6 5 5所存在之軌跡數之位 置及角度泣置0 D。此場合,藉由將光面位置及標籤印刷 角度之偏差記錄於磁性記錄層,SP可計算出標蕺印刷面上 之輪出雯劣部之角ΐ。此位置,將被與碟片標籤印刷角度 和再生輸出差劣部659 ,作成輸出麦劣標誌660a 、 660b 、660c ,而同時頚示於第六十四圖(b).中 之表示部16之視窗567中。因使用者可知悉何處有異 物655 ,故其具有可容易除去異物6 55之效果。若將 1〜7和A〜G之座標設於碟片2和顯示部之視窗56 7 上,則其除卻更為容易。第六十五圖所示者為對具體之視 窗567a 、567b之使用者提示錯誤訊息之例。在步 驟471a ,記錄軌跡Τη時,在步驟4 7 Id SP再生軌 跡Τη ,在步驟47 1 f檢查再生輸出檢知部657之輸 出是否超過基準值,若在基準值Μ下則進行步驟47 1 i ,若為第一次則在步驟4 7 1 j輸出第六十五圈之錯誤訊 息並莨行碟片之顯示清除,而排出碟片。然後回到步驟4 7 1 d ,若其输出位準在基準值Μ上則簧行記錄,若為以 下則進入步猱4 7 1 r ,令使用者再清除。到第三次,若 再生输出仍為回度,則進行步驟47 1 X ,廢棄軌跡Τη -6 5- 本紙法尺度通用中國國家標準(〇^)人4说格(210乂 297公嫠) (請先閱讀背&之注意事項再填寫本頁) ϋ^ιϊ --- ϊ -- . - I I Ί 一OJi - I 1 I 1-· - I , si I— - - * I . - I Η I .ml K :~. __I_ '4 6 2 0 3 9 a? _B7_五、發明説明() *以其它之軌跡之交錯資料(i nter 1 eave d a t a)重製資科,將資料記錄於新軌跡T n + t •而在 步驟47 1 z终结其紀錄苒生。又,如第三十一圖之波肜 2所示,於原盤蝕刻時,根據偏移信號,雯更信號之脈衝 幅度,而改要功率比時·如波肜1 5 1所示,將發生偏移u 電壓Δν s 。此情肜,可藉由第四十圖之方瑰圖中之波肜 整彤器3 8 a之限幅位準V s輸出部3 8 b所輸出之限幅 位準電壓,Μ及-¾限幅位準電壓間之差之偏移電壓△ V s之檢知而得知。如第三十八圖所示,藉由對照碟片物理 彤狀表5 3 2之偏移電壓配置資訊和偏移電壓檢知部6 6 0之角度位置或位址配置,檢知不法複製之磲片。 <第二簧施例> Μ下說明有關本發明之光記錄媒體之第二簧施例和本 發明之光碟再生装置之第二實施例。 在本發明中,係於光記錄媒體之CD等之光ROM碟 片之原盤製作時之記錄信號中,混入與通常不同之持殊防 止拷貝信號| Μ作成持殊之原盤,而防止複製者。此持..殊 之防止拷貝信號係肢表現為J: Ρ信.號。如第t十六圖(a )所示,在本發明之光記錄媒體之第二實施例之光碟上* 於持定圖揉之龜移CP信號配置責訊信號2 5 (亦可僅稱 為C P信號配置資訊)之後,設置為將眼孔圖漾之中心自 振幅中心,霞移既定之大.小,gjl將功率比自標準值(通常 為50%)偏移之CP信號724 (724a〜724s -6 6- (請先閱讀背由之ii意事項再填寫本頁) • ί- _ att B Γ - · *1^pn - I I ---1 I I J^IH I— nil - ^PFH - blt - s^i- - - - it— 11 ^^ptL 1-- - - 1 «^—rr -- -- m nl^i 本纸張尺度適用令國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公簸) 4 6? 4 6203 9 B7 M濟部中夬標準局買工消貪合作杜印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 ) 加 VX 記 錄 之 領 域 0 1 i 1 在 此 t 所 諝 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 者 » 係 指 相 當 於 再 生 装 置 1 1 請 1 j 於 再 生 時 之 類 比 波 肜 整 形 區 逸 中 之 ft .佳 Μ .幢. '位 準 ( 基 值 ) 先 聞 1 I 讀 1 之 部 份 0 背 1 1 又 * 所 謂 眼 孔 圈 樣 之 振 II 中 心 者 > 係 指 Μ 幾 何 學 測 定^ 之 1 ί i 所 得 之 眼 孔 圖 m 之 振 幅 方 向 之 中 心 者 0 事 項 1 I 再 1 又 t 亦 可 將 特 定 圖 樣 之 C P fa 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 ( 7 填 裝 寫 本 2 6 a 7 2 6 g ) 並 設 於 各 C P 信 號 7 2 4 a 〜 7 2 4 頁 ! I S 之 稍 ' » 刖 方 0 此 特 定 圖 樣 之 C P 信 號 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 ( 7 1 ! 2 6 a 7 2 6 S ) 作 為 再 生 之 時 間 性 順 序 係 可 使 其 i i 後 之 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 § 搌 幡 中 心 偏 移 既 定 量 所 成 之 C Ρ 1 訂 1 I 信 號 記 錄 領 域 更 明 確 者 0 當 其 與 上 述 C P 信 號 配 置 實 mti 7 2 5 丨一 同 被 設 置 時 僅 使 用 該 兩 者 中 之 一 者 即 可 0 又 > 1 1 僅 使 用 C P 信 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 檢 查 C P 信 Wu 之 有 無 之 1 I 第 實 施 例 ( 第 八 十 八 圖 第 八 十 九 圖 A 和 第 八 十 九 圖 B 線 ) 請 容 後 述 但 該 第 — 實 施 例 和 此 第 一 實 疵 例 在 僅 使 用 1 1 C P 信 5K 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 之 樣 態 係 不 相 同 0 ] i 第 > - + 九 圖 為 本 發 明 之 光 碟 再 生 装 置 之 兎 二 實 施 例 之 1 1 方 塊 圖 0 在 第 六 十 九 圖 中 係 具 備 有 第 七 十 -ί... 圖 ( a ) 1 1 所 示 之 特 圈 漾 之 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 和 C Ρ 信 號 先 1 I 行 信 號 7 2 6 a 7 2 6 S 之 雙 方 或 一 方 在 C Ρ 信 IK 配 i 1 置 資 訊 再 生 部 7 2 7 中 j 被 檢 知 後 9 將 R F 信 號 復 元 成 數 1 1 泣 信 號 時 之 .準 限 镉 器 7 2 8 之_$ a V S t 麥 化 成 對 應 月IJ 1 | 6 7 - i 1 本紙洗尺度通用中國國家橾準(CNS ) A4規格(210X29?公;* ) 4 β :' Ο 3 9 Β7 經濟部中央標牟局員工消費合作社印災 五、發明説明 ( ) ί 1 ] 述 既 量 之 量 之 偏 移 量 V S R 之 手 段 ; 和 當 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 1 1 1 心 § 振 幅 中 心 偏 移 既 定 量 之 偏 移 量 V Ξ R 之 再 生 信 號 無 1 丨 請 1 \ 法 被 正 確 地 再 生 之 場 合 1 判 斷 為 複 製 碟 片 1 而 停 止 其 再 生 先 S/1 1 1 或 者 m 讀 1 ♦ 將 出 之 資 料 ( 若 為 電 腦 程 式 ) 1 停 止 該 程 式 之 動 背 1 I 作 之 停 止 手 段 〇 之 | t I 在 第 六 十 九 圖 之 方 塊 圖 中 1 再 生 装 置 全 體 係 Η 7 4 7 事 項 1 丨 再 1 表 示 > 7 0 9 為 光 碟 * 7 1 0 為 光 拾 取 器 、 7 1 1 為 主 軸 填 寫 本 馬 達 t 7 1 2 為 類 比 波 彩 整 形 部 7 1 4 為 數 位 信 號 處 理 頁 ! 部 1 7 1 6 為 聚 焦 何 服 部 t 7 1 7 為 循 跡 何 服 部 7 1 8 1 1 為 回 轉 何 服 部 7 1 9 為 將 R F 信 號 復 元 為 數 位 信 號 時 之 1 1 棊 值 之 可 變 化 數 犇 復 元 部 7 2 〇 為 再 生 時 於德 知 持_定 1 訂 1 I 遍 樣 之 C P 信 號 配 置 資訊 7 2 5 或 C Ρ 信 號 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 a 7 2 6 S 時 之 將 前 述 棊 值 予 >λ -要 化 偏_ 移 .量 V R 之 1 1 制 甩 控 制 部 〇 1 1 光 碟 7 〇 9 係 被 主 軸 驅 動 器 7 1 1 所 回 轉 0 以 光 拾 ] 各V 取 器 7 1 〇 將 半 導 體 雷 射 , 集 光 於 光 碟 7 0 9 之 信 號 記 I 1 錄 面 > 將 來 g 信 號 面 之 反 射 光 之 強 度 以 光 電 二 極 體 等 m 換 1 ! 成 電 子 信 5K » 而 得 到 R F 信 號 〇 光 拾 取 器 7 1 0 藉 由 聚 焦 1 ί 词 服 部 7 1 6 t 控 制 成 常 時 對 焦 於 光 碟 7 0 9 之 信 號 面 f i 1 j 同 時 Μ 循 跡 伺 服 部 7 1 7 控 制 成 追 蹤 半 専 ΖΜ 體 田 射 光 之 狀 [ ί ι 態 者 0 I 1 R F 信 號 t 被 類 比 波 形 整 肜 部 7 1 2 所 整 形 其 波 形 1 1 1 而 成 方 形 波 復 以 數 位 復 元 部 7 1 9 復 元 成 數 位 信 號 * 1 I - 63 - 1 1 本纸張尺度適用中國圉家標準(CNS ) Α4規格UIOXU7公釐) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 蛵濟部中夬埭.草局員工消跫合作社印?!. 五、發明説明( ) 1 ί 1 I 再 數 位 信 號 處 理 部 7 1 4 作 數 位 信 號 處 理 而 再 生 成 原 1 1 1 信 號 0 眼 孔 圈 樣 之 中 心 要 接 近 振 幅 中 心 附 近 » 不 發 生 偏 移 1 i 請 1 f 電 壓 之 通 常 記 錄 之 領 域 之 眼 孔 圖 m 之 — 例 1 如 第 七 十 圖 先 Μ 1 I 讀 1 之 波 m 9 所 示 0 圖 之 縱 軸 表 示 反 射 光 量 3 其 上 m 所 揭 示 者 背 1 面 ! 為 大 光 量 又 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 振 幅 中 心 t HJ良.常太 1 之 注 i 意 I 之適.當温移霄..壓將之偏移 1 所 生 成 之 倌 0由 之 被 記 錄 領 域 之 % 1 I 再 1 眼 孔 圃 漾 之 一 例 係 如 第 七 十 — 圈 之 波 形 9 所 示 0 填 k 寫 本 裝 控 制 部 7 2 〇 1 除 控 制 再 生 装 置 全 體 之 動 作 外 依 被 頁 1 Ι 再 生 之 信 號 之 狀 況 可 將 數 位 復 元 部 7 1 9 於 復 元 時 之 基 1 1 值 即 限 幅 值 V S 對 應 記 錄 信 號 中 之 上 述 眼 孔 圖 m 中 心 i ! 之 偏 移 電 壓 實 行 將 之 雯 化 成 短 時 間 之 指 令 α it 控 制 部 7 1 訂 2 〇 可 為 第 -X. /、 十 九 圖 所 示 之 構 成 亦 可 為 使 用 C P U ( ! 1 中 央 演 算 處 理 装 置 ) 遵 從 第 t 十 七 圖 A 及 第 t 十 七 圖 B 1 1 所 示 之 流 程 將 之 預 先 程 式 化 而 使 之 動 作 者 0 又 作 為 控 ! 1 制 部 7 2 0 亦 可 使 用 汎 用 之 個 人 電 腦 〇 線 在 本 發 明 之 光 碟 7 0 9 中 > 設 有 可 記 錄 將 眼 孔 Hi 樣 之 1 I 中 心 自 振 幅 中 心 偏 移 所 須 之 適 當 量 用 之 信 號 之 記 錄 領 域 1 1 ( 第 — 記 錄 領 域 ) 0 此 光 碟 7 0 9 中 , 記 錄 有 使 眼 孔 圈 i i 樣 之 中 心 » 位 在 一 定 範 圍 之 振 幅 中 心 附 近 之 實 行 通 常 記 錄 [ I 之 領 域 中 t 並 揭 示 偏 移 C P 信 號 7 2 4 之 配 置 狀 況 Z 作 為 1 1 I 配 置 表 用 Z C P 信 B必 戒 配 置 寅 訊 7 2 5 * 或 持 定 圖 揉 之 C P 1 i 信 號 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 0 該 記 錄 有 信 號 7 2 5 或 7 2 6 之 領 i I 域 像 稱 為 第 二 記 錄 領 域 〇 再 生 該 特 定 圈 m 之 C P ί言 號 配 置 1 I - 6 3 - 1 1 本紙涑尺度通用中國國家標孪(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公* ) *4 6203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中夬標隼局員工消贫合作.杜印製 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 ] 實 訊 7 2 5 或 C Ρ 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 時 t 本 發 明 之 光 碟 再 生 1 1 1 装 置 將 判 Μ 其 是 否 為 於 該 特 定 圖 樣 之 後 r 記 錄 有 將 眼 孔 1 1 請 1 | 圖 樣 之 中 心 故 意 偏 移 某 程 度 偏 移 C P 信 (7占 7 2 4 之 物 品 先 VI ί I 讀 1 〇 為 正 確 再 生 此 C P 信 號 7 2 4 i 將 第 六 十 九 圖 之 光 拾 取 背 1 & | 器 7 1 〇 所 _ 出 之 R F 信 號 復 元 為 數 位 信 號 之 類 比 波 彤 整 、 之 | 意 I 形 部 7 1 2 1 具 有 以 下 之 構 成 0 類 比 波 整 形 部 7 1 2 審 1 ! 再 I 係 具 有 § 動 補 正 幅 回 路 7 3 1 t 及 設 於 其 反 饋 路 徑 ( 4 裝 寫 本 f e e d b a C k P a S 3 ) 上 之 加 算 器 7 3 1 a 介 頁 -— 1 由 此 加 算 器 7 3 1 a 對 其 印 加 偏 移 補 正 電 壓 而 使 限 幅 1 1 位 準 追 Μ 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 m 化 作 瞬 時 要 化 〇 藉 此 動 作 1 ! 其 具 有 可 對 m 比 自 動 補 正 限 幅 回 路 7 3 1 内 之位準限幅器 1 1Τ 7 2 8 之 回 答 速 度 更 快 之 偏 移 電 壓 之 變 化 之 效 果 〇 1 1 依 此 可 於 再 生 特 疋 圖 漾 之 信 後 繼 Μ 再 生 記 錄 有 1 1 將 眼 孔 圖 m 之 中 心 自 振幅中心篋移之..信號之領域 0 於 再 生 1 1 此 領 域 時 將 再 生 装 置 之 R F 信 號 復 元 成 數 位 信 號 時 之 限 ! 务V 幅 器 7 2 8 之 m 值 V S R 將 對 應 C P -信 5E 配 置 資 訊 7 2 1 | 5 或 C P 信號先行值_號 7 2 6 j 預先雙_ _化.偏移電壓Δ .y_. S 1 1 之 量 0 因 此 i 即 可 正 確 地 再 生 記 錄 有 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 g 1 1 搌 幅 中 心 偏 移 之 信 號 之 記 錄 領 域 ( 第 —" 記 錄 領 域 ) C 1 I 為 更 安 定 地 再 生 沒 有 偏 移 之 領 域 1 可 在 記 錄 偏 移 信 號 1 1 I 之 領 域 ( 第 一 記 錄 領 域 ) t 即 C P 信 號 7 2 4 之 記 錄 領 域 1 1 中 亦 記 錄 特 Ρ 1 圖 漾 之 先 行 信 號 如 此 則 更 理 想 Q 所 IS 之 1 ί 待 定 圖 樣 之 先 行 信 號 者 j 係 為 第 七 十 六 圖 之 C Ρ 信 號 7 2 I ί — 7 0 - 1 1 本纸張尺度通用中國国家標隼(CNS )成4规格(210XM7公釐) 462039 广 A7 B7 經濟部中夹標隼局員工消費合作汪印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 4 a 之 記 錄 領 域 尾 端 附 近 之 以 點 表 示 之 信 號 7 2 6 h 0 其 1 1 1 它 之 C P 信 號 7 2 4 b 7 2 4 C 之 記 錄 領 域 之 尾 1 1 請 ! | 端 附 近 i 亦 記 錄 有 同 樣 之 信 號 I 但 在 圖 式 中 係 省 路 之 □ 此 先 Μ 1 行 信 1 先 號 7 2 6 h » 相 對 於 先 行 於 各 C Ρ ίΙ 號 7 2 4 r 而 背 1 丨 預 ah 〇 偏 移 位 準 之 變 動 之 C P 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 a 、 7 2 6 b - 之 | t- I 等 > 係 先 行 於 接 m C P 信 號 之 通 常 倌 號 j 匝 再 次 預 .告 畜 1 I 再 1 偏 移 位 準 .之叟 -動 ( 透 元 者 0 換 言 之 1 此 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 寫 本 裝 h 係 揭 露 記 錄 有 C P 信 號 之 第 — 記 錄 領 域 已 接 近 終 了 之 頁 1 1 情 況 而 督 促 回 到 原 位 準 之 準 m 者 亦 SP 再 生 此 先 行 信 1 1 號 7 2 6 h 後 本 發 明 之 光 碟 再 生 装 置 將 使 令 —R 信- 號 1 1 元 為 數 位 信 號 時 之 限 幅 位 準 產 生 瞬 時 Z.大 幅 變 化 而 ί 訂 1 | 回 到 通 常 值 〇 藉 此 接 m 於 特 定 國 樣 信 號 後 將 再 生 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 位 於 振 幅 r|"f 心 附 近 之 記 錄 有 通 常 記 錄 之 領 域 t 1 1 且 使 復 元 再 生 裝 置 7 4 7 之 R F 信 (3办 5Κ 成 數 位 信 號 時 之 基 值 I 1 t 回 到 通 常 值 而 可 正 確 地 實 行 再 生 0 1 綠 令 復 原 R F 信 號 成 數 位 信 5Κ 時 之 基 值 產 生 m 化 之 特 1 | 定 圖 揉 信 號 為 任 意 之 信 號 皆 ftp 問 題 0 如 第 七 十 ^ - 圖 ( C 1 1 ) 所 示 在 持 定 位 址 A η 到 其 它 特 定 位 址 A π + 1 之 領 域 1 1 中 1 為 令 眼 孔 圖 m 之 中 心 位 於 振 幅 之 鏡 片 側 ( 反 射 率 較 高 1 1 側 ) , 而 將 基 值 偏 移 為 例 如 + 1 ; 或 者 1 如 第 七 十 六 圖 ( [ 1 d ) 所 示 j 為 使 眼 孔 圖 m 之 中 心 位 於 振 幅 之 鏡 片 之 反 面 側 1 1 ( 反 射 率 較 低 側 ) ) 而 將 基 值 之 偏 移 量 漏 移 例 如 — 1 之 情 1 1 形 > 皆 可 藉 由 此 第 七 十 圖 之 C Ρ 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 6 或 I 1 - 7 1 - ! 1 本·紙張尺度通用中國固家標辛 ( CNS ) A4規格(210X29?公釐) ^4 6 203 9 a? B7 經濟部中央標準局負工消f合作社印裝 五、發明説明( ) I I | 特 定 圖 樣 信 號 加 Μ 指 示 *5 或 者 \ 預 先 將 偏 移 方 向 定 為 一 方 I I I 1 而 將 偏 移 量 定 為 1 、 〇 〇 I I 請 I I 以 下 1 如 上 述 般 t 詳 述 有 關 在 具 有 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 心 自 先 聞 I I 振 幅 中 心 偏 移 之 信 號 領 域 ( 第 —. 記 錄 領 域 ) 之 本 發 明 中 , 讀 背 I A I 其 如 何 防 止 複 製 之 方 法 0 在 Π 可 寫 入 次 之 通 常 之 再 生 裝 之 | I 置 r 所 可 再 生 之 光 碟 媒 體 中 欲 複 製 ( 拷 貝 ) 本 發 明 之 光 事 項 I | 再 I I 碟 再 生 情 報 時 係 可 藉 由 再 生 装 置 再 生 本 發 明 之 光 碟 貝 填 V 爲 本 裝 訊 並 以 復 元 為 m 位 信 α占 5R 之 信 號 為 根 本 調 製 寫 入 光 線 1 I I 而 將 之 寫 入 上 述 之 光 碟 媒 體 0 I I 相 對 於 記 錄 有 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 心 自 振 幅 中 心 偏 移 之 信 號 ! I 之 記 錄 領 域 於 再 生 装 置 中 係 設 有 即使功率比產生變化 I 訂 t 亦 可 § 動 補 正 限 幅 位 準 之 § 動 補 正 限 幅 回 路 ( A U T 0 I S L E V E L S L I C E R ) 7 3 1 0 因 此 因 為 白 動 I I 補 正 限 幅 回 路 7 3 1 可 § 動 變 化 復 元 為 數 位 信 號 時 之 基 值 I I 因 此 可 將 之 當 作 正 確 之 通 常 信 而 加 Μ 再 生 0 因 此 被 I 線 複 製 之 光 碟 上 在 記 錄 有 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 心 自 振 幅 中 心 偏 移 I [ 之 信 號 之 記 錄 領 域 中 , 亦 被 寫 入 有 眼 孔 圖 m 中 心 幾 乎 在 振 I I Is 中 心 上 之 通 常 信 0 I I 再 生 装 置 7 4 7 ) 於 再 生 上 述 之 複 製 光 碟 時 > 若 為 正 I I 規 光 碟 ) 在 記 錄 有 將 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 心 振 is 中 心 偏 移 之 偏 移 I I I 值 1 例 如 V S + Δ V S 之 信 號 之 1己 錄 領 域 $ i 動 補 正 限 幅 I I 回 路 將 不 要 化 復 元 R F 信 號 為 數 位 信 號 時 之 基 值 V 5 R 1 I I 故 眼 孔 圖 m 中 心 幾 乎 位 在 振 幅 中 心 之 信 號 因 不 具 有 偏 移 > I I - 7 2 - I i 本紙法尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4规格(2I0X 297公釐) -462039 A7 Β7 五、發明説明() 將不會被判斷為正規碟片。再生装置747中因具有··在 記錄有將眼孔圖漾中心自振幅中心偏移之信號之記錄領域 •被當作正規領域之存在,而不正確再生時,即可停止再 生之停止手段;故可將再生或程式之動作即時停止。如此 *複製之光碟程式將無法再生或動作,而可防止不法再生^ 光碟被使用。 光碟上| 一般均記錄有自最內周向最外周嫘旋之信號 °在〇0 (compact d ί sk)等上,於其最内 周係設有讀入(re ad — in)領域,其内記錄有光磲 之索引實訊。在本發明之光碟中*若將哏孔圖漾中心自振 幅中心偏移之C P值蓋_之記^錄_ _領_域,如七十六圖之(a ) 所示,設於相當CD之逋入_頜域7 3 2内之最__內周J,則 验再生.開始時即迅速地.判__定其.是否為..複製..致_碟,故更加理 想。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -裝'13 I ----.--IH-*-—I I--II 1--I---.f ί II-I * 4 6 203 9 A7 Employee consumption cooperation of the Central Standard Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. She Yinlong B7 V. Description of the invention () Know the rack sync signal 654a, and measure the angle θ 1 at that time. At the same time, the same-phase reproduction code 652a "1 000 1 000 1 0 0 1" is also reproduced, and the inverse reproduction code "◦ 0 0 ◦ 0 0 0" is also reproduced. The data obtained by this measurement are compared with the physical disk ID table 532 by the comparison unit 5 3 5. If they are not consistent, the operation or output of the program is stopped by _out / action complete stop, 5 36. The same comparison operation is performed on the in-phase block 6 5 3 b at address A2.> The in-phase reproduction signal is compared with the synchronizing signal S ync letter bismuth S angle Θ 2 straw in-phase reproduction code 652 〃 1000010010001. The ID table is consistent. In the method of the sixty-third figure, first check whether the in-phase regeneration code 652 of the in-phase block is consistent. In order to copy this part, it must be accurate to 0 5T with a period T of 4 '3MH z * correctly Make a signal building adjacent to the track. If you do not use the CAV uranium engraved master disk, this accuracy cannot be achieved. At the same time, the angular position of the measuring frame Sync654a is On. Between the in-phase areas 653a and 653b are recorded by MCLV. If you want to make the angular position θ η consistent, you must record it with high precision CLV. That is,> To make the angle θ η and the in-phase reproduction code completely consistent, you must control the CLV κ to make the original disk with a precision of 0 · 5 Τ. In this situation, the current device cannot do this. So, by combining the angle θ η and the Tongbai reproduction code, the original disk can be prevented from being copied. The invention has a magnetic recording layer on the label surface of the CD. sixty-four As shown in (a), there are foreign matter such as garbage on the magnetic record slaughter I —- I-! I i-I 1-.-.--1 —r-i- 1. να) —----I ________ HJ (Please read the back & precautions before filling out this page) The method of this paper is applicable to China National Bicycle (CNS) A4 specifications (2! Ox: 297 mm) 462039 Miles Central Purangma staff elimination = 咋 .f ±.; P " A7 B7 Five 'invention description () 655a, 655b, 655c, its recording characteristics will be inferior. In the reproduction output detection section 6 5 7 of Figure 40, by The comparator 6 5 9 is used to compare the regeneration output with the regeneration output reference value 6 5 8 to detect this deterioration. At this time, the relative angle * can be obtained by the cymbal rotation angle detection unit 335, so it can be detected. Know the position and angle of the number of tracks of foreign objects 6 5 5 set to 0 D. In this case, by recording the deviation of the position of the glossy surface and the label printing angle on the magnetic recording layer, SP can calculate the Turn out the corners of the inferior part. At this position, it will be printed with the disc label printing angle and the reproduction output inferior part 659 to make the output wheat inferior signs 660a, 660b, and 660c. At the same time, it is shown in the window 567 of the display section 16 in the sixty-fourth figure (b). Since the user can know where there is a foreign object 655, it has the effect of easily removing the foreign object 6 55. If the 1 The coordinates of ~ 7 and A ~ G are set on the disc 2 and the window 56 7 of the display unit, so it is easier to remove them. The one shown in Figure 65 is an example of presenting an error message to the users of specific windows 567a and 567b. In step 471a, when the track Tn is recorded, in step 4 7 the Id SP reproduces the track Tn, and in step 471f, it is checked whether the output of the reproduction output detection unit 657 exceeds the reference value. If it is at the reference value M, step 471i is performed. If it is the first time, an error message of the 65th lap is output in step 4 7 1 j and the display of the disc is cleared, and the disc is ejected. Then return to step 4 7 1 d. If its output level is above the reference value M, it will spring record. If it is below, it will go to step 4 7 1 r for the user to clear again. To the third time, if the regeneration output is still the degree of return, proceed to step 47 1 X, discard the track Tη -6 5-the paper method standard is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (〇 ^) person 4 grid (210 乂 297 cm) ( Please read the notes on the back & then fill out this page) ϋ ^ ιϊ --- ϊ-.-II Ί 一 OJi-I 1 I 1- ·-I, si I—--* I.-I Η I .ml K: ~. __I_ '4 6 2 0 3 9 a? _B7_ V. Description of the invention () * Reproducing the asset section with other track interleaved data (inter 1 eave data), record the data in the new The trajectory T n + t • ends its record creation at step 47 1 z. In addition, as shown in wave 肜 2 of the thirty-first figure, when the original disk is etched, the pulse amplitude of the signal is changed according to the offset signal, and the power ratio is changed. As shown by wave 肜 1 51, it will occur Offset u voltage Δν s. In this case, the limiting level voltage outputted by the limiting level Vs output section 3 8 b of the wave shaper 3 8 a in the square rose chart of the fortieth figure, M and -¾ The detection of the offset voltage Δ V s of the difference between the limiting level voltages is known. As shown in the thirty-eighth figure, by comparing the offset voltage configuration information of the disc physical table 5 3 2 and the angular position or address configuration of the offset voltage detection unit 6 60, it is detected that it cannot be copied. Sepals. < Second spring embodiment > The second spring embodiment of the optical recording medium of the present invention and the second embodiment of the optical disk reproduction apparatus of the present invention will be described below. In the present invention, a recording signal at the time of making an original disc of an optical ROM disc such as a CD of an optical recording medium is mixed with a special copy-prevention signal that is different from the normal one | M to create a special original disc to prevent copying. This hold .. special to prevent the copy signal system is represented as J: P letter. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), on the optical disc of the second embodiment of the optical recording medium of the present invention, the CP signal is assigned to the tortoise in the fixed map, and the signal 2 5 (also simply referred to as CP signal configuration information), set the CP signal 724 (724a ~ 724a ~ 724s -6 6- (Please read the meaning of the ii and then fill out this page) • ί- _ att B Γ-· * 1 ^ pn-II --- 1 IIJ ^ IH I— nil-^ PFH-blt -s ^ i-----it— 11 ^^ ptL 1----1 «^ —rr--m nl ^ i This paper size is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 size (210X297) ) 4 6? 4 6203 9 B7 M The Ministry of Economic Affairs of the China Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China, cooperation, printing 5. Description of the invention () 1 1 1) Add the field of the VX record 0 1 i 1 The center one »refers to the equivalent of the regeneration device 1 1 please 1 j in the analog wave shaping area ft. .Building. 'Level (base value) first heard 1 I read 1 part 0 back 1 1 and * the so-called eyelet ring-like vibration II center > means 1 of the geometrical measurement of M ί i The center of the eyelet pattern m in the amplitude direction 0 matters 1 I then 1 and t can also set the CP fa advance signal 7 2 6 of the specific pattern 7 (7 fill-in script 2 6 a 7 2 6 g) and set it to each CP signal 7 2 4 a ~ 7 2 4 pages! A little bit of IS »» Square 0 CP signal advance signal 7 2 6 (7 1! 2 6 a 7 2 6 S) of this particular pattern can be used as a time sequence for reproduction. Then ii, the center of the eye pattern § 搌 幡 center shifted from the established amount of C P 1 Order 1 I The signal recording field is clearer 0 When it is set with the above CP signal configuration real mti 7 2 5 丨Use only One of the two can be 0 and> 1 1 Only use CP letter configuration information 7 2 5 Check the presence or absence of CP letter Wu 1 I First embodiment (eighty-eighth figure eighty-ninth figure A and eighth Nineteenth figure B line) Please mention later but the first embodiment and this first defect example are different only using 1 1 CP letter 5K configuration information 7 2 5 0] i number >-+ nine The figure is a block diagram 1 of a second embodiment of the optical disc reproduction device of the present invention. The block diagram 0 in the sixty-ninth figure is provided with the seventieth-... (a) 1 1 CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 and CP signal first 1 I line signal 7 2 6 a 7 2 6 S or one of the two in CP signal IK configuration i 1 Set information regeneration section 7 2 7 after j is detected 9 The RF signal is reset to the number 1 1 when the signal is turned on. The quasi-limit cadmium device 7 2 8 of _ $ a VS t Maihua into the corresponding month IJ 1 | 6 7- i 1 The standard for washing paper is compliant with China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X29? public; *) 4 β: 'Ο 3 9 Β7 Printing of Disaster Cooperatives of Employees' Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention () ί 1] The means of describing the amount of offset VSR of the given amount; and 1 1 1 heart in the eye pattern § The amplitude center offset of the given amount of offset V Ξ R The reproduction signal is not 1 丨 please 1 \ method is correct In the case of local reproduction 1 It is judged to copy the disc 1 and stop its reproduction. S / 1 1 1 or m read 1 ♦ Data to be produced (if it is a computer program) 1 Stop the movement of the program 1 I Stop means Zhi | t I in the block diagram of Figure 69. 1 The whole system of the playback device. 7 4 7 Matter 1 丨 Represent 1> 7 0 9 is the optical disc * 7 1 0 is the optical pickup, 7 1 1 is the mainFill in this motor t 7 1 2 for analog wave color shaping department 7 1 4 is a digital signal processing page! Section 1 7 1 6 is the focus of the service department t 7 1 7 is the tracking of the service department 7 1 8 1 1 is the rotation of the service department 7 1 9 It is 1 when the RF signal is restored to a digital signal. 1 1 The value of the variable is restored. 7 2 〇 It is set in the ethics at the time of regeneration. 1 Order 1 I CP signal configuration information of the sample 7 2 5 or C P signal advance signal 7 2 6 a 7 2 6 S When the above threshold value is given > λ-to change the offset _ shift. The amount of VR 1 1 Control system 〇 1 1 Disc 7 〇 9 is driven by the spindle 7 1 1 Turned 0 to pick up light] Each V picker 7 1 〇 The semiconductor laser is collected and recorded on the optical disc 7 0 9 Record I 1 Recording surface> In the future, the intensity of the reflected light on the g-signal surface will be photoelectric 2 The polar body is changed by 1! It becomes an electronic message 5K »and the RF signal is obtained. The optical pickup 7 1 0 is focused by 1 ί The word server 7 1 6 t is controlled to focus on the signal surface fi 1 j of the optical disc 7 0 9 at the same time and the tracking servo unit 7 1 7 is controlled to track the light of the half 専 ZOM body field. [Ί 者 0 I 1 The RF signal t is shaped by the analog waveform shaping unit 7 1 2 and its waveform is shaped 1 1 1 into a square wave complexed with a digital complex 7 1 9 The complex is transformed into a digital signal * 1 I-63-1 1 Family Standard (CNS) Α4 Specification UIOXU7mm) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs, China. Copies printed by employees of the Grass Bureau ?! V. Description of Invention () 1 ί 1 I Digital Signal Processing Department 7 1 4 Digital signal processing to regenerate the original 1 1 1 signal 0 The center of the eyelet ring pattern should be close to the center of the amplitude »No offset 1 i Please 1 f The eyehole map m of the area normally recorded for 1 f voltage — Example 1 As in the seventieth figure, first M 1 I Read the wave m 9 shown in 0. The vertical axis of the figure shows the amount of reflected light. 3 The top of m reveals the back of the person! For a large amount of light, the center amplitude center of the eye pattern is t HJ Liang. Note of Chang Tai 1 I is suitable. When the temperature is shifted, the pressure is shifted by 1. The 倌 0 is generated by the% of the recorded area. 1 I and 1 An example of the eye hole is shown in the waveform 70 of the seventieth circle. 0 Fill in the writing control unit 7 2 〇1 In addition to controlling the entire operation of the playback device, according to the status of the signal being reproduced by the page 1 Ⅰ, the digital restoration unit 7 1 9 can be used to restore the base 1 1 value when the restoration is the limit value VS Corresponding to the offset voltage of the above-mentioned eye pattern m center i! In the recording signal, a command for converting it into a short time is implemented. Α it Control unit 7 1 Order 2 〇 It can be the structure shown in -X. /, 19 Can also be Use the CPU (! 1 central calculation processing device) to pre-program according to the procedures shown in Figure 17A and Figure 17B1, so that the actor 0 acts as the control again! 1 Control unit 7 2 0 A general-purpose personal computer can also be used. 0 cable is used in the optical disc 7 0 9 of the present invention. ≫ There is a recording field that can record an appropriate amount of signal required to shift the eye hole Hi-like 1 I center from the amplitude center. 1 1 (Section — Recording Area) 0 In this disc 7 0 9 there is recorded the center that makes the eyelet circle ii »located near the center of the amplitude within a certain range. Normal recording [in the area of I and revealing the offset CP The configuration status of signal 7 2 4 Z is used as 1 1 I The configuration table uses ZCP. The letter B must be configured. 7 2 5 * or the CP 1 i which holds the map. Signal advance signal 7 2 6 0 This record has signal 7 2 5 Or 7 2 6 collar i I domain image is called the first 2 Recording area 〇 Reproducing the CP of the specific circle m ίSign configuration 1 I-6 3-1 1 The paper size is common Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 male *) * 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Employees of China National Standards and Technology Development Bureau cooperate in poverty alleviation. Du printed 5. Invention description () 1 1] News 7 2 5 or C P advance signal 7 2 6 o'clock t The invention's optical disc reproduction 1 1 1 device will judge MU its Is it that after the specific pattern r is recorded that the eye hole 1 1 please 1 | The center of the pattern is intentionally shifted to some extent by the CP letter (7 accounts for 7 2 4 items first VI ί I read 1 〇 to correctly reproduce this CP The signal 7 2 4 i will pick up the light pick-up back 1 of the sixty-ninth figure & | device 7 1 〇 The RF signal is a digital signal analog wave rounding, and the | I-shaped part 7 1 2 1 has The following constitutes 0 analog wave shaping Part 7 1 2 Review 1! Re I has § dynamic compensation amplitude circuit 7 3 1 t and adder 7 3 1 a on its feedback path (4 copybook feedba C k P a S 3) interface --- 1 This adder 7 3 1 a applies offset correction voltage to its offset to make the limit 1 1 digits follow the center m of the eye pattern m instantaneously. By this action 1! It has an automatic ratio to m Correction of the limiter circuit in the limiter circuit 7 3 1 1 The faster response speed and the effect of the change in the offset voltage 1 1 7 7 2 This can be followed by the reproduction of the letter of the Tektronix There are 1 1 shifting the center of the eye pattern m from the center of the amplitude .. The field of the signal 0 In the reproduction 1 1 This field is the time limit for restoring the RF signal of the reproduction device into a digital signal! Service V Amplifier 7 2 8 The m-value VSR will correspond to CP-Letter 5E configuration information 7 2 1 | 5 or CP signal leading value _ No. 7 2 6 j Pre-double _ _. Offset voltage Δ. Y_. S 1 1 Amount 0 So i can accurately reproduce and record the center of eye pattern g 1 1 Recording area of center-shifted signal (# —Recording area) C 1 I for more stable reproduction of areas without offset 1 Can record areas of offset signal 1 1 I (first recording area) t is the CP signal 7 2 4 in the recording field 1 1 and special P 1 is also recorded. The preceding signal of Tu Yang is so ideal. Q So IS 1 ί The preceding signal of the pending pattern j is C ρ of the 76th figure Signal 7 2 I ί — 7 0-1 1 This paper size is in accordance with China National Standards (CNS) into 4 specifications (210XM7 mm) 462039 Canton A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs, China National Standards Bureau, employee consumption cooperation Description of the invention () 1 1 1 4 a The signal in dots near the end of the recording field 7 2 6 h 0 its 1 1 1 Its CP signal 7 2 4 b 7 2 4 C End of the recording field 1 1 Please! | The same signal I is also recorded near the end i but it is the provincial road in the drawing Leading number 7 2 6 h »CP leading signals 7 2 6 a, 7 2 6 b-of | t with respect to the CP 1 leading to each C ΡΙί number 7 2 4 r with back 1 丨 pre-ah 〇 shift level -I, etc. are pre-announced before the usual j-number j turns received by the m CP signal. Report the animal 1 I then 1 offset level. No-movement (transparent element 0 in other words 1 this advance signal 7 2 6 writing Loading h is the first to expose the CP signal recorded—the recording field is nearing the end of the page 1 1 and the person who urged to return to the original standard is also SP to regenerate this advance letter 11 1 7 2 6 h after the optical disc of the present invention The regeneration device will make the order-R letter-No. 1 1 The limit level when a digital signal is a digital signal produces an instantaneous Z. Substantially changes and returns to 1 | Returns to the usual value. This takes the center of the reproduced eye pattern at the amplitude r after receiving a specific country-like signal || quot; f The area near the heart is recorded with the normally recorded area t 1 1 and the RF signal of the restoration regeneration device 7 4 7 (the base value I 1 t when the 5 signal is converted into a digital signal is returned to the normal value and the reproduction can be performed correctly. 0 1 green Make the restored RF signal into a digital signal with a base value of 5K to generate a special feature of 1 | Fix the map signal to any signal is ftp Problem 0 As shown in the seventieth ^-Figure (C 1 1) at the holding location A η to the other specific address A π + 1 in the field 1 1 of 1 is to make the center of the eye pattern m on the lens side of the amplitude (higher reflectance 1 1 side), and shift the base value to, for example, + 1; Or 1 as shown in figure 76 ([1 d) j The center of the eye pattern m is located on the opposite side of the lens of the amplitude 1 1 (lower reflectance side), and the offset of the base value is shifted. Seventy-figure C PF signal configuration information 7 2 6 or I 1-7 1-! 1 book · paper size common Chinese solid standard Xin (CNS) A4 specification (210X29? Mm) ^ 4 6 203 9 a? B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Cooperative Cooperatives, F. Cooperative Cooperative Fifth, Invention Description () II | Specific pattern signal plus M indication * 5 or \ The offset direction is set to one side III 1 in advance and the offset amount is set to 1, 〇 〇II Please II below 1 As above, t details how the IAI can prevent copying in the present invention (signal field: recording field) in the signal field (the field of recording) that shifts the center of the eye pattern from the first sight II. Method 0 in Π may The normal reproduction equipment written next time | I set r to be reproduced (copied) in the optical disc medium that can be reproduced The light matter of the present invention I | Re-II disc reproduction information can be reproduced by the reproduction apparatus of the present invention Fill in V for this message and modulate the writing light 1 II with the signal of the m-bit letter α occupying 5R as the fundamental modulation and write it into the above-mentioned disc medium 0 II. With respect to the recording, the center of the eye pattern is offset from the center of the amplitude. The signal of shifting! The recording area of I is set in the playback device even if the power ratio changes. I can also adjust the limiting level. § The moving compensation limit loop (AUT 0 ISLEVELSLICER) 7 3 1 0 White motion II Correction limit circuit 7 3 1 Base value II when digital signal can be changed dynamically Therefore, it can be regarded as the correct ordinary letter and it can be reproduced by adding 0. Therefore, the disc copied by the I line is also recorded in the recording field in which the signal that shifts the center of the eye pattern from the center of the amplitude I [is recorded. The eye pattern m center is usually on the center of the vibration II Is. 0 II playback device 7 4 7) When reproducing the above-mentioned copied disc > if it is a positive II gauge disc) It is recorded that the center of the eye pattern is vibrated to the center Offset III value 1 For example, VS + Δ VS signal 1 recorded area $ i Motion correction limit II circuit will not change the base value V 5 R 1 II when the complex RF signal is a digital signal So the eye diagram The signal whose m center is almost at the center of the amplitude because there is no offset > II-7 2-I i The paper method scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2I0X 297 mm) -462039 A7 Β7 Five 2. Description of the invention () will not be judged as a regular disc. The reproduction device 747 has a recording area in which a signal that shifts the center of the eye pattern from the amplitude center is recorded. It is regarded as a regular area. If it is not reproduced correctly, it can stop the reproduction; Therefore, the action of regeneration or program can be stopped immediately. In this way * the copied disc program will not be able to reproduce or operate, and it can prevent illegal reproduction ^ disc is not used. On the optical disc | Generally, a signal of mediation from the innermost periphery to the outermost periphery is recorded. On the 00 (compact d sk), etc., there is a read-in (re ad — in) field on the innermost periphery. There are recorded index news in Guangxi. In the optical disc of the present invention, * If the CP value of the center of the perforated hole is offset from the center of the amplitude, the _record ^ record _ _ collar _ field is set, as shown in (a) of the seventy-six figure, set on a considerable CD The most __inner perimeter J in the _maxillary region 7 3 2 will be tested and reproduced quickly. At the beginning, it will be judged __ to determine whether it is .. Copy .. To _ disc, so it is more ideal. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

、1T 經濟部中央樣*局貝工消f合作社印袈 置及成 OM 步 t 與圖 配 '構4, 在 η 否六 護y所 7 下。 〇 是 + 保 ο 序驟以 形 C 號 t 貝4程步 。情 信第 拷 7 個 之生之 fp 如 由序三 中再生 〇 C , 在程之 圖被再I2d 。 照 2 程使被 e 確 ο 式尉0流開其 1 , 4 程號4之將 明匕等7 止信 7B 式說 a_IK 防移序 圖程例 t S 步 製偏程 七腦舉 t a 在 複、 止十電 ’ c 1 ’ 明X停ir如訊 ofs 說 ο 式 第例資 TtE 细4程及 ,D 由誌Y 詳 7\A訊 C 藉標為 更序生 圖資為 , 之若 , 程再 -μ 之作 b j , 下 生片十 D 式 o S 應 以再碟 tc 程4t 對 訊製第,腦 7 η 片 資複之 am猱 e 碟 本紙法尺度適用中國國家橾準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ297公釐) ¾濟部中央樣隼局員工消f合fti±,;pt __B7 ___ 五、發明説明() 之(a)所示,從再生信號中> 可獲取CP信號配置資訊 725。在步驟740 e ,將檢知是否有C P信號配置實 訊7 2 5 ,若檢知不到則立即停止 > 故只有在具有C P信 號配置資訊7 2 5時,方進入步驟7 4 0 f : 在步驟740 f ,於偏移CP信號724之配置領域、 中,將開始檢查偏移CP信號724 >在步驟740s , 將殮查是否有CP信號724 |例如偏移之限幅位準是否 存在。若在此領龋'"中無有偏移之限幅位準•則進入步猱7 40 I·。若全部之檢查資料未终了 ,則回到步驟740 f |若全部之檢查資料已终了 *則進入步驟740 p ·並判 定為複製碟片。在步驟740 s若為YE S則進入步驟7 40h ,而在第六十九圖之正規碟片對照部73 3中•確 認偏移C P信號配置資訊7 2 5之資料,與物理性之檢知 偏移CP信號724之振幅、周期T0、位址、角度位置 ,是否一致。 在步驟740 i對照•其结果若為0K則進入步驟7 40 j ,根據CP倌號配置資訊725,強制印加偏移電 壓AVs 。在步驟740 k ,檢查在CP信號配置領域中 是否產生錯誤或不正確之信號,在步驟74 0m ,於發生 一定Μ上之錯誤時|在步驟74 0 p即判定為複製碟片。 在步驟7 4 0 m ,若不發生一定Μ上之錯誤,則進入步驟 740η。若全部之檢査資料已告终了 ,在步驟740w 即令所謓出之電腦程式作動,若未終了,則回到步驟7 4 本紙法尺度適用中國國家標车(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之ίΐ意事項再填寫本頁), 1T Central Ministry of Economic Affairs, Bureau of Industry and Engineering, Cooperatives, Cooperative Cooperatives, and OM Steps t and Figures' 4, under η No Liuhuo 7. 〇 Yes + 保 ο The sequence is 4 steps in the shape of C number t. If the fp of the 7th life of the love letter is reproduced as 0 C from Sequence 3, the map in Cheng is re-I2d. According to the 2 course, the e is confirmed. The style is 0, the flow is 1, the 4 is the number 4 of the general dagger, 7 is the letter 7B, and the formula is a_IK. , 十 十 电 'c 1' Ming X Zingir Ru Xun ofs said ο formula first example TtE detailed 4 and, D by Zhi Y detailed 7 \ A news C borrowed the bid for a more orderly generated map data, if, Cheng Zai-μ's work bj, the next raw film ten D type o S should be re-disc tc Cheng 4t to the information system, the brain 7 η film is re-used am 纸 e disc paper method scale applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 mm) ¾ Fti ±,; pt __B7 ___ of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China 5. As shown in (a) of the description of the invention (from the regeneration signal), CP signal configuration information can be obtained 725. In step 740e, it will be detected whether there is a CP signal configuration real message 7 2 5, if it is not detected, it will stop immediately > so only if there is CP signal configuration information 7 2 5, then it proceeds to step 7 4 0 f: In step 740f, in the configuration field of the offset CP signal 724, it will start to check the offset CP signal 724 > in step 740s, it will check whether there is a CP signal 724. For example, whether the offset limit level exists . If there is no offset level in this “Caries”, go to step 7 40 I ·. If all the inspection data have not ended, go back to step 740 f | If all the inspection data have ended * go to step 740 p · and judge it to be a duplicate disc. In step 740 s, if it is YE S, proceed to step 7 40h, and in the regular disc comparison section 73 3 of the sixty-ninth figure • confirm the data of the offset CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 and the physical detection Whether the amplitude, period T0, address, and angular position of the offset CP signal 724 are consistent. Contrast in step 740 i • If the result is 0K, proceed to step 7 40 j, and configure the information 725 according to the CP , number to force the offset voltage AVs to be applied. In step 740k, it is checked whether an error or incorrect signal is generated in the field of CP signal configuration. In step 74m, when an error on a certain M occurs, it is determined as a duplicate disc in step 740p. At step 740 m, if no error on a certain M occurs, proceed to step 740n. If all the inspection data has been completed, the computer program will be activated at step 740w. If not, go back to step 7 4 This paper method applies the Chinese National Standard Car (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ( (Please read the intentions on the back before filling out this page)

經濟部中央標.a.局員工消費合作社印及 ,462039 r A7 B7 五、發明説明()Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A. Printed by the Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives, 462039 r A7 B7 V. Description of Invention ()

Of。 在步驟740 p若判斷為複製碟Η 1在步驟740q ,g卩將"複製碟片”之訊息顗示於頭示部7 4 1 3其次· 在步驟740s ,排出碟片,在步驟740 t ,蓠行程式 之動作停止及資料之輸出停止,在步驟74 0 u則停止全 部動作。在此,說明有關步驟7 4 0 k發生錯誤之理由。 如第t十六圖之(a)所示之CP信號724a 、724 b ,當漏移電壓#^時間内大幅雯化時1自動補正限幅回 路7 3 1之反饋控制之回答速度將不追随,因此在通常之 回路中將發生錯誤。 ' 惟·本發明之第二實施例之埸合|藉由第七十六圖之 (a )之塥移C P信號配置.,貢訊7 2 5或C上先行信號7 26a 、726b、726c ‘ . ·,可預先知嘵 CP 信 號之偏移電壓將變化之情事。根據此先行資訊,第六十九 圖之偏移量補正信號發生部7 2 9 ,將把偏移補正信號△ V s |加算於自動補正限幅回路7 3 1之限幅位準V s輸 出部73 0之反饋路徑中。因此•在C P信號724之開 始荽化點,藉由加入偏移補正信號AV s ,在加有偏移△ V s之值中,瞬時,限幅位準V s將產生要化*而可無誤 並正常地再生CP信號724。在正規製造之碟片709 上1於碟Η之信號槽中,係加入有特定之功率比,例如5 〇:50、30 : 70 、70 : 30之功率比,玟如第t 十六圖之(a) ( b ) (c)所示,於再生時,限幅電壓 -7 5 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標丰(CNS ) A4現格(210X29?公釐) --------------1T------# (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 4 6 203 9 B7 經濟部中央標嗥局—工消f合作社印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 1 中 將 加 入 偏 移 電 壓 f 而 發 生 正 常 之 V V S + Δ V S ! 1 i V S 一 Δ V S 之 涸 限 幅 電 壓 0 I | 請 1 | 因 此 1 在 第 ·> - 十 九 圖 之 第 二 簧 施 洌 1 根 據 偏 移 C P 信 先 Μ I j 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 或 C P 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 1 對 限 幅 電 壓 添 讀 背 1 1 邡 正 規 之 偏 移 信 號 i 即 可 不 發 生 錯 誤 而 再 生 之 0 第 六 十 九、 之 1 1 圖 中 * 方 塊 7 2 5 7 3 4 S 7 3 6 σσ 只 示 現 信 號 或 實 料 事 項 1 I 再 1 1 之 種 類 1 而 非 回 路 等 〇 在 正 規 碟 片 對 照 部 7 3 3 S 於 C Ρ -»ν· 寫 本 裝 信 號 配 置 -¾¾. 訊 ? 2 5 之 既 定 位 址 7 3 6 之 位 置 上 將 藉 由 頁 1 I 偏 移 量 補 正 信 發 生 部 7 2 9 對 昭 /S %"» 在 被 加 入 既 定 之 偏 移 1 1 電 壓 Δ V 3 之 信 號 之 位 置 上 是 否 有 產 生 來 g 錯 誤 信 號 檢 1 1 知 部 7 3 8 之 錯 誤 信 號 0 又 在 正 規 碟 Η 對 m 部 7 3 3 t 1 订 將 確 認 正 常 信 號 碼 是 否 被 從 數 位 復 元 部 7 1 9 中 再 生 0 ( I 若 為 正 規 碟 片 其 對 昭 CHS-» 结 果 正 確 故 繼 壤 再 生 〇 若 是 對 照 1 1 结 果 不 正 確 時 則 從 再 生 / 程 式 停 止 部 7 3 9 送 出 停 止 信 1 ί 號 而 停 止 再 生 信 5Κ 之 輪 出 或 停 止 程 式 之 動 作 0 不 法 複 1 糸 製 之 碟 片 1 因 無 法 從 正 規 碟 片 7 0 9 之 再 生 資 料 中 複 製 偏 I 1 移 電 壓 ( Μ 法 正 確 拷 貝 ) 於 記 錄 於 C Ρ 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 ί I 2 5 中 之 既 疋 位 址 位 置 中 t 並 Μ 有 既 疋 電 壓 之 存 在 0 1 1 因 此 1 於 第 十 九 圖 之 正 規 碟 片 對 照 部 7 3 3 中 I 藉 I I 由 對 照 所 測 得 之 碥 移 電 壓 ( 物 裡 值 ) 1 和 C P 配 置 資 訊 7 1 I 2 5 所 示 現 之 偏 移 電 壓 ( 邏 輯 值 ) > 即 可 識 別 不 法 碟 Η 0 1 1 又 j Μ * ^ 十 九 圖 之 自 動 補 正 限 幅 回 路 7 3 I j 在 通 常 腙 移 1 1 電 壓 較 大 時 1 其 可 追 蹤 之 動 作 頻 率 t 將 降 低 至 偏 移 補 正 控 1 I - 7 6 - 1 1 本紙法尺度通用中國國家橒準(CMS ) A4規格(210X 297公釐) 462039 B7 經濟部中夬榡a局員工消f合咋包印复 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 1 制 之 回 答 頻 錄 f 0 程 度 0 如 第 七 十 1 - 圖 ( a \ 所 示 1 於 再 1 I 1 生 偏 移 電 壓 較 高 部 份 和 通 常 之 領 域 時 t 藉 由 設 疋 成 在 f 0 I I 請 ] | >λ 上 之 頻 率 t 偏 移 電 壓 即 發 生 雯 fh 1 可 將 白 動 補 正 之 限 幅 閱 1 1 讀 1 位 準 固 定 在 偏 移 電 壓 較 高 之 方 向 背 1 t£r I 因 此 / 通 常 偏 移 值 之 領 域 t 將 以 比 通 常 為 高 之 限 II 位、 之 注 i 意 I 準 而 被 限 幅 0 若 為 ΙΕ 規 碟 片 » 在 此 較 高 偏 移 電 壓 下 發 生 % 1 1 再 1 * 限 幅 之 情 形 時 * 因 係 記 錄 成 可 再 生 正 規 信 號 者 t 故 不 發 生 填 裝 寫 本 錯 誤 Q 頁 1 惟 在 只 取 出 正 規 碟 片 之 資 料 信 號 之 不 法 複 製 之 碟 片 1 1 上 因 無 法 複 製 偏 移 電 壓 從 C P 信 號 領 域 中 將 不 發 生 1 1 偏 移 電 壓 而 >1 通 常 之 限 幅 位 準 加 限 幅 〇 因 此 正 規 信 ί 玎 號 將 不 被 再 生 而 發 生 錯 誤 在 第 十 九 圖 Z 正 規 碟 片 對 昭 1 i 部 7 3 3 將 判 定 其 為 不 法 複 製 碟 片 而 停 止 動 作 0 又 如 ! ί 第 七 十 /、 圖 ( a ) 所 示 藉 由 設 置 + s 0 、 一 之 三 種 先 行 I 1 信 α办 成 7 2 7 a 7 2 6 h 7 2 6 b ( 先 行 信 號 2 6 a 1 線 2 6 b 及 2 6 h ) 則 可 預 知 下 一 機 架 同 步 信 號 之 資 料 之 1 I 限 幅 位 準 » m 由 將 此 偏 移 電 壓 Δ V S 介 Μ 第 六 十 九 圖 之 1 1 反 饋 路 徑 上 所 設 之 加 算 器 7 3 1 a t 將 之 加 * 於 白 動 補 正 ! ί Ρ艮 幅 回 路 7 3 1 之 反 饋 信 號 上 1 則 可 在 瞬 間 將 之 設 疋 荽 更 1 I 為 正 確 之 限 幅 位 準 〇 1 1 因 此 1 即 使 正 規 碟 片 之 限 幅 位 準 Μ 較 Β 動 補 正 限 幅 ί f 回 路 7 3 1 之 追 Μ 頻 率 更 高 之 頻 * 而 變 動 時 因 其 涇 常 1 1 為 規 定 於 正 規 碟 片 中 之 + 0 一 之 限 幅 為 準 所 限 幅 故 1 j - 7 7 - ί 1 水紙張尺度適用中國S家標丰(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) A7 4 6 203 9 B7 五、發明说明() 可無誤地再生正確之信號。 通常,複製業者係藉由取出CD — ROM之"101 ’’等之邏輯信號,並將該邏輯信號記錄於原盤|而製作出 原盤,並大量製造複製磲片。K此邏輯信號位準製作複製 碟片時,偏移電壓將不被拷貝。因此,在各個偏移CP信、 號之記錄領域中,在偏移電壓不箜化之情形下,碟片原盤 被複製。一方面* CP先行信號726之資料,將整個被 拷貝到不法複製之'原盤中。將複製原盤装填於再生裝置| 而如第七十六圖ia)所示,再生+之CP先行信號72 6 a時•如第七十六圖(c h所示,限幅器7 2 8之限蝠 位準將上昇至+方向。複製碟片中因未記錄偏移電壓|如 第七十六圖(b)所示•將雯成無偏移之眼孔圖樣,而限 幅器7 2 8之限幅位準不在中心上故,正常之信號將不被 輸出。 惟,本發明之第二賁施例,係根據C P信號配置資訊 7 2 5或C P先行信號72 6 *將限幅位準強制地設定於 +方向。因此,錯誤之數位信號自第六十九圖之自動補正 限幅回路7 3 1被輸出,在正規碟片對照部7 3 3即判定 其為複製之碟片。記錄有將眼孔圖樣中心自振幅中心偏移 之信號之靥移C P信號記錄領域1藉由使記錄等化量愛化 •因將先雯化脈衝幅度,即功率比,故可藺翬地製作。 如第t十一圖之波形(1)所示,以周期TO使功率 比控制信號楚化時,若為負位準•如第t十二圖所示.記 -73- 本紙汝尺度通用中國國家標隼(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) (請先知讀背面之:>£意事項再填寫本頁) b I —^K 11^1 nin _ 1 ^i^i— _ - 1 —LI m^i ^^^1— .-¾ 經濟部中夬標隼局員工消斧合作社印策 4 6 203 9 A7 Β·7 經濟部中央標革局員工消斧合作社ίρ^ 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 | 錄 等 化 量 將 增 大 〇 之 後 * 則 變 成 第 七 十 一 圖 ( 2 ) 之 記 錄 1 ί 1 波 形 般 之 功 率 比 t 如 第 七 十 —— 圖 ( 3 ) 之 記 錄 波 肜 所 示 t 1 I 請 I 1 照 射 於 玻 璃 板 上 之 光 致 抗 蝕 劑 上 之 雪 射 光 之 照 射 時 間 將 縮 先 1 I 短 如 第 七 十 圖 之 肜 狀 圖 ( 4 ) ί 5 ) 所 示 « 將 彤 成 功 讀 背 1 1 面 I 率 比 較 小 r 亦 即 軌 跡 方 向 之 深 度 為 較 短 之 λ / 4 之 信 號 fS ^ 之 注 i 意 I 0 如 第 七 十 — 圖 ( 5 ) 所 示 , 再 生 淺 信 號 槽 時 > 反 射 光 量 審 1 1 再 1 > 之 減 低 情 彤 荽 少 , 故 可 得 到 第 七 十 一 圖 之 波 肜 ( 6 ) 般 之 裝 量 *> 寫 本 反 射 光 之 r|*? 心 換 到 向 正 方 向 上 之 信 號 如 第 七 十 — 圖 I 1 1 之 波 形 ( 9 ) 所 示 1 可 獲 得 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 心 向 振 福 之 鏡 面 1 1 側 m 反 射 率 較 高 側 偏 移 偏 移 電 壓 厶 V Ξ 程 度 之 信 號 0 1 此 時 第 十 九 圖 之 公 知 之 § 動 補 正 限 幅 回 路 7 3 1 1 訂 將 作 動 將 限 幅 位 準 自 動 補 正 為 於 限 幅 位 準 V Ξ 中 加 入 偏 [ 1 移 Δ V S 之 V S + Δ V S 0 此 狀 態 % 揭 示 於 第 ΐ 十 一 圖 之 1 1 波 形 ( 7 ) 0 若 將 調 製 信 號 之 再 生 同 步 信 號 之 周 期 視 為 T 1 1 i 如 第 七 十 — 圖 之 波 彤 ( 9 ) 所 示 其 將 kk 3 Τ 之 信 號 位 ί 線 準 加 Η 限 幅 汝 可 獲 得 第 十 — ΓΒΤ 國 { 8 ) 般 之 3 Τ 之 正 確 1 1 脈 衝 幅 度 之 數 位 信 號 輸 出 〇 如 此 » + Δ V S 之 偏 移 壓 將 1 1 發 生 於 限 ΐ畐 器 7 2 8 上 〇 相 反 地 1 若 將 記 錄 等 化 值 即 [ 1 1 〇 〇 1 量 受 小 , 如 第 七 十 二 圖 所 示 功 率 比 將 變 大 * 1 I 田 射 光 之 照 射 時 間 亦 將 要 長 , 而 於 軌 跡 方 向 上 將 形 成 較 長 1 1 1 之 信 號 槽 0 於 再 生 功 率 比 較 大 之 信 號 槽 時 1 將 可 獲 得 如 第 1 1 七 十 六 圖 ( d ) 所示之眼孔圖樣中心之偏移電壓 1 向 負 方 1 1 向 即 振 幅 鏡 面 之 相 反 側 T 亦 即 功 率 較 低 側 * 備 移 偏 移 電 1 I - 7 9 一 ! 1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210X29?公釐) '4 6203 9 A7 B.7 經濟部中央標準局員工消貧合作社印袈 五、發明説明( ) 1 1 1 \ 壓 - Δ V S 之 信 號 0 如 此 1 記 錄 有 將 眼 孔 圖 漾 中 心 g 振 幅 ! 1 1 中 心 偏 移 約 偏 移 電 壓 Δ V S 之 偏 移 C P 信 號 7 2 4 之 c P 1 1 請 1 1 信 號 記 錄 領 域 » 即 使 將 記 錄 用 m 射 光 之 動 力 作 既 定 樣 態 之 先 VI I | 讀 1 化 1 亦 可 藺 單 地 製 作 背 1 ir | 如 第 t 十 二 圈 所 示 ) 若 記 錄 雷 射 光 之 動 力 較 小 1 SP 使k 之 注 I 意 1 使 用 通 常 之 記 錄 動 力 所 使 用 之 適 當 記 錄 等 化 量 i 信 號 ft 亦 事 項 1 I 再 1 -5c 小 α 若 再 生 該 較 小 信 0|£ 5K 槽 1 全 體 之 光 反 射 量 將 增 大 } 而 填 裝 ... •"V — 寫 本 可 獲 得 如 第 七 十 — 岡 ( 6 } ( 9 } 般 之 眼 孔 圖 揉 中 心 偏 移 頁 ί 1 向 振 幅 之 鏡 面 側 W 反 射 率 較 荀 側 之 信 號 0 反 之 r 若 記 錄 1 1 動 力 較 大 如 第 七 十 二 Μ 所 示 m 使 使 用 通 常 之 記 錄 動 力 1 ! 所 使 用 之 適 當 記 錄 等 化 量 信 d占 5K 槽 亦 變 大 0 而 再 生 較 大 信 1 訂 號 槽 時 反 射 光 量 將 變 小 而 可 獲 得 第 七 十 - 圖 ( d } 般 1 I 之 眼 孔 圖 漾 中 心 向 振 幅 之 鏡 面 側 之 相 反 側 ( 反 射 率 較 低 側 1 i ) 偏 移 偏 移 電 壓 — Δ V S 之 信 號 0 記 錄 動 力 和 記 錄 等 化 量 1 1 所 影 響 之 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 心 和 振 幅 中 心 之 關 係 之 變 化 之 模 式 1 係 如 第 七 十 二 圖 所 示 〇 其 横 軸 為 記 錄 等 化 量 其 量 越 大 則 1 1 記 錄 脈 衝 幅 度 越 短 1 亦 即 功 率 比 越 小 〇 m 铀 為 眼 孔 圖 樣 中 t 1 心 至 振 幅 中 心 偏 移 之 偏 移 量 亦 即 將 偏 移 量 △ V S 以 振 幅 1 1 正 規 化 並 以 百 分 率 表 示 者 0 若 使 功 率 比 控 制 信 號 變 小 則 1 Ι 眼 孔 圖 樣 之 中 心 將 向 高 反 射 率 m 偏 移 t 故 偏 移 電 壓 Δ V S 1 1 在 正 方 向 上 雯 大 0 記 錄 動 力 係 依 ( a ) ( b ) ( C ) 之順 1 I 序 大 Q 若 將 ( a ) 之 記 錄 動 力 現 為 1 0 » 則 ( b ) 為 1 1 1 1 而 ( C ) 為 1 2 C 令 記 錄 動 力 及 功 率 比 Μ 化 之 i | - 80 - ί 1 本紙法尺度適用ts國家標率(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公釐) 經濟部t央標毕局員工消贫合作.社印¾ '46 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() 情況下之波形,係如第八十圃之波形1〜·7所示。JJJJ此, 若令雷射光動力雯化,則須要脈衝椹度之補正.其相同性 變劣。若經由巧妙之製造’如波形5所示,限幅位準將被 補正漏移量之程度’而輸出ί皮彩6般之數為信號此場含 ,因相同率菱劣,故複製甚困難。 桌"t十二圈所不者為可在纪錄途中赛化.等.化量戎記錄 動力之原盤記錄装置之一例。第七十三圖中,原盤記錄装 置之全體係以7运1表不’ 70 1為記錄用雷射,702 為光調製器’ 7 0 3為鏡(U ’ 7 04為鏡頭驅動器,7〇 5為塗布有光致抗蝕劑705a之玻璃板,706為主軸 馬達,707為信號源,721為記錄等化器.722為 控制部。至於焦點控制用之雷射光束光學系或記錄用雷射 光束光學系之光束擴大器等在圖中係予以省略。Of. If it is determined in step 740p that the disc is to be copied 1 In step 740q, g 卩 will display the message " copying disc " in the header section 7 4 1 3 Secondly · In step 740s, eject the disc, and in step 740t蓠 The stroke-type operation stops and the data output stops. At step 74 0 u, all operations are stopped. Here, the reason for the error at step 7 4 0 k will be explained. As shown in (a) of Figure 16 The CP signals 724a, 724b, when the leakage voltage # ^ is greatly reduced in time, the response speed of the feedback control of the auto-limiting loop 7 3 1 will not follow, so errors will occur in the normal loop. However, the combination of the second embodiment of the present invention. By shifting the CP signal configuration of (a) in Figure 76, the advance signal 7 26a, 726b, 726c 'on Gong Xun 7 2 5 or C. · It can be known in advance that the offset voltage of the CP signal will change. According to this advance information, the offset correction signal generating section 7 2 9 of Fig. 69 will add the offset correction signal △ V s | In the feedback path of the limit level V s output section 73 0 of the automatic correction limiter circuit 7 3 1. Therefore, in the CP letter At the beginning of No. 724, by adding the offset correction signal AV s, in the value added with the offset Δ V s, the instantaneous, limiting level V s will produce a change *, and can be reproduced without error and normally. CP signal 724. On the disc 709 of the regular manufacturing, the signal slot of 1 on the disc is added with a specific power ratio, such as 50:50, 30:70, 70:30, as shown in the t As shown in (a) (b) (c) of the sixteenth figure, the limiting voltage is -7 during regeneration. 5-This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 spot (210X29? Mm) --- ----------- 1T ------ # (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) 4 6 203 9 B7 V. Description of the invention () 1 1 1 1 The offset voltage f will be added and normal VVS + Δ VS! 1 i VS-Δ VS limit voltage 0 I | Please 1 | Therefore 1 -The 19th figure of the second spring application 1 is based on the offset CP letter Μ I j configuration information 7 2 5 or CP first No. 7 2 6 1 Add read back to the limiting voltage 1 1 邡 Regular offset signal i can be reproduced without error 0 69th, 1 1 In the picture * Box 7 2 5 7 3 4 S 7 3 6 σσ shows only the current signal or actual items 1 I then 1 1 of the type 1 instead of the circuit, etc. 0 in the regular disc comparison section 7 3 3 S in C ρ-»ν · Write this signal configuration-¾¾. News? 2 5 The position of the existing address 7 3 6 will be corrected by the page 1 I offset correction letter generator 7 2 9 to / S% " »after adding the signal of the predetermined offset 1 1 voltage Δ V 3 Check if there is a g error signal at the position. 1 1 Know the error signal of the 7 3 8 0 again on the regular disc. For the m section 7 3 3 t 1 will confirm whether the normal signal code has been restored from the digital recovery section 7 1 9 Replay 0 (I if regular disc To Zhao CHS- »The result is correct, so the succession of regeneration is 0. If the result is not correct, 1 will send a stop letter 1 from the regeneration / program stop section 7 3 9 to stop the regeneration of the letter 5K or stop the program. 0 Illegal duplicate 1 The disc 1 cannot be copied from the reproduction data of regular disc 7 0 9 Partial I 1 shift voltage (M method is correctly copied) is recorded in the C P signal configuration information 7 ί I 2 5 In the address location, t and M have the existence of the existing voltage. 0 1 1 Therefore 1 in the regular disc comparison section of the nineteenth figure 7 3 3 I by II by the migration voltage measured by the comparison (value in goods) ) 1 and CP configuration information 7 1 I 2 5 Offset voltage (logical value) as shown above > Illegal discs can be identified 0 1 1 and j Μ * ^ 19th figure of automatic correction limit circuit 7 3 I j is usually traceable 1 1 when the voltage is large 1 The operating frequency t will be reduced to the offset correction control 1 I-7 6-1 1 The paper method is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) 462039 B7 The staff of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of China Bureau a咋 包 印 复 5. Explanation of the invention () 1 1 1 1 The answer frequency record f 0 Degree 0 As in the seventy one 1-Figure (a \ shown 1 in the 1 and 1 1 higher offset voltage and In the normal field, t is set to f 0 II, please] | > The frequency t offset voltage on λ will occur. Fh 1 The limit of white motion correction can be read 1 1 Read 1 level fixed at the bias The direction of the higher voltage shift is 1 t £ r I. Therefore, the area of the usual offset value t will be clipped by the higher limit II than the usual value. % 1 1 occurs at this higher offset voltage 1 * In the case of limiting * Because the recording is a regular signal that can be reproduced t, no filling error Q Page 1 occurs, but the illegal copy of the data signal 1 1 which only takes out the regular disc data signal is impossible Copying the offset voltage from the CP signal field will not cause the 1 1 offset voltage and > 1 the usual limit level plus limit. Therefore, the regular letter 玎 will not be regenerated and an error will occur in Figure 19 Z The regular disc pair Zhao 1 i part 7 3 3 will determine that it is illegal to copy the disc and stop the action 0 Another example! Ί 70th /, as shown in Figure (a), by setting + s 0, one of the three types of antecedent I 1 letter α can be set to 7 2 7 a 7 2 6 h 7 2 6 b (forward signal 2 6 a 1 line 2 6 b and 2 6 h) then the data of the next rack synchronization signal can be predicted 1 I limiter Quasi »m by adding this offset voltage Δ VS to the 69th figure 1 1 adder 7 3 1 at the feedback path to add * to the white motion correction! Ί gen circuit 7 3 1 1 on the feedback signal can be set to 1 in a moment. I is the correct limit level. 0 1 1 Therefore 1 Even if the limit level of a regular disc M is adjusted and corrected, it is f. Loop 7 3 The frequency of chasing the frequency of 1 is higher than the frequency * Because it is usually 1 1 is the limit of + 0 in the regular disc, which is the limit, so 1 j-7 7-ί 1 Water paper scale Applicable to China S House Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) A7 4 6 203 9 B7 5. Description of the invention () The correct signal can be reproduced without error. Generally, a copying business takes a logical signal such as CD-ROM " 101 ', etc., and records the logical signal on an original disc | to make an original disc, and mass-produce duplicate discs. K This logic signal level will not be copied when making a duplicate disc. Therefore, in the recording fields of the offset CP signals and signals, the original disc is copied without the offset voltage becoming stable. On the one hand, the * CP advance signal 726 data is copied to the illicitly copied 'original disk. Load the duplicated original disc into the reproduction device | And as shown in Figure 76 (ia), when the CP advance signal of reproduction + is 72 6 a • As shown in Figure 76 (ch, the limiter 7 2 8 limit The bat level will rise to the + direction. Because the offset voltage is not recorded in the copied disc | as shown in Figure 76 (b) • Wen will be an eye pattern without offset, and the limiter 7 2 8 The limit level is not at the center, so normal signals will not be output. However, the second embodiment of the present invention is based on the CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 or CP advance signal 72 6 * The limit level is forced The ground is set in the + direction. Therefore, the erroneous digital signal is output from the automatic correction limit circuit 7 3 1 of the sixty-ninth figure, and it is determined that it is a duplicated disc in the regular disc comparison section. 7 3 Shift the signal with the eye pattern center shifted from the amplitude center to the CP signal recording field 1. By equalizing the recording amount, the pulse amplitude, that is, the power ratio, can be produced in advance. As shown by the waveform (1) in the t-th figure, when the power ratio control signal is turned into a period TO, if the negative level is negative The picture shows. Note-73- This paper is a standard Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) (Please read the back of the prophet: > £ the matter before filling in this page) b I — ^ K 11 ^ 1 nin _ 1 ^ i ^ i— _-1 —LI m ^ i ^^^ 1— .-¾ Employees of the China National Standards and Technology Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative Cooperative Press 4 6 203 9 A7 Β · 7 Central Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The revolutionary co-operatives of the staff of the Revolution Bureau ρρ ^ V. Description of the invention () 1 1 | The recording equalization amount will increase. After that, * will become the record of the seventy-first figure (2). Seventy-as shown in the recording wave of Figure (3), t 1 I, I 1 Please I 1 The irradiation time of the snow light on the photoresist on the glass plate will be shortened by 1 I, which is shorter than that in the seventy The diagram (4) ί 5) shows that «successfully read back 1 1 surface I rate is relatively small r, that is, the signal in the direction of the trajectory is shorter λ / 4 signal fS ^ Note i 0 As shown in the seventieth figure (5), when the shallow signal groove is reproduced > the amount of reflected light 1 1 and 1 > is reduced, so the wave of the seventy-first figure can be obtained (6) General loading * > The r | *? Of the reflected light of the copybook. The signal of the heart to the positive direction is shown in the seventieth—Figure I 1 1 shows the waveform (9). 1 The center of the eye pattern can be obtained. Mirror 1 1 side m High reflectance High side offset offset voltage 厶 V Ξ The signal of degree 0 1 At this time, the well-known §19 of the 19th picture is used to adjust the limiting circuit 7 3 1 1 The automatic correction is to add a bias to the limit level V [[1 shift Δ VS of VS + Δ VS 0 This state% is revealed in Figure ΐ 11 of Figure 11 1 Waveform (7) 0 If the regeneration signal of the modulation signal is regenerated The period is regarded as T 1 1 i as shown in the seventieth-the figure of the wave (9) which will be kk 3 Τ The signal bit ί line quasi plus Η limiter you can get the tenth — ΓΒΤ country {8} 3 TT correct 1 1 digital signal output with pulse amplitude 〇 so »+ Δ offset pressure will occur 1 1 at The limiter 7 2 8 is on the contrary. 1 If the recording equalization value is [1 1 001, the amount will be small, as shown in the figure 72. The power ratio will become larger. * 1 I The irradiation time of field light It will also be longer, and a longer 1 1 1 signal slot 0 will be formed in the track direction. At a signal slot with a higher regeneration power, 1 will obtain the eye pattern shown in Figure 1 76 (d). Offset voltage at the center 1 To the negative side 1 1 To the opposite side of the amplitude mirror T To the lower power side * Offset offset 1 I-7 9 One! 1 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 Specifications (210X29? Mm) '4 6203 9 A7 B.7 Employees' Poverty Alleviation Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs () 1 1 1 \ pressure-Δ VS signal 0 so 1 recorded the amplitude g of the center of the eye pattern! 1 1 center offset about offset voltage Δ VS CP signal 7 2 4 c p 1 1 Please 1 1 Signal recording area »Even if the recording power of m light is used as the first form of VI I | Read 1 and 1 can make a single back 1 ir | as shown in t twelfth circle) If recording thunder The power of light emission is small 1 SP Makes the note of k I Note 1 Use the appropriate recording equalization amount i signal ft that is used by normal recording power. Note 1 I then 1 -5c small α If the smaller letter is reproduced 0 | £ 5K The light reflection amount of the whole slot 1 will increase} and fill ... • " V — the manuscript can obtain the eye shift map like the 70th — Gang (6) (9} 1 The signal on the mirror side of the amplitude to the W side is more reflective than the signal on the opposite side. 0 If r is recorded, 1 1 The power is larger as shown in the 72nd M. Use the normal recording power 1! d accounted for 5K, the slot also became larger, 0, and the larger the letter 1 slot, the smaller the amount of reflected light will be, and the seventieth will be obtained.-((d) general 1 I eye pattern center is opposite to the mirror side of the amplitude Side (lower reflectance side 1 i) Offset offset voltage — Δ VS signal 0 Recording power and recording equalization amount 1 1 Mode of change in the relationship between the center of the eye pattern and the amplitude center affected 1 As shown in the figure 72, the horizontal axis is the equalization amount of the record, and the larger the amount is, the shorter the amplitude of the recording pulse is, and the smaller the power ratio is. 0 m The offset is also about to be offset △ VS with amplitude 1 1 Normalized and expressed as a percentage 0 If the power is made smaller than the control signal, 1 Ι The center of the eye pattern will be shifted toward the high reflectance m, so the offset voltage Δ VS 1 1 is greater in the positive direction 0 Recording power It is based on the order of (a) (b) (C). 1 I Order big Q If the recording power of (a) is now 1 0 »then (b) is 1 1 1 1 and (C) is 1 2 C. Power and power ratio Μ 化 的 i |-80-ί 1 This paper method is applicable to ts National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) Ministry of Economic Affairs t Central Standards Bureau staff poverty alleviation cooperation. Society print ¾ '46 203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention () The waveforms in the case are shown as the waveforms 1 ~ · 7 of the 80th garden. JJJJ Therefore, if the laser photodynamic force is to be cultured, it is necessary to correct the pulse amplitude. Its identity is deteriorated. If through clever manufacturing, 'as shown in waveform 5, the limit level will be corrected to the extent of the amount of leakage' and the output of 6 is a signal containing this field. Because the same rate is poor, it is difficult to copy. The table "twelve laps" is an example of the original recording device that can be used to record the game while recording. In the seventy-third figure, the entire system of the original disk recording device uses 7 to 1 and shows '70 1 as a recording laser, 702 as a light modulator, and 7 0 3 as a mirror (U '7 04 is a lens driver, and 7 0 5 is a glass plate coated with photoresist 705a, 706 is a spindle motor, 707 is a signal source, 721 is a recording equalizer, and 722 is a control unit. As for the focus control laser beam optical system or recording laser The beam expander and the like of the beam optical system are omitted in the figure.

以下,使用第t十三圖之方塊圈、和第八十七圖A、 第八十t圈B之流程圈,說明關於原盤之製作方法。在步 驟7 5 0 a ,通常會输人電腦钦體等之預先套設有防止拷 貝用程式之程式輸入資料,此外,在步驟7 05b ,CP 信號配置資訊7 2 5被輸入•在C P信號配置資訊處理部 7 9 0,將分割成控制信號及資料,此資料在混合部7 9 0 a中,將被與輸入資料相對照。一方面,控剌信號被送 至控制部7 2 2 .,而在既定位置,產生功率比控剌信號。 原盤製作装置之操作者將預先決定出是否將C P信號配置 資料725記錄於碟片之内周部(讀入區域),而以键盤 -8 1- 本紙尺度適用中國國家樣準(CNS ) ΑΌ見格(210X297公釐) ---------^.------1T------4 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) M濟部中央標準局員工消費合作社印^ 4 6 203 9 Λ7 Γ Α7 Β7 五、發明説明() _入者。在步驟7 0 5 c ,觀看此輸入實訊,檢查是否應 記錄於内周部|若為Y E S ,刖在步驟7 5 ◦ d將偏移C P信號配置資訊7 2 5和記錄資料•混合記錄於謓入部( read— i_n area) 0 其次I在步驟750e開始記錄實料。在步驟750 , f ,從偏移CP信號配置資訊725中,確認偏移信號紀 嬅領域,在步驟750s若為NO <則在步驟750 iM 通常之功率比加記錄。若為YE S則在步驟750h棍 據偏移CP信號配置資訊725 ,CP倌號發生部722 a將使送向記錄雷射之信號之功率比變化。如此,即可控 制雷射光之功率比及輸出•使偏移電壓要化成既定波形。 在步驟7 5 0 j ,全部資料未结束時,則回到步驟7 5 0 f ,若已结束,則在步驟750k ,檢査上述偏移CP信 號配置資訊7 2 5是否記錄於外周部,若為N0則在步驟 750p终了。若為YES ,則在步驟750m ·比較預 先程式化之偏移CP信號配置資訊•和實際上主盤記錄機 装置76 1所記錄之偏移CP信號之量、周期、配置偏差 等,並加以修正。在步猱750η ,於第ir十三圖所示之 原盤705之外周部705b中,設置偏移CP信號配置 實訊記錄領域,而記錄此修正資料。在主盤記錄機裝置7 6 1上,因係被從内周部向外周部簧行蝕刻,於記錄全部 之資料後·偏移之作成结果被做成實料。在記錄於外周部 之方式中,藉由記錄以前述資料實行修正之腙移CP信號 -82- 本紙乐尺度適用中圉國家標準(〇^)六4現格(2!0>< 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本f ) ^----------- 經濟部中央標丰局員工消f合作杜印¾ 462039 r A7 B7 五、發明説明() 配置資訊7 2 5 ,可具有大蝠提高原盤製作相同性之效果In the following, the method of making the original disk will be described using the square circle of the thirteenth figure, and the flow charts of the eighty-seventh figure A and the eighty-th t circle B. In step 7 5 0 a, the input data of a program for preventing copying is usually inputted into a computer. In addition, in step 7 05b, CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 is input. • In the CP signal configuration The information processing section 790 will divide into control signals and data. This data will be compared with the input data in the mixing section 790a. On the one hand, the control signal is sent to the control section 7 2 2. At a predetermined position, a power ratio control signal is generated. The operator of the original disc production device will decide in advance whether to record the CP signal configuration data 725 on the inner periphery (reading area) of the disc, and use the keyboard-8 1- This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) ΑΌ See the grid (210X297 mm) --------- ^ .------ 1T ------ 4 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) M Ministry of Standards Bureau Consumer Consumption Cooperative Association ^ 4 6 203 9 Λ7 Γ Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention () _ entry. In step 7 0 5 c, watch this input news and check if it should be recorded in the inner part. If YES, 刖 in step 7 5 ◦ d will offset the CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 and the recorded data.謓 入 部 (read_i_n area) 0 Second, I start recording the actual data at step 750e. In step 750, f, from the offset CP signal configuration information 725, confirm the offset signal period 嬅. If it is NO < in step 750s, then the normal power ratio plus recording is performed in step 750 iM. If it is YE S, according to the offset CP signal configuration information 725 at step 750h, the CP 倌 number generating section 722a will change the power ratio of the signal sent to the recording laser. In this way, you can control the power ratio and output of the laser light. • Make the offset voltage into a predetermined waveform. At step 7 50 j, if all the data is not finished, then return to step 7 50 f. If it is finished, then at step 750k, check whether the above-mentioned offset CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 is recorded in the outer part. If it is N0 ends at step 750p. If it is YES, then in step 750m, compare the pre-programmed offset CP signal configuration information with the offset CP signal amount, period, and configuration deviation actually recorded by the master recorder device 76 1 and correct it. . In step 750η, in the outer peripheral portion 705b of the original disk 705 shown in FIG. 13 of FIG. 13, the offset CP signal configuration is set to the field for recording the actual information, and the correction data is recorded. Since the main disk recorder device 761 is spring-etched from the inner periphery to the outer periphery, the results of all offsets are recorded after recording all data. In the method of recording in the outer part, the CP signal that is corrected by the aforementioned data is recorded by recording -82- This paper music standard is applicable to the national standard of China (0 ^) 6 4 (2! 0 > < 297 public Li) (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this f) ^ ----------- Staff Co-operation Du Yin, Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 462 039 r A7 B7 V. Description of Invention () The configuration information 7 2 5 can have the effect that the big bat improves the identity of the original production.

Ci 從信號發生部707中|產生特定圖漾之偏移CP信 號配置信號後,復使其記錄等化量要·話時|控制部7 2 2 將指示記錄等化器7 2 1之振蝠幅度控制部7 2 1 a >令 其爰化記錄等化量•亦即功率比。欲變化記錄動力Μ荽化 功率比時·控制部722將指示記錄用雷射70 1 ,令其 變化記錄動力。|^錄用雷射7 0 1 ,係包含有雷射元件和 動力調整元件•例如千擾器和Α0調製器等,使記錄用雷 射7 0 1本身之動力要化*或以動力調整甩元件荽化其動 力。記録等化器7 2 1保為可藉由外部指令切換等化童之 構成。 Μ上述之方法 > 記錄有將眼孔圖揉中心自振幅中心偏 移之信號之記鏵領域,可在不須%習知之原盤記錄裝置施 Μ大量改造之情形下,容易地形成。本發明之光碟除原盤 之記錄外,乃可藉由與習知之光碟完全相同之製造工程加 以製造,故可大量且廉價地生產製造。 本發明之設有防止拷貝程式之钦體,與設有防止拷貝 信號之光碟,和附有防止拷貝機能之光碟再生装置,因可 停止複製光碟之再生或钦體之動作,故在賁質上其確可防 止拷貝。此於光ROM領域中記錄有上述腐移C Ρ信號配 置資訊725之例|雖如第t十六圖所示,但如第七+八 圖所示,將此資訊以第t十九圖所示之R SA函數、或瀨 -83 - 本纸張尺度通用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0X297公釐) <請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) . I - - -- - 01 - - - - - ϋ - -- 1 - - ml ·- 1 —Ι1Λ ^~J 0¾ *-*Ci from the signal generating section 707 | After generating the offset CP signal of the specific picture, configure the signal to equalize the amount of time and time | The control section 7 2 2 will instruct the recording equalizer 7 2 1 to shake the bat. The amplitude control unit 7 2 1 a > equalizes the amount of the recorded data, that is, the power ratio. When the recording power is to be changed, the control unit 722 instructs the recording laser 70 1 to change the recording power. | ^ Recording laser 7 0 1, which includes a laser element and a power adjustment element • For example, a scrambler and an Α0 modulator, etc., the power of the recording laser 7 0 1 itself needs to be adjusted * or the throwing element is adjusted by power Transform its power. The record equalizer 7 2 1 is configured so that the equalizer can be switched by an external command. The above-mentioned method > The field in which a signal in which the center of the eye pattern is shifted from the center of the amplitude is recorded can be easily formed without a large number of modifications to the conventional master recording device. The optical disc of the present invention can be manufactured by the same manufacturing process as the conventional optical disc except for the record of the original disc, so it can be produced in large quantities and cheaply. The present invention is provided with a copy-preventing program, an optical disc provided with a copy-preventing signal, and an optical disc reproduction device with a copy-preventing function. The reproduction or reproduction of the optical disc can be stopped, so the quality It does prevent copying. This is an example of the above-mentioned corrupted CP signal configuration information 725 recorded in the optical ROM field | Although it is shown in figure t16, as shown in figure 7 + 8, this information is shown in figure t19 The R SA function shown, or Setase-83-This paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) < Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). I-- --01-----ϋ--1--ml ·-1 —Ι1Λ ^ ~ J 0¾ *-*

_ VK.__ I 462039 A7 B7 經濟部中央標"局員工消贤合作杜印复 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 I 圓 函 數 ( e 1 1 1 P t 1 C C U Γ V e U η C t ί 1 1 ί 〇 η ) 等 之 公 開 m 方 式 之 函 數 作 為 箪 方 向 函 數 並 加 以 暗 1 I 請 1 ί 號 化 * 並 記 錄 於 光 R 〇 Μ 部 或 光 碟 表 面 或 裡 面 之 磁 性 記 録 先 閱 1 ί 部 中 亦 可 〇 背 I 1 面 I 第 十 八 圖 所 示 者 為 測 量 光 碟 中 之 如 第 七 十 圖 ( a ^ 之 注 1 意 1 ) 所 示 之 偏 移 信 D邊 方 式 之 C Ρ 信 號 或 第 八 十 四 圈 ( a ) 事 項 ί I 再 I ( b ) 及 第 八 十 五 圖 中 所 說 明 之 位 址 — 角 度 配 置 資 訊 之 方 填 裝 rv· 寫 本 式 之 C P 信 號 r 而 作 成 C Ρ 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 之 情 形 之 頁 ί I 模 式 示 意 圖 0 第 七 十 八 圖 左 側 所 示 之 光 碟 7 〇 9 中 Τ 係 揭 1 I 示 有 里 圓 彤 或 多 角 彤 之 C Ρ 信 號 被 配 列 於 各 軌 跡 上 之 m 0 1 ί 在 碟 片 7 0 9 中 亦 記 錄 有 圖 未 示 之 C P 佶 α占 配 置 資 訊 7 1 訂 1 1 2 5 被 m 出 之 C P 信 α占 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 係 被 第 十 九 圖 之 步 驟 7 6 〇 b 所 示 之 単 方 向 函 數 之 暗 號 編 碼 器 7 4 2 1 1 所 暗 號 化 並 Η 記 錄 回 路 7 4 4 將 之 記 錄 於 光 碟 之 磁 性 1 1 記 錄 郜 7 4 6 或 原 盤 7 0 5 之 外 周 部 7 0 5 d 上 0 又 亦 線 可 將 之 記 錄 於 第 八 十 二 圈 所 說 明 之 原 盤 7 〇 5 之 第 二 曝 光 ί I 部 7 5 3 亦 可 於 光 碟 9 之 内 周 部 設 置 印 刷 有 條 形 碼 之 部 1 1 份 7 9 9 t 而 記 錄 於 其 中 0 1 i 如 上 述 記 錄 於 光 R 0 Μ 部 或 磁 性 記 錄 部 等 之 C P 信 I 1 號 配 置 訊 7 2 5 t 只 要 暗 號 鍵 不 被 知 悉 t 即 不 會 被 篡 改 1 1 I 〇 此 係 因 以 單 方 向 函 數 將 之 暗 5ΪΪ 化 故 無 法 從 暗 號 解 碼 器 1 i 之 數 中 j 解 讀 出 暗 编 竭 器 之 函 數 之 故 若 為 例 如 第 七 i 1 十 九 圖 之 用 法 * 因 複 製 *IU. 呆 者 只 了 解 暗 號 解 碼 器 T 故 必 須 實 1 I - 84 - 1 1 本紙乐尺度適用中國國家標率(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) A7 4 6 20 3 9 B.7 五、發明説明() 行2之5 1 2次方回之演算 > 而此演算須要數百年之時間 0 . 1 . 奸衣—.1 訂 (請先W讀背&之注意事項再填寫本頁) 關於此點|以下使用第t十九圖之流程圖作更詳细之 說明。第七十九圖所示者為藉由對照使用覃方向函數之暗 號•複製碟片之動作程式圖。在步驟760j作成CP信k 號配置資訊7 25 ,在步驟760b ,使闬512b i t 之密秘鍵,並KRSA函數暗號化,在步驟760 c ,將 此暗號記錄於光碟上。在步驟7 6 0 d ,再生此光碟之資 訊,接著在步驟760e將暗號化為普通字。複製業者雖 可知道步驟7 6 0 d之暗號資料之函數,但如步驟7 6 0 b和步驟760d所示•使用RSA函數般之公開键通信 方式之函數,係將编碼器和解碼器倒過來使用,故歆解謓 编碼器之函數*須要上述之2之5 1 2次方回之演簞之/ 長時間故在實質上•其確可防旨CP信號配置資訊7 2 5被篡改。在步驟760f ·藉甶對照於步驟760k所 測得之光碟CP信號7 24 ,與普通文字化之C P信號配 置資訊725,若其對照结果不一致* (在步驟760s 經濟部中央標隼局員工消费合作.杜印策 為NO時)*則在歩驟7 60h停止程式之動作。而對照 结果若為一致(在步驟7 6 0 s為Y E S時)則在步驟7 6 ◦丨實行程式之動作。又,在第七十九圖之例中> CP 信號724亦可為如前述•非為偏移信號者。因此,在現 簧上,CP信號配置資訊725係為不可篡改者, 又,在第七十九圖所示之例中 C P信號7 2 4 ί系如 -85- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4規格(210Χ 297公釐) 4 6203 9 at B7 經濟部中央搮隼局員工消贤合作钍印装 五、發明説明 ( ) I 1 | 前 述 1 可 非 為 偏 移 信 3必 0 一 方 面 i 前 述 之 偏 移 C P 信 號 1 1 1 i 藉 由 改 菱 記 m 等 化 器 之 脈 衝 幅 度 之 功 率 比 $ 或 改 菱 田 射 光 --—^ [ ] 請 1 | 動 力 > 可 為 第 八 十 圖 所 被 實 現 但 雷 射 輸 出 和 信 號 槽 之 先 55 1 | 大 小 間 之 關 係 * 係 具 有 非 線 形 性 〇 因 此 t 於 製 作 如 程 式 所 η 背 1 1 I 示 之 配 置 有 偏 移 電 壓 之 原 盤 時 ) 其 相 同 性 降 變 劣 之 情 事 之 1 I i 為 可 預 見 者 惟 在 第 t 十 九 圖 所 示 之 洌 中 I 從 第 八 十 — 事 項 1 I 再 1 圖 A 和 第 八 十 圖 B 所 示 之 原 盤 製 作 装 置 ( 主 盤 記 錄 健 装 r>· 寫 本 裝 置 ) 7 6 1 之 搆 成 中 m 可 了 解 其 藉 由 混 合 器 混 合 C P 頁 -__^ 1 1 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 和 邏 輯 I D 發 生 器 5 4 6 所 產 生 之 邏 1 1 輯 I D 並 將 之 以 αο 里 方 向 函 數 暗 號 編 碼 器 ( 暗 化 器 ) 7 1 I 4 2 予 暗 號 化 復 磁 性 記 錄 回 路 7 4 4 和 磁 頭 7 4 5 將 1 訂 之 記 錄 於 光 碟 之 磁 性 記 錄 部 7 4 6 0 如 前 述 此 C P 信 號 1 I 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 係 為 不 可 篡 改 者 0 將 此 暗 號 資 料 藉 由 記 1 1 錄 再 生 装 置 7 4 7 之 磁 頭 7 4 5 a 和 磁 性 再 生 部 7 4 8 t 1 1 加 以 苒 生 並 以 暗 號 解 碼 器 7 4 3 將 其 復 元 而 復 元 出 C 1 P 信 號 配 置 實 訊 7 2 5 〇 此 情 彤 將 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 1 1 2 5 記 錄 於 光 記 錄 部 並 Μ 光 謓 頭 7 1 0 再 生 時 其 情 形 1 1 亦 相 同 〇 之 後 將 光 再 生 部 7 5 0 之 偏 移 电 壓 信 5¾ 檢 知 I 1 部 7 5 2 中 之 位 址 檢 知 部 7 5 1 , 和 偏 移 電 壓 V S 0 檢 知 1 j 部 7 3 4 和 位 址 或 角 度 資 訊 中 所 測 得 之 C P 信 號 配 置 I 1 j 資 訊 7 2 5 » 送 至 正 規 碟 片 對 照 部 7 3 3 又 1 第 八 + — 1 1 圖 A 及 第 八 十 一 圖 Β 所 示 之 原 盤 製 作 装 置 ( 主 盤 記 錄 装 置 1 ) 7 6 1 係 對 應 於 第 t 十 二 圖 所 示 者 ) 同 樣 地 1 再 生 装 置 1 1 - 86 - 1 1 本紙浪尺度通用中國國家搮準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 2町公釐) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 五、發明説明() (記錄再生装置)係對應於第六十九圖所示者。 在正規碟片對照部7 3 3 ,將遵從第t十七圖A及第 七十七圖B所說明之複製碟片動作防止程式74 9中之流 程圖所示者,撿知複製碟片,並停止程式之動作或淳止再 生信號之輸出。此場合,如第八十三圖所示,係於應用軟 體程式中之起動程序770b 、程式安装程序770 d 、 印刷程序7 7 0 f 、樓暗保存程序7 7〇h中*組入磲片 檢査程式 7 7 0 770e、770g、770i 。藉 ' 此,海盗版業者卽使解析軟體,而使複製防止程序7 7 0 c 、770e等無效時,只要其未除去全部•例如1〇〇 0個程序,其即無法加Μ複製。 在第八十一圖Α及第八十一圖Β之例中,係揭示於原 盤製作後|將原盤之偏移電壓等C P信號配置責訊7 2 5 ,Μ單方向函數暗號化|並記錄於設於光碟9 a上之磁性 記錄部746之方法。而此記錄方式,亦可如第八十一圖 A及第八十一圖B所示之光碟9 b般| K原盤之第一曝光 部520記錄程式和CP信號724 ,復於外周部之原盤 第二曝光部753中記錄CP信號配置實料725者。此 方法,K第八十二圖A及第八十二圖B更詳细說明。在工 程1 、工程2 ,對内周部之原盤之第一暘光部52 ◦賦與 雷射光信號·在工程3 *以遮光保護膜754覆蓋原盤之 第二_光部753 ,即外周部,並使第一感光部75 5之 光致抗訑劑層感光。此時,在工程4 ,藉由蝕刻,形成倌 -8 7 - 本紙張尺度適用t國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2丨0X297公釐) (讀先s:讀背面之注意事項再填寫本f ) .· ml -I 1—- ’ —^― I I - κ < - - I - 1 - ---- 0¾.Ja 經濟部中夬標隼局員工消費合作.杜印1?- 4 6 2 0 3 9 A7 B7 嗖齊郎 4-^^4¾¾^¾^^^^.^¾ 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 \ 號 槽 圖 樣 T 在 工 程 5 J 測 量 寅 際 之 偏 移 信 號 f 以 獲 得 偏 移 \ 1 1 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 t 並 將 之 暗 號 化 1 在 工 程 6 » 除 *v 1 [ 請 1 1 去 第 二 感 光 部 7 5 6 之 遮 光 保 護 膜 7 5 4 J 將 上 述 之 暗 CT占 先 閱 1 I 信 號 m 由 第 二 次 之 雷 射 光 曝 光 予 記 錄 0 在 工 程 7 8 讀 背 [ 面 I 9 實 行 電 鍍 , 製 作 金 屬 原 盤 1 藉 由 使 用 此 原 m 成 形 t 製 作k 之 | 意 1 出 碟 片 基 板 並 使 形 成 反 射 摸 t C D 即 完 成 0 事 項 F I 再 1 1 藉 由 苦 行 第 二 次 暘 光 » 原 盤 之 第 — m 光 部 5 2 0 將 被 填 裝 隨 寫 本 機 陚 與 偏 移 控 制 信 號 t 並 實 行 記 錄 t 將 合 格 之 偏 移 C P f 1 1 信 號 之 配 置 暗 5K 化 i 並 記 錄 於 外 周 或 内 周 之 原 盤 之 第 二 曝 1 1 光 部 7 5 3 故 其 具 有 不 必 擔 心 相 同 率 可 記 錄 製 造 相 同 1 1 率 極 低 之 防 止 拷 貝 信 號 之 效 果 0 亦 即 例 如 欲 複 製 相 同 率 I 1 丁 為 千 分 之 — 之 信 號 則 必 須 作 出 千 次 原 盤 才 可 能 有 — 次 I j 之 相 同 其 複 製 商 眾 利 潤 甚 不 付 合 經 濟 性 0 1 i 又 在 第 八 十 — 圖 A 及 第 八 十 圖 B 中 其 係 藉 由 回 1 1 轉 角 度 檢 知 部 7 5 8 從 馬 達 7 5 7 或 圖 未 示 之 F G ( I 方V 回 轉 感 應 器 ) 之 回 轉 脈 SI 中 測 出 偏 移 C P 信 號 之 配 置 回 1 I 轉 角 復 如 苐 八 十 四 圖 所 示 i 作 成 偏 移 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 1 ί 7 2 5 a 0 如 第 八 十 -1- 圖 之 ( a ) ( b ) ( G ) 所 示 1 II 1 1 由 將 回 轉 脈 衝 作 時 間 分 割 t m 可 更 正 確 地 檢 知 其 角 度 位 置 1 j 0 如 第 八 十 1 - 圖 ( C ) ( d ) 所 示 亦 可 檢 知 其 位 址 Λ 偏 1 1 I 移 信 號 % 周 期 等 之 配 置 0 此 情 形 f 因 係 正 規 碟 片 t 所 測 得 1 1 之 偏 移 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 a 係 為 正 確 0 亦 即 1 於 位 ί 1 址 A 4 之 位 置 1 + 偏 移 電 壓 之 周 期 T 1 之 信 號 I 被 記 錄 於 1 j - 88 - 1 1 本紙法尺度通用中國S家標丰(CNS ) A4規格(210X297公釐) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 經濟部中央標生·局員工消資合作社印製 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 1 1 角 度 位 置 Z 3 之 位 置 上 0 之 後 t 拷 貝 防 止 程 式 即 不 停 止 被 1 1 1 讓 出 之 程 式 0 惟 若 為 第 八 十 四 圈 ( b ) 所 示 之 不 法 複 製 1 | 請 1 I 之 C D 碟 片 t 其 偏 移 C P 信 號 配 置 資 料 7 2 5 C 即 與 正 規 先 VI 1 I 料 讀 1 之 寶 不 同 0 此 因 C D 被 施 Η C L V 記 錄 之 故 0 第 八 背 1 & | 十 五 .圖 所 示 者 即 為 實 際 之 C D 之 泣 址 配 置 ♦ 在 每 — 原 盤 上- 之 | 意 I 均 不 相 同 之 明 確 之 實 驗 數 據 〇 IP 使 位 址 相 同 j 因 原 盤 之 不 % 1 I 再 1 ) 同 m 速 或 軌 跡 間 . 距 亦 稍 有 差 異 t 而 其 誤 差 經 過 累 樓 將 ά • 寫 本 裝 成 為 甚 大 之 差 異 0 頁 1 | 回 到 第 八 十 四 圖 i 若 為 正 規 C D 偏 移 C P 信 號 之 角 1 1 度 配 置 係 為 2 3 、 Z 2 Z -1 Z 4 〇 惟 在 第 八 十 四 圖 1 1 ( b ) 中 係 為 Z 3 Z 2 、 Z 4 Z 3 發 生 頭 著 之 差 ί 訂 異 0 欲 正 確 地 控 制 此 角 度 在 百 刖 所 可 找 到 之 主 盤 記 錄 懺 1 | 装 置 均 並 <>、、》 法 作 到 0 此 圖 樣 係 無 法 複 製 且 偏 移 C P 信 配 1 ! 置 資 訊 7 2 5 a 亦 因 被 單 方 向 性 函 數 加 以 暗 α占 Wu 化 玟 组 法 ί 1 篡 改 0 又 藉 由 條 形 碼 狀 之 低 反 射 部 群 亦 可 將 偏 移 C P 1 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 記 錄 於 光 碟 上 0 ί I < 第 三 簧 施 例 > I 1 接 著 依 昭 第 八 十 八 圖 及 第 八 十 九 圖 A 第 八 十 九 圖 1 1 B 說 明 有 關 本 發 明 之 光 記 錄 媒 體 之 第 三 實 施 例 及 光 碟 再 ί I 生 装 置 之 第 二 簧 施 例 〇 第 七 十 圖 之 光 記 錄 媒 體 ? 0 3 上 1 1 I > 係 將 C P 信 號 配 置 貢 訊 7 2 5 與 先 行 信 ET占 7 2 6 a ·—W 7 i I 2 6 h — 併 記 錄 I 而 在 第 二 賁 陁 m 中 先 行 信 號 7 2 6 a f 1 7 2 6 h 則 不 必 記 錄 ( 即 使 加 以 記 錄 t 在 生 装 置 亦 不 加 1 ! - S9 - 1 i 1 木纸乐尺度適用中國園家標率(CNS ) A4坑格(2[0X297公釐) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 經溱部中央標A..局負工消費合作社印裝 五、發明説明 ( ) 1 1 Ϊ 以 檢 知 ) 0 1 1 第 八 十 八 圖 之 再 生 装 置 7 4 7 b 在 Μ 下 各 點 與 第 六 十 ] ί 請 1 1 九 圈 不 同 0 亦 即 » 第 -1— 十 九 圈 中 > 設 在 g 動 補 正 限 幅 回 路 先 1 | 讀 1 7 3 1 之 反 饋 路 徑 中 Z 加 算 器 7 3 1 a \% 被 除 去 t 因 此 r 背 1 1¾ [ 偏 移 量 補 正 信 號 發 生 部 7 2 9 亦 被 除 去 0 因 此 * 第 八 十 八^ 之 | 意 I 圖 中 § 動 補 正 眼 幅 回 路 係 VX 7 3 1 B 表 示 * 類 比 波 形 整 事 項 1 ] 再 1 ί 形 部 係 Η 7 2 1 B 表 示 控 钊 部 係 Μ 7 2 〇 B 表 示 0 又 t 填 寫 本 裝 第 八 十 八 圖 中 r 馬 達 7 1 1 之 回 轉 角 度 檢 知 用 之 回 轉 角 度 頁 1 | 檢 知 部 7 5 8 係 被 設 於 控 制 部 7 2 〇 B 内 0 又 其 設 有 暗 t 1 號 解 碼 器 7 4 3 數 位 復 元 部 則 以 7 1 9 B 表 示 0 第 八 十 1 i 九 圖 A 及 第 八 十 九 圖 B 所 示 者 係 為 控 剌 部 7 2 〇 A 係 Η C 1 IT P U 所 構 成 之 場 合 之 處 理 順 序 之 流 程 圖 〇 使 用 此 流 程 圖 » i f 說 明 有 關 使 用 包 含 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 及 位 址 角 度 1 1 配 置 資 訊 等 之 C P 倌 號 之 檢 査 複 製 方 法 0 1 1 C Ρ 信 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 係 使 用 運 用 R S A 函 數 等 ! 叙' 單 方 向 性 函 數 之 暗 號 编 碼 器 t 預 先 予 以 暗 號 化 〇 八 十 九 1 1 圖 A 及 第 八 十 九 圈 B 之 流 程 圖 因 與 第 七 十 七 圖 A 及 第 七 十 1 ί 圖 B 之 共 通 部 份 甚 多 1 Μ 下 僅 說 明 兩 者 相 異 之 步 驟 0 在 1 1 步 驟 7 8 0 d 1 被 暗 號 化 之 C P 信 號 配 置 資 訊 7 2 5 r 係 1 I 被 數 位 復 元 部 7 1 9 A 内 之 暗 號 解 碼 器 7 4 3 i 所 普 通 文 1 ί 1 字 化 * 在 步 驟 7 8 〇 e 檢 査 該 普 通 文 字 是 否 正 確 〇 因 使 用 I 1 R S A 函 數 般 Z 單 方 向 性 函 數 i 只 要 逋 漏 暗 編 碼 E3 0 之 鍵 i i 7 無 法 生 成 正 確 之 暗 號 ’ 故 可 在 此 階 段 即 可 進 行 第 — 次 1 I - 90 - 1 ί 本纸伕尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(210X 297公嫠) 4 6203 9 A7 B7五、發明説明() 經濟部中央橾隼局!β;工消背合作it印笈 8 量 P, 係 碟先之 信實 使測信一 製果 之亦 列,置 7 測 C 時 , 之苜號 P 之為係 P 否 複结 B 行 表中配 驟 由有置 中址"信C置若 -C 是 為 照圖實 之式號 步藉若配 作位法移與位而號與料 斷對九上上方信 在, 。度 動定方偏其址。信其資 判在十 } 式之 P 則 S 號角。照 特種出 照位致 P 將之 則僅八 Γ 程 BC -ο 信之 hii用兩測 對規一C並訊 * 而第 e 用圖故 S8P 址 ο 此使 之係並正否之,資 致。及VM九 — E7C 位 8 於及號 * -之是 式置置 一生A丨 或十器 Y 驟之査 7。 -信時置號料方位配 不再圖 rs 八碼 為步等檢驟號號 P 號位信資訊度度 果其九 do 第编 若在號 谨 步信信C信度 P 之資 角角 结止十 之及號 査,信。ΛΡΡ 為 P 角 C 置度置規 照淳八 D 腦A暗 檢査移 hjtcc 作 C 之該位角配正 對或第 C 電圖之 次檢偏 ο 而照 為訊之 上之度 置之之 若作。 < 之九數 1 製有 8 , 葑作.資式 Η 示角配上示 ,動作器器十函 第複具 7 sh 號~置方碟所規之片所. e 之動動動八性 。 之否驟 oo 信'配號或 5 正上碟 5 ο 式其 驅驅 第向 査 片市步 88 移度信 - 2 之片在 24程使 DD 在方 檢 碟其行 77 偏 角移置 7 上碟之 7 7 止方 CC。 單 改始査進驟驟用理偏位訊片在址訊 驟停-在缰可用 墓開檢則步步使物用址實碟之位資 步即時業接亦運 號- , ,略在有.之使位 置或址 定置 在 ,確作 在行用 暗 f 片號省 括上 於置配,位 特配。 片正照-寅 使 之 ο 碟信可 包片,配號料用量號致 碟為對可上因 (請先5?讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙张又度通用中圉國家標芈(CNS ) A4現格(2丨0>< 297公釐) '4 6 203 9 A7 短濟部中夬標隼局員二消f合泎钍印^ B.7五、發明説明() 資訊7 2 5不會被篡改。因此,複製業者因無法作出形成 有適當之碟片上之CP信號之複製碟片|並使其與CP信 號之對照结果為一致•且亦無法篡改C P信號配置資訊7 25故,可防止複製。 <發明之效果> 本發明之光碟及其再生装置,係於光碟上•於一定圖 揉之信號之後,設置可記錄將眼孔圖樣中心自振幅中心偏 移之信號之記錄領~域_,於再生装置上檢知一定圖樣之信號 後,藉由對將RF信號復元為數位信號時之基值,故意地 施以偏移電壓,以再生將眼孔圖樣中心自振幅中心偏移之 信號,並賦與其若不再生該偏移信號即停止其再生之健能 者0 又,藉由再生装置•從記錄有將眼孔圖樣中心自振幅 中心偏移之信號之記錄領域,再生該信號並被復元為數位 信號之上述信號•係為通常之信號,若將復元之信號記錄 於可記錄之光碟媒體中時,於其再生時*眼孔圖漾之中心 係被記錄成幾乎位在振幅中心上。因此,再生装置若對將 R F信號復元為數位信號時之限幅位準•加以偏移並再生 時,即無法將之視為通常信號再生|其再生將停止•故複 製之碟片係為不能再生之產品 > 而可防止不法之複製。 11^1 - I— 11 «^1— - I - - - J - I 1 <^^1 Γ I I --- 1 i I --- 0¾ ·-卩 髮 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -92- 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標率(CMS > Μ規格(210X 297公濩)_ VK .__ I 462039 A7 B7 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs &Cooperation; Du Yinfu, Employees of the Bureau Du Yinfu V. Invention Description () 1 1 1 I Circular Function (e 1 1 1 P t 1 CCU Γ V e U η C t ί 1 1 ί 〇η) and other functions of the public m method are used as the 箪 direction function and darkened 1 I Please number 1 * and record it on the optical R 〇M part or the magnetic record on or on the surface of the disc Read the 1 ί part first The medium can also be back I 1 side I. The eighteenth figure is the C RP signal or the third side of the offset signal in the measuring disc as shown in the seventieth figure (a ^ 1 Note 1 to 1). The eighty-fourth circle (a) matter ί I re I (b) and the address described in the eighty-fifth figure-the angle configuration information is filled with rv · CP signal r written in this formula to make C PF signal configuration information 7 2 5 situation Page ί I schematic diagram 0 The optical disc 7 shown on the left side of the 78th figure in the 〇9 Τ is exposed 1 I shows that the C RP signal with a round or polygonal angle is arranged on each track m 0 1 ί on the disc In the film 7 0 9, CP not shown in the figure 占 α accounts for the configuration information 7 1 Order 1 1 2 5 The CP letter outputted by m α accounts for the configuration information 7 2 5 is shown in step 19 of the nineteenth chart 7 6 〇b The encoder of the 之 direction function shown in the figure 7 4 2 1 1 is coded and recorded 7 Recording circuit 7 4 4 Magnetically recorded on the disc 1 1 Record 郜 7 4 6 or the original disk 7 0 5 Outer periphery 7 0 5 d on the 0 and the line can be recorded on the original disc 7 of the 82nd circle as described in the second exposure of the I section 7 5 3 can also be provided on the inner periphery of the disc 9 with a bar code printed section 1 1 Copies of 7 9 9 t and recorded in 0 1 i as described above in the optical R 0 Μ section or magnetic recording The CP signal of the ministry I No. 1 configuration message 7 2 5 t As long as the secret key is not known t will not be tampered with 1 1 I 〇 This is because it is darkened by a one-way function, so it cannot be removed from the secret decoder 1 i In the figure, if the function of j to read out the coded exhaustion device is, for example, the usage of the seventh i 1 and the nineteenth picture * because of copying * IU. Only the password decoder T is known, so it must be 1 I-84-1 1 The paper scale is applicable to China's National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) A7 4 6 20 3 9 B.7 V. Description of the invention () Calculation of line 2 of 5 1 2 times > And this calculation requires Over the centuries of time 0.1. Rape—.1 Order (please read the notes of the back & then fill out this page) About this point | The following uses the flow chart in Figure 19 for more details Instructions. The one shown in Figure 79 is a sequence diagram of the operation of copying a disc by comparing the code using the Tan direction function. In step 760j, the CP signal k number configuration information 7 25 is prepared. In step 760b, the secret key of 闬 512b i t and the KRSA function are secretly coded. In step 760 c, the code is recorded on the optical disc. In step 760d, the information of the disc is reproduced, and then the password is converted into a normal word in step 760e. Although the copy operator can know the function of the secret data in step 7 6 0 d, but as shown in step 7 6 b and step 760d • The function of the public key communication method using the RSA function is to reverse the encoder and decoder Come and use it, so the function of the encoder * needs to be solved by 2 of the above 5 1 2 times / long time so in essence • it can prevent the CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 from being tampered . In step 760f · By comparing the CP signal 7 24 of the disc measured in step 760k with the normalized CP signal configuration information 725, if the comparison result is inconsistent * (at step 760s, the staff of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, consumer cooperation (When Du Yinze is NO) * The program will stop at step 7 60h. And if the comparison result is consistent (when step 760 s is Y E S), then the program action is performed at step 7.6. Also, in the example of the seventy-ninth figure, the CP signal 724 may also be a signal that is not an offset signal as described above. Therefore, on the current spring, the CP signal configuration information 725 is non-tamperable, and in the example shown in Figure 79, the CP signal 7 2 4 is such as -85- This paper standard applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 mm) 4 6203 9 at B7 Printed by the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed and printed by the staff. 5. Description of the invention () I 1 | i The aforementioned offset CP signal 1 1 1 i By changing the power ratio of the pulse amplitude of the equalizer m equalizer $ or changing the Lingtian light --- ^ [] Please 1 | Power > Realized but the laser output and the signal slot's first 55 1 | The relationship between the size * is non-linear. Therefore, t is the same as when the original disk with offset voltage is produced as shown in the program η back 1 1 I) Deterioration 1 I i is foreseeable except t t nineteen The middle of the I shown is from the eightyth — item 1 I to 1 The original disk making device (master disk recording and hardening r > · writing device) shown in Figure A and Eighty Figure B 7 6 1 It can be understood that it mixes CP pages by a mixer -__ ^ 1 1 Signal configuration information 7 2 5 and logic ID generator 5 4 6 Logic 1 1 series ID and use it as a direction function password encoder (dark 7 1 I 4 2 Imagine the complex magnetic recording circuit 7 4 4 and the magnetic head 7 4 5 and record the 1 order in the magnetic recording section of the optical disc 7 4 6 0 As mentioned above, the CP signal 1 I allocation information 7 2 5 It is a non-tamperable person 0 This coded data is generated by recording the magnetic head 7 4 5 a of the recording and reproducing device 7 4 7 and the magnetic reproducing section 7 4 8 t 1 1 and recovering it with a coded decoder 7 4 3 And recovery comes out C 1 P signal configuration information 7 2 5 〇 In this case, CP signal configuration information 7 1 1 2 5 is recorded in the optical recording section and the optical head 7 1 0 The situation is the same during reproduction 1 1 The optical reproduction section 7 is then 5 0 offset voltage letter 5¾ detects the address detection section 7 5 1 in I 1 section 7 5 2 and offset voltage VS 0 detects 1 j section 7 3 4 and measured in address or angle information The obtained CP signal configuration I 1 j Information 7 2 5 »Send to the regular disc comparison section 7 3 3 and 1 8th + — 1 1 The original disk making device (master record) shown in Figure A and 81 Device 1) 7 6 1 corresponds to the one shown in figure t. Twelve) Similarly 1 Recycling device 1 1-86-1 1 The standard of this paper is the standard of China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 2machi mm) 4 6 203 9 A7 B7 5. Description of the Invention () (Recording and Reproducing Device) corresponds to the one shown in Figure 69. In the regular disc comparison section 7 3 3, the copy disc operation prevention program 74 9 described in the t-seventh figure A and the seventy-seventh figure B will be followed to find out the copied disc, And stop the program operation or stop the regeneration signal output. In this case, as shown in Figure 83, the startup program 770b, program installation program 770d, printing program 770f, and dark-storage program 770h in the application software program are incorporated into the cymbal. Check program 7 7 0 770e, 770g, 770i. Therefore, if the pirate edition company uses analysis software to invalidate the copy prevention programs 7 70 c, 770e, etc., as long as it does not remove all of them, for example, 10,000 programs, it cannot be copied. In the examples of Figures 81 and B, it is revealed after the original disk is made | The CP signal such as the offset voltage of the original disk is assigned to the blame 7 2 5 and the M one-way function is coded | and recorded Method for magnetic recording section 746 provided on optical disc 9a. And this recording method can also be like the disc 9 b shown in Figure 81 and Figure 81 B | The first exposure section 520 recording program and CP signal 724 of the K original disk are duplicated on the original disk of the outer periphery In the second exposure unit 753, the actual CP signal arrangement 725 is recorded. This method is described in more detail in Figure 82 and Figure 82B. In Project 1 and Project 2, the first luminous part 52 of the original disc on the inner peripheral part is given a laser light signal. In the project 3 * The second optical part 753 of the original disc is covered with a light shielding protective film 754, that is, the outer peripheral part, and The photosensitizing agent layer of the first photosensitive portion 75 5 is sensitized. At this time, in project 4, 倌 -8 is formed by etching. 7-This paper size is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) (read first s: read the precautions on the back side and fill in this f). · ml -I 1—- '— ^ ― II-κ <--I-1----- 0¾.Ja's consumer cooperation with the Ministry of Economic Affairs, China Standards Bureau. Du Yin 1?-4 6 2 0 3 9 A7 B7 嗖 齐 郎 4-^^ 4¾¾ ^^^^^. ^ ¾ V. Description of the invention () 1 1 \ Slot pattern T at project 5 J Measure the offset signal f of the world to obtain Offset \ 1 1 CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 t and password 1 in Project 6 »except * v 1 [please go to the light-shielding protective film of the second photosensitive part 7 5 6 7 5 4 J Dark CT takes precedence. 1 I signal m is recorded by the second laser exposure. 0 In Engineering 7 8 Read back [Surface I 9 is electroplated to make a metal master disk 1. By using this original m forming t to make k of | Disc Board and make the reflection t CD complete 0 matter FI and then 1 1 by ascetic second light »the first of the original disk-m light section 5 2 0 will be filled with the local write and offset control signal t and implemented Record t The configuration of the qualified offset CP f 1 1 signal is darkened by 5Ki and recorded on the outer or inner periphery of the second exposure of the original disk 1 1 light section 7 5 3 so it has no need to worry about the same rate can be recorded to make the same 1 1 The effect of preventing the signal from being copied with a very low rate. 0 That is, for example, if you want to copy the same rate I 1 Ding is one-thousandth-the signal must be made a thousand times in the original disc. Compatible economy 0 1 i is also in the eighty-eighth-Figure A and Eighty-eighth Figure B by returning to the 1 1 rotation angle detection section 7 5 8 from the motor 7 5 7 or not shown in the figure The configuration of the offset CP signal measured in the rotation pulse SI of the FG (I square V rotation sensor) is returned to 1 I The angle of rotation is as shown in Figure 84. I creates the offset CP signal configuration information 1 ί 7 2 5 a 0 As shown in (a), (b), (G) of Figure 80-1-, the angle position 1 j 0 can be detected more accurately by dividing the rotation pulse in time tm 1 j 0 Figure (C) (d) shows that its address Λ is biased 1 1 I Shift signal% period configuration 0. In this case, f is the CP signal configuration information of 1 1 as measured by the regular disc t. 7 2 5 a is correct 0, that is, 1 in position ί 1 address A 4 position 1 + offset voltage period T 1 signal I is recorded in 1 j-88-1 1 The paper scale is generally used in China S house standard Fung (CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Printed by the Central Consumers 'Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumers' Cooperative, Ltd. 5. Description of the invention () 1 1 1 1 The position of the angular position Z 3 is 0 after t. The copy prevention program does not stop being stopped by 1 1 1. The program 0 is withdrawn. However, if it is the illegal copy shown by the eighty-fourth circle (b) 1 | Please 1 I CD disc t its offset CP signal configuration data 7 2 5 C is different from the regular first VI 1 I reading 1 treasure 0 this is because the CD was used CLV record 0 eighth back 1 & | 15 .The figure shows the actual CD address configuration. ♦ On each of the original disks, the clear experimental data that is different from each other. It means that the IP address is the same, because the original disk is not the same. 1 I then 1) The same m speed or trajectory. The distance is also slightly different, and the error will be tired. • The book installation becomes a big difference. 0 Page 1 | Back to 84th figure i If it is normal C The angle of the D offset CP signal is 11 degrees. The arrangement is 2 3 and Z 2 Z -1 Z 4. However, in the eighty-fourth figure 1 1 (b), it is Z 3 Z 2 and Z 4 Z 3. The difference is different. 0 To correctly control this angle, you can find the master record found in Baiyun. 1 | The device is combined with < > ,,, and the method is made to 0. This pattern cannot be copied and offset from the CP information. Distribution 1! Setting information 7 2 5 a is also darkened by the unidirectional function. Α accounts for the Wu chemical group method ί 1 Tampering 0 and the bar-shaped low-reflection group can also offset the CP 1 signal configuration information 7 2 5 Recorded on the optical disc 0 ί I < Third spring embodiment > I 1 Next, according to the eighty-eighth and eighty-ninth drawings A eighty-nineth photos 1 1 B The optical recording medium of the present invention will be described The third embodiment and the second optical disc device Example 〇 The light recording medium of the seventieth picture? 0 3 on 1 1 I > The CP signal is configured with Gongxun 7 2 5 and the leading letter ET to occupy 7 2 6 a · —W 7 i I 2 6 h — and Record I and the leading signal 7 2 6 af 1 7 2 6 h in the second 贲 陁 m is not necessary to record (even if it is recorded t 1 is not added in the living device!-S9-1 i 1 Wood and paper scale is applicable to Chinese garden House mark rate (CNS) A4 (2 [0X297 mm) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 Printed by the central ministry of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A .. Printing by the Office of the Consumer Cooperative 5. V. Description of the invention () 1 1 Ϊ To check) 0 1 1 The regenerative device of the eighty-eighth figure 7 4 7 b The points under Μ are the same as the sixtieth] ί Please 1 1 Nine laps are different 0 That is »The -1st-19th lap > Set at g Limiting loop first 1 | Read 1 7 3 1 in the feedback path Z adder 7 3 1 a \% is removed t so r back 1 1 ¾ [bias The shift correction signal generation unit 7 2 9 is also removed. Therefore, the eighty-eighth ^ | | I in the picture § The motion correction eye loop circuit VX 7 3 1 B means * Analog waveform correction 1] and 1 ί Department Η 7 2 1 B means control unit M 7 2 〇B means 0 and t Fill in the rotation angle of the rotation angle detection of r motor 7 1 1 in the eighty-eighth figure in this installation Page 1 | Inspection Department The 7 5 8 system is located in the control unit 7 2 0B. It is also equipped with a dark t 1 decoder. 7 4 3 The digital restoration unit is represented by 7 1 9 B. 0 80th 1 i 9 Figure A and 8th The figure shown in Figure 19 is the control unit 7 2 〇A is a flow chart of the processing sequence of the occasion composed of C 1 IT PU. Use this flow chart »if explain about the use of CP signal configuration information 7 2 5 And address angle 1 1 CP 配置The method of checking and copying 0 1 1 C LP letter allocation information 7 2 5 is using the RSA function, etc.! The code encoder t with unidirectional function t is pre-coded. 89 1 1 Figure A and 80 The flowchart of Nine Circles B has a lot in common with Figure 77 and Figure 71 and Figure 77. ‚Figure B has only 1M in common. The following only describes the steps that are different from each other. 0 in 1 1 step 7 8 0 d 1 Coded CP signal allocation information 7 2 5 r System 1 I Coded decoder 7 7 9 A in the digital restoration unit 7 4 3 i Common text 1 ί 1 Characterization * In step 7 8 〇e Check the common text Is it correct? Because I use the I 1 RSA function, the Z unidirectional function i only needs to omit the secret code E3 0, the key ii 7 ca n’t generate the correct secret sign, so you can do it at this stage 1st time I-90-1 ί The paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 male) 4 6203 9 A7 B7 V. Description of invention () Central Bureau of Economic Affairs! β; co-operation and cooperation, it is printed with 8 quantities of P, which are also the results of the test of the faithful messenger of the disc. When 7 is set to test C, the number of the alfalfa P is the system of P. The steps are set by the middle address and the letter C is set to -C, which is the number step according to the actual figure. If it is used as a bit shift and bit, the number and the letter are believed to be above and below. Degrees of movement are partial. Believe that the judgement is in the tenth form of the P horn. According to the special picture, the position is to be sent to P. It will only be eight. BC -ο The letter of hii uses two tests to match the rule with one C. * And the e uses the map of the S8P address. Ο This is the same as whether it is positive or not. And VM9 — E7C bit 8 is in the number and *-the type is placed in a lifetime A 丨 or ten devices Y step 7. -When the letter is set, the position of the material is no longer shown. Rs Eight yards are steps, etc. The number of the number, the number of the letter, the degree of information, if its nine do. No more than ten and number check, letter. ΛPP is the angle of P, and the degree of C is set according to Chun Ba D. Brain A dark inspection shifts hjtcc as the alignment of the corresponding angle of C or the secondary deviation of the Cth picture. Make. < The nine-digit 1 system has 8, work. The asset-type display angle is accompanied by the display, and the tenth part of the actuator has the number 7 sh ~ the place set by the square disc. e every move. No step oo letter 'number or 5 is on the disc 5 ο type its drive to check the market step 88 move the letter-2 of the film in the 24th process to make the DD in the side of the disc 77 off-angle shift 7 Only 7 of 7 on the disc CC. A single change to the search step was used to stop the use of rational off-site information at the address-stop the inspection at the tomb available at the step by step to make use of the real location of the real disk to receive the same number-, slightly . Make the position or address set, and make sure that the in-use dark f film number is enclosed in the configuration, and the position is specially configured. The positive picture of the film-Yin Shizhi ο The disc can be packaged, the number of the material and the number of the disc is the reason that the disc can be loaded (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper is also universally accepted in China. (CNS) A4 is now available (2 丨 0 > < 297 mm) '4 6 203 9 A7 Member of the Ministry of Economy and Trade of the People's Republic of China and the Bureau of the Ministry of Commerce's second elimination f combined seal ^ B.7 V. Description of the invention () Information 7 2 5 will not be tampered with. Therefore, the duplication company cannot make duplication discs that have the appropriate CP signal on the disc | and make it consistent with the CP signal comparison result. Also, it is impossible to tamper with the CP signal configuration information. Therefore, duplication can be prevented. < Effect of the invention > The optical disc and the reproduction device of the present invention are attached to the optical disc. After the signal of a certain pattern is rubbed, a recording field can be set to record a signal that shifts the center of the eye pattern from the center of the amplitude. After detecting a certain pattern signal on the reproduction device, by intentionally applying an offset voltage to the base value when the RF signal is restored to a digital signal, a signal that shifts the center of the eye pattern from the center of the amplitude is reproduced And assign it to a person who can stop its reproduction if the offset signal is not reproduced. Also, by a reproduction device, the signal is reproduced from a recording area in which a signal that shifts the center of the eye pattern from the center of the amplitude is recorded. The above signals that are restored as digital signals are normal signals. If the restored signals are recorded on a recordable optical disc medium, when they are reproduced * the center of the eye pattern is recorded almost at the center of the amplitude on. Therefore, if the reproduction device shifts the limiting level when the RF signal is restored to a digital signal, it cannot be regarded as a normal signal reproduction when it is reproduced. Its reproduction will stop. Therefore, it is impossible to reproduce the disc. Recycled products > Prevents illegal duplication. 11 ^ 1-I— 11 «^ 1—-I---J-I 1 < ^^ 1 Γ II --- 1 i I --- 0¾ · -Hair (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) -92- This paper size applies to China's national standard (CMS > Μ size (210X 297 cm)

Claims (1)

4 6203 9 ABCD .正i修 經濟部中央標準局員U ΐ.. 六、申請專利範圍 1 . 一種光記錄媒邇,其具有:第一記錄領域,其係 可記錄於再生記錄信號時*相當於再生裝置中之類比信號 處理部中之最佳限輻位準之記錄信號之眼孔鱷樣中心,被 自前述眼孔樣之振轜中心偏移開來之偏移信號者;第二 記錄領域,其係記錄有可表示記錄前述偏移信號之第一記 錄領域之存在或位置之信號者,其中前述第二記錄領域係 形成於再生時先行於第一記錄領域之位置中,或韻人(r ead — i η)領域中者。 2 * —種光記錄媒β,其具有:第一記錄領域,其記 錄有記錄軌跡上之信號記錄部之功率比•被自檷燦值偏移 開來之偏移信號者;第二記錄領域,其記錄有可表示記錄 前述偏移信號之第一記錄領域之存在或位置之信號者•其 中前述第二記錄領域係形成於再生畤先行於第一記錄領域 之位置中,或讀入(read—in)領域中者。 3·依申謫専利範國第1或2項之光記錄媒鱷,其中 前述第一記錄領域中*更記錄有可表示前述第一記錄領域 已將近终了之信號者。 4 · 一種光磲原盤之製造方法,其係為可製造具有: 記錄有記錄軌跡上之信號記錄部之功率比,被自檷準值偏 移開來之偏移信號之第一記錄領域;及記錄有可表示記錄 前述偏移信號之第一記錄領域之存在或位置之信«之第二 記錄領域之光碟者;其特激在於具有以下之步》: 良紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) Α4現格(210X29?公釐) m ι^ϋ I— - - i .1 HI .^1^1 ^—f 1^1 ^^^1 ------- veJI HIB ^^^1 ί f (請先閱讀背面之注$項再填寫本頁) 462039 A8 BS C8 D8 經濟部中央標牟局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 在 作 為 光 碟 原 盤 之 基 材 上 塗 布 光 致 抗 蝕 爾 9 將 此 光 致 抗 蝕 m » 藉 由 應 光 出 應 記 錄 之 資 訊 倍 號 9 K m 度 被 調 製 之 光 * 將 之 想 先 其 後 9 使 該 光 致 抗 胜 m 顏 像 r 而 於 萌 述 作 為 光 m 原 之 基 材 上 % 形 成 對 應 前 述 慼 光 度 之 凹 凸 狀 信 號 槽 者 * 藉 由 變 化 萠 述 賁 訊 信 號 之 記 錄 等 化 ft 9 及 變 化 信 饕 權 之 長 度 及 信 m 畏 度 之 功 率 比 f 形 成 將艰 孔 樣 之 中 心 f 白 振 幅 中 心 • Μ 特 定 Η 偽 偏 移 之 信 諕 領 域 者 〇 5 * 一 種 光 碟 原 盤 之 製 造 方 法 其 係 為 可 製 造 具 有 記 錄 有 記 錄 軌 跡 上 之 信 號 記 錄 部 之 功 率 比 > 被 白 檷 準 值 備 移 開 來 之 偏 移 信 號 之 第 一 記 錄 领 域 t 及 記 錄有 可 表 示 記 錄 前 述 偏 移 信 號 之 第 — 記 錄 領 域 之 存 在 或 位 置 之 信 it 之 第 二 記 錄 領 域 之 光 磲 者 其 特 徽 在 於 具 有 以 下 之 步 驟 ; 在 作 為 光 碟 原 盤 之 基 材 上 塗 布 光 致 抗 mm 將 此 光 致 抗 蝕 劑 , 藉 由 感 光 出 應 記 錄 之 資 訊 信 號 f Μ 強 度 被 調 製 之 光 9 將 之 感 光 其 後 t 使 該 光 致 抗 触 蘭 顯 像 9 而 於 前 述 作 為 光 碟 原 盤 之 基 材 上 t 形 成對 應 前 述 感 光 度 之 凹 凸 狀 信 號 樓 者 ♦ • 藉 由 變 化 使 萠 逑 光 致 抗 蝕 爾 想 光 之 光 強 度 對 應 其 強 度 變 化 t kk m 成 將 眼 孔 _ 揉 之 中 心 9 自 振 蝠 中 心 S K 特 定 闞 係 偏 移 之 信 號 領 域 者 0 6 • . 種 光 碟 原 盤 之 製 造 方 法 9 其 係 Ά 可 製 造 具 有 ; 記 錄 有 記 錄 軌 跡 上 之 信 號 記 錄 部 之 功 率 比 > 被 自 m 準 值 偏 - 2- 請 先 閱 讀 背 τέ 之 注 項 再 訂 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A4規格(2!0Χ297公釐) t i 462039 A8 B8 C8 D8 t、申請專利範圍 移開來之偏移信饕之第一記錄領域;及記錄有可表示記錄 前逑偏移信號之第一記錄領域之存在戎位置之信號之第二 記錄領域之光磲者;其特徽在於具有κ下之步»: 在作為光碟原盤之基材上塗布光致抗触則•將此光致抗 蝕劑,藉由感光出應記錄之賁訊信號,以強度被調製之光 ,將之感光,其後,使該光致抗蝕爾顯像,而於前述作為 光碟原盤之基材上,肜成對應前述感光度之凹凸狀倍號擂 者; 藉由坩加前述資訊信號之記錄等化董,且減低使前述 光致抗抽劑感光之光強度;或者藉由減泜前述資訊信號之 記錄等化最,且《加使萠述光致抗蝕劑感光之光雔度,K 成將艰孔圈樣之中心*自振輻中心,Μ特定闥係偏移之信 號領域者。 7·—種光碟之再生方法•其具有以下之步»,即: 自Μ信號樓記錄讕製信號的光碟上·Κ光讓頭再生對應於 信號槽之記錄信號的RF諝製信號之步»;將前述再生倌 號,Κ具有特定之基值之位Ϊ限幅器變換成數位信號之步 嫌;以復元器將數位信號復元之步驟;其特徵在於具有Κ 下步驟,即:檢知特定圈樣之預告信號的步驟;在檢知上 述預告信號後之特定時間之間,膊前述位準限轜器之前述 基值變更成特定值的步驟。 8 · —種光碟之再生裝置*其係自Κ信號擄記錄鼸製 信號的光碟上,以光讚頭再生對應於信號榷之記錄信號之 -3一 本紙張尺度適用中國國家摞窣(CNS ) A4规格(210X297公嫠) --------ά------tT------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標隼局員工消_V 4 6 203 9 Α8 Β8 C8 D84 6203 9 ABCD. Member of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs U ΐ .. 6. Application for Patent Scope 1. An optical recording medium 具有 has: a first recording field, which can be recorded when a recorded signal is reproduced * equivalent The eyelet crocodile-like center of the recording signal with the best limiting level in the analog signal processing section in the reproduction device is shifted from the center of the eyelet-like vibration center; the second recording field , Which is recorded with a signal that can indicate the existence or location of the first recording area in which the aforementioned offset signal is recorded, wherein the aforementioned second recording area is formed in a position that precedes the first recording area during reproduction, or a rhyme ( r ead — i η) in the field. 2 * —An optical recording medium β, which has: a first recording area that records the power ratio of the signal recording section on the recording track • an offset signal that has been shifted from its own value; a second recording area Those who record a signal that indicates the existence or position of the first recording area where the aforementioned offset signal is recorded. The second recording area is formed in the position where the reproduction is preceded by the first recording area, or read (read —In) those in the field. 3. The optical recording medium crocodile according to item 1 or 2 of Yishenli Fanguo, in which the first recording area * further records a signal indicating that the aforementioned first recording area is nearing its end. 4 · A method for manufacturing an optical disc master, which is capable of manufacturing a first recording field having: a power ratio of a signal recording portion on which a recording track is recorded, and an offset signal shifted from a standard value; and Those who have recorded a letter that can indicate the existence or location of the first recording field of the aforementioned offset signal «the second recording field; its special excitement is that it has the following steps": Good paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 is present (210X29? Mm) m ι ^ ϋ I—--i .1 HI. ^ 1 ^ 1 ^ —f 1 ^ 1 ^^^ 1 ------- veJI HIB ^^^ 1 ί f (Please read the note on the back before filling in this page) 462039 A8 BS C8 D8 Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards and Mobilization of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Application scope of patents Coating photoresist on the substrate of the original disc 9 Make this photoresist m »The light should be modulated by the light to be recorded. The magnification of 9 K m degree light * Think about it next 9 Make this light better than m Image r % Formation pairs on the substrate as a light source The aforementioned concave-convex signal groove of the photometric signal * By changing the recorded equalization of the signal signal ft 9 and changing the length of the signal weight and the power ratio f of the signal intensity f form the center of the hole-like pattern f white amplitude Center • Μ Specialist in the field of false offset information 〇5 * A manufacturing method of optical disc master is to produce a power ratio with a signal recording section with recorded recording tracks > removed by white standard The first recording area t of the offset signal and the second recording area that has a letter indicating the existence or location of the recording of the aforementioned offset signal—the recording area it ’s special feature lies in the following steps: The photoresist mm is coated on the base material of the original disc. This photoresist is modulated by sensing the information signal f Μ intensity to be recorded. The light 9 is light-sensitive and then t makes the photo-resistant anti-contact blue image 9 to form a concave-convex signal floor corresponding to the above-mentioned sensitivity on the substrate of the disc as the original disc t. The anti-corrosion light intensity corresponding to the intensity change t kk m becomes the eye hole _ rubbing the center 9 from the vibrating bat center SK specific signal offset in the field of signal 0 6 •. Manufacturing method of a disc master 9 its Ά It can be manufactured; The power ratio of the signal recording section with the recorded track > is deviated from the m-standard value-2-Please read the note of τέ before ordering. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2! 0 × 297 mm) ti 462039 A8 B8 C8 D8 t, the first recording field of the offset signal from which the patent application scope has been removed; and the existence of the first recording field where the offset signal before the recording can be recorded The Letter of Rong Location The light recorder in the second recording field; its special feature is that it has the step of κ »: coating photoresistance on the substrate of the original disc. • This photoresist should be recorded by light. The light signal is modulated by the intensity-modulated light, which is then sensitized. Then, the photoresist is developed, and on the substrate used as the original disc of the optical disc, it is formed into a concave-convex multiple corresponding to the aforementioned sensitivity. No .; by equalizing the recording of the aforementioned information signal and reducing the intensity of light that makes the aforementioned photoresistance light sensitive; or by reducing the equalizing of the aforementioned information signal recording, and The photosensitivity of the photoresist is described as K, the center of the hole-like circle * the center of the self-resonant spokes, and the signal area of the specific M offset. 7 · —A kind of optical disc reproduction method • It has the following steps », namely: On the optical disc on which the recording signal is recorded from the M signal building · The step of the K optical reproduction head to reproduce the RF control signal corresponding to the recording signal of the signal slot» The step of transforming the aforementioned regeneration signal, κ with a specific base value limiter into a digital signal; the step of restoring the digital signal with a resetter; characterized by having the next step of κ, that is, detecting a specific The step of looping the preview signal; the step of changing the aforementioned base value of the aforementioned level limiter to a specific value between a specific time after detecting the aforementioned preview signal. 8 · —Reproduction device for optical discs * It is a CD-recorded recording disc, which reproduces the recorded signal corresponding to the signal with an optical head. -3 This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public address) -------- ά ------ tT ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Staff of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer_V 4 6 203 9 Α8 Β8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 R F調製信號*並使用具有特定之基值之位準限幅器將前 述R F調製信號變換成數位信號,其特微在於:其在檢知 特定之圈揉之預告信虢後之特$時間之間,將前述位準限 幅器之前述基值變換成特定1 9 ·依申請專利範圍第7項ΊΙ^:$光碟其 係具有若不再生記錄有將眼孔B裰β心自振幅移 之信號之記錄領域中,所記錄之信《•即停止其Μ後之再 生之手段者。 1 0 ♦—種光碟苒生装置*其係播由光讓顗*讀取包 含有被調製並被記錄於光磲上之程式的賁料信虢,並再生 類比信號,復藉由限幅回路,將限幅霣壓對應前述類比信 號之功率比,於基準限幅罨壓中加入®移霣*加Κ補正* 而以該補正限幅電壓,限幅前述類比信號,藉此,再生第 一數位信號*復藉由復元器,從前述第一數位信號中復元 出第二數為信號,再將荊述第二數位信號,糴由錯誤定正 回路,再生成第三数位信號者,其特激在於具有: 可檢知前逑偏移霄壓之變化是否為特定鼷係之《移信 號變化檢知部;及前述儡移信號變化檢知部,於檢知不出 前述偏移信號為前逑特定闢係時,即停止前述之»科_出 ,或停止程式動作之手段者;及 於再生記錄於光碟之一部份領域中之偏移信號配置資 訊,並以前述偏移信號配置資訊所揭示之特定Μ係,而僅 在前述偏移信號檢知部,檢知偏移信號確記錄於光碟之特 -4- 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) A<4規格(210 X 297公釐) I I i I __ 1 .裝 I —— I I I I I I 夯 (請先聞讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部中央標_局男工消費合作杜印製 4 6 20 3 9 A8 B8 C8 D8六、申請專利範圍 定領域中時,方繼績萠述光磲之資料输出或程式動作,若 檢知不出®令其停止之手段者。 1 1 *依申讅專利範圍第10項之光礫再生装置*其 構成係為:藉由光績頭 > 再生記錄於光記錄部中之偏移信 號配置資訊者。 1 2 ·依申請專利範团第1 0項之光碟再生裝置,其 構成係為··»由磁顗,再生記嫌於磁性記錄部中之偏移信 號配置資訊者6 1 3 « —種不法程式動作停止方法,其係藉由光鏞頭 ,講取包含有被調製並被記錄於光磲上之程式的資科信虢 •並再生類比信號,復藉由限轘囲路,將限幅霣壓對應前 述類比信號之功率比*於基準限輻電壓中加入偏移霣懕加 Μ補正,而以該補正限幅霣壓,限輻前述類比信號,藉此 ,再生第一數位信號•復藉由復元器,從前述第一敝位信 號中復元出第二數為信號,再將前述第二數位值號》藉由 錯誤定正回路,再生成第三數位信號之再生装置中*設置 可檢知前述偏移電壓之變化是否為特定《係之偏移信號變 化檢知部;於前逑偏移信號變化檢知部,檢知不出前述偏 移信為前逑特定W係時,即停止前述之資料輸出,或停止 程式動作者; 於再生記錄於光碟之一部份領域中之偏移信號配置資 訊,並Κ前述偏移信號配置資訊所揭示之特定闥係,而僅 在前述偏移信號檢知部,檢知偏移信鑪皤記錄於光磉之特 -5 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS ) ( 210Χ 297公釐) (诗先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 9 3 ο 2 6 4 ABCD 六、申請專利範圍 定領域中時,方遢續前述光碟之賁料_出或程式動作•若 檢知不出即令其停止者。 1 4,依申講專利範園第1 3項之不法程式動作停止 方法,其係:藉由光讀頭,再生記錄於光記錄部中之僱移 信號配置資訊者。 15·依申講專利篛國第13項之不法程式動作停止 方法,其係:藉由磁頭,再生記錄於磁性記錄部中之偏移 信號配置黄訊者。 --------,裝------,π------t, (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部中央標隼局員工消費合作杜印製 -6 - 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標窣(CNS ) A4規格(210乂297公釐)6. Patent application scope RF modulation signal * and using a level limiter with a specific base value to convert the aforementioned RF modulation signal into a digital signal, the special feature is that after detecting the notice letter of the specific circle, During the special time, the aforementioned base value of the aforementioned level limiter is transformed into a specific value. 9 According to the 7th patent application scope of the patent application: ^ $: The optical disc has an eyelet B 裰 β if it is not reproduced and recorded. In the field of recording the signal of the heart's self-amplitude shifting, the recorded letter "is the means to stop its regeneration after M." 1 0 ♦ —A kind of optical disc reproduction device * which broadcasts the light and lets the reader read the material information including the program that is modulated and recorded on the optical disk, and reproduces the analog signal, and then uses the limiter circuit , The limiting threshold voltage corresponds to the power ratio of the aforementioned analog signal, and the reference limiting threshold voltage is added with ®shift 霣 * 加 Κ 补 * to limit the aforementioned analog signal with the corrected limiting voltage, thereby regenerating the first The digital signal * complex uses the restorer to recover the second number from the aforementioned first digital signal as a signal, and then the second digital signal is described by the error correction circuit to generate a third digital signal. The excitement consists of: a shift signal change detection section that can detect whether the change in the frontal offset pressure is a specific system; and the aforementioned shift signal change detection section, which can detect if the aforementioned offset signal cannot be detected.逑 When a specific system is established, those who have stopped the above-mentioned »Technology or program operation; and reproduced the offset signal configuration information recorded in a part of the disc, and used the aforementioned offset signal configuration information The specific M system disclosed, The shift signal detection unit detects that the offset signal is indeed recorded on the optical disc. -4- This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A < 4 specification (210 X 297 mm) II i I __ 1. — IIIIII Ram (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs' Central Consumer Bureau's Consumer Cooperatives Printed by the Ministry of Economics' Central Bureau of Economic Affairs _ Bureau Male Workers' Consumer Cooperation Du printed 4 6 20 3 9 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. When the scope of the patent application is in the specified field, Fang Jiji describes the data output or program action of the light, if the means to stop it can not be detected. 1 1 * The gravel reproduction device according to item 10 of the patent application scope * is constituted by: using an optical head > to reproduce the offset signal configuration information recorded in the optical recording section. 1 2 · The optical disc reproduction device according to item 10 of the patent application group, which is constituted as follows: »The magnetic disc is used to reproduce the information about the offset signal allocation information in the magnetic recording section. 6 1 3« —Illegal The method of stopping the program operation is to read the asset information including the program that is modulated and recorded on the optical card through the optical head, and reproduce the analog signal, and then use the limit path to limit the amplitude. The pressure corresponds to the power ratio of the aforementioned analog signal. * An offset is added to the reference limiting voltage and the M correction is added, and the corrected limiting voltage is used to limit the aforementioned analog signal, thereby regenerating the first digital signal. With the restoration device, the second number is recovered from the first bit signal as a signal, and then the second number value is corrected by the error correction circuit, and a third digital signal is generated in the reproduction device. Detect whether the change in the offset voltage is a specific offset signal change detection unit; when the previous offset signal change detection unit cannot detect that the offset signal is a specific W system before, Stop the aforementioned data output, or stop the program operator; The offset signal configuration information recorded in a part of the area of the optical disc is reproduced, and the specific system disclosed by the foregoing offset signal configuration information is detected, and only the offset signal detection section detects the offset signal furnace.皤 Recorded in Guangzhete-5-This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) (210 × 297 mm) (Read the notes on the back of the poem before filling this page) 9 3 ο 2 6 4 ABCD When the range is in the specified range, Fang will continue the above-mentioned disc's data output or program action. • If it fails to detect, it will stop it. 14. According to the application, the method of stopping the illegal program operation in Item 13 of the Patent Fan Garden shall be described as follows: the optical read head is used to reproduce the employment signal allocation information recorded in the optical recording department. 15. According to the application, the method of stopping the illegal program operation in the 13th country of the patent is based on the method of: using a magnetic head to reproduce the offset signal recorded in the magnetic recording section to configure the yellow signal. --------, install ------, π ------ t, (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Staff Consumption Cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs -6-This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 乂 297mm)
TW086102384A 1993-07-27 1995-01-26 Optical recording medium, reproduction apparatus of optical disk and method thereof, fabricating method of the original optic disk, and illegal program operation stop method TW462039B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP20568293 1993-07-27
PCT/JP1994/002304 WO1995018443A1 (en) 1993-12-28 1994-12-28 Optical recording medium, reproduction apparatus of optical disk, reproduction method of optical disk, production method of original disk of optical disk, and illegal program operation stop method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW462039B true TW462039B (en) 2001-11-01

Family

ID=16510954

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW086102384A TW462039B (en) 1993-07-27 1995-01-26 Optical recording medium, reproduction apparatus of optical disk and method thereof, fabricating method of the original optic disk, and illegal program operation stop method
TW084100693A TW310421B (en) 1993-07-27 1995-01-26

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW084100693A TW310421B (en) 1993-07-27 1995-01-26

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (2) TW462039B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI406274B (en) * 2007-12-11 2013-08-21 Sony Corp A manufacturing method of a reproduction-only type optical disc medium, and a reproduction-type optical disc medium

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI406274B (en) * 2007-12-11 2013-08-21 Sony Corp A manufacturing method of a reproduction-only type optical disc medium, and a reproduction-type optical disc medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW310421B (en) 1997-07-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN100423090C (en) Optical disc, method for producing optical disc and replay device
KR100381119B1 (en) Method and system for prevention of illegal copy and install of information on optical recording media
CN100470655C (en) Copy control method
ES2281101T3 (en) IMPROVEMENTS IN AND IN RELATION TO OPTICALLY LEGIBLE DISCS AND DISC RECORDING DEVICE.
US6122245A (en) Optical recording medium and reproducing apparatus for optical recording medium
CN100442324C (en) Recording method, recording device, reproduction method and reproduction appts.
CN101427311A (en) Optical disc, its reproducing device, recording device, manufacturing method, and integrated circuit
KR19990044163A (en) Information carriers, reading devices and methods of manufacturing the information carriers comprising auxiliary information
JPS60500928A (en) Video cassette play counting, storage and reading equipment
TWI327312B (en)
TWI277965B (en) Mastering device, disc manufacturing method, disc-shaped recording medium, disc reproduction device, and disc reproduction method
EA003963B1 (en) Controlled distributing of digital information, in particular audio
TW527588B (en) Compact disk device, access method of compact disk, and the compact disk
TW546634B (en) Method of storing a disc-ID on a record carrier, device and record carrier
JPH08212681A (en) Recording/reproducing device
US6928040B2 (en) Identifying copy protected optical compact discs
JPH11126426A (en) Optical information recording device, optical information recording method, optical information recording medium, and optical information reproducing device
TW462039B (en) Optical recording medium, reproduction apparatus of optical disk and method thereof, fabricating method of the original optic disk, and illegal program operation stop method
WO1986006535A1 (en) Method of recording data onto an optical data recording card
US20060120685A1 (en) Data recording method and device, data recording medium, data reproduction method and device, data transmission method and device, and data reception method and device
CN100552796C (en) CD and the apparatus and method that are used to make CD, record or reproduce data of optical disk
JP2852181B2 (en) Information recording medium and optical disk
US8705326B2 (en) Copy protection method for optical storage device
JP3562509B2 (en) Playback device
CN101159155B (en) Information processing unit

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MK4A Expiration of patent term of an invention patent